Malc 1 11 2 CLIRefGuide

Zhone CLI Reference Guide
For software version 1.11.2

June 2005
Document Part Number: 830-00506-10
Zhone Technologies
@Zhone Way
7001 Oakport Street
Oakland, CA 94621
USA
510.777.7000
www.zhone.com
info@zhone.com
COPYRIGHT ©2000-2005 Zhone Technologies, Inc. and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This publication is protected by copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or
distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human
or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual
or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission from Zhone
Technologies, Inc.
BAN, GigaMux, MALC, Raptor, SLMS, Z-Edge, Zhone, ZMS, and the Zhone logo are
trademarks of Zhone Technologies, Inc.
Zhone Technologies makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof
and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability, noninfringement, or
fitness for a particular purpose. Further, Zhone Technologies reserves the right to revise this
publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of
Zhone Technologies to notify any person of such revision or changes.
2 Zhone CLI Reference Guide

CONTENTS
About This Guide ...............................................................................................................................7

Style and notation conventions..............................................................................7
Typographical conventions.......................................................................................7
Acronyms......................................................................................................................8
Related documents ....................................................................................................9
Contacting Global Service and Support...............................................................9
Technical support......................................................................................................9
Service requirements.................................................................................................9
Chapter 1 Introduction to the CLI ........................................................................................11

Terminology ...............................................................................................................11
Logging in...................................................................................................................12
Profile indexes...........................................................................................................13
Virtual .....................................................................................................................13
Automatically provisioned if-translate records.......................................................13
Physical interfaces............................................................................................13
Virtual interfaces ..............................................................................................13
Basic commands ......................................................................................................13
Viewing profiles ........................................................................................................15
Viewing records ........................................................................................................16
Viewing commands..................................................................................................16
Getting help on a command ....................................................................................17
Finding a command.................................................................................................17
Modifying records ....................................................................................................18
new command .........................................................................................................18
Displaying parameter values...................................................................................19
update command .....................................................................................................20
delete command ......................................................................................................21
ifTypes .........................................................................................................................21
CLI shortcuts .............................................................................................................22
Command completion.............................................................................................22
Command history and shortcuts..............................................................................23
Basic control commands ..................................................................................23
Zhone CLI Reference Guide 3

Contents
Movement and search commands ....................................................................24

Insert and change commands ...........................................................................25
Delete commands .............................................................................................25
Put and undo commands...................................................................................26
Chapter 2 Commands ...............................................................................................................27

A ....................................................................................................................................27
B ....................................................................................................................................32
C ....................................................................................................................................39
D ....................................................................................................................................49
E ....................................................................................................................................60
F.....................................................................................................................................62
G ....................................................................................................................................76
H ....................................................................................................................................78
I ......................................................................................................................................82
L.....................................................................................................................................90
M....................................................................................................................................99
N ..................................................................................................................................101
P ..................................................................................................................................103
R ..................................................................................................................................105
S ..................................................................................................................................112
T...................................................................................................................................146
U ..................................................................................................................................148
V ..................................................................................................................................150
W .................................................................................................................................159
Z...................................................................................................................................159
Alphabetic List of Parameters..................................................................................................161
Chapter 3 Parameters .............................................................................................................169

ADSL ..........................................................................................................................169
ATM ............................................................................................................................181
Bridging.....................................................................................................................199
Card ............................................................................................................................203
Channel Emulation Service (CES) .....................................................................211
Clocking ....................................................................................................................213
DHCP..........................................................................................................................216

DNS.............................................................................................................................229
DS1 .............................................................................................................................231
DS3 .............................................................................................................................239
DSL .............................................................................................................................245
ELCP .........................................................................................................................251
Ethernet.....................................................................................................................254
FXS/FXO ....................................................................................................................259
GR303 ........................................................................................................................265
IfIndex ........................................................................................................................271
IMA..............................................................................................................................274
IP .................................................................................................................................279
ISDN............................................................................................................................286
MTAC/Ring................................................................................................................288
Network Time Protocol..........................................................................................289
PON ............................................................................................................................292
PPPoA........................................................................................................................293
RIP ..............................................................................................................................307
RS232.........................................................................................................................311
SHDSL........................................................................................................................313
Sechtor 100A environmental ...............................................................................319
SNMP..........................................................................................................................320
SONET .......................................................................................................................322
Subscriber ................................................................................................................328
System.......................................................................................................................330
V5.2.............................................................................................................................333
VDSL ..........................................................................................................................346
Voice .........................................................................................................................346
User ............................................................................................................................362
ZMS.............................................................................................................................364
Index ....................................................................................................................................................367

Contents

ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide is intended for use by system users or administrators.
Note: This document describes all the parameters and commands in

the Zhone CLI. The parameters and commands that appear on a
particular system depend on the system software running and the
hardware configuration of the device.
Style and notation conventions

The following conventions are used in this document to alert users to
information that is instructional, warns of potential damage to system
equipment or data, and warns of potential injury or death. Carefully read and
follow the instructions included in this document.
Caution: A caution alerts users to conditions or actions that could

damage equipment or data.
Note: A note provides important supplemental or amplified

information.
Tip: A tip provides additional information that enables users to more

readily complete their tasks.
WARNING! A warning alerts users to conditions or actions that

could lead to injury or death.
WARNING! A warning with this icon alerts users to conditions or

actions that could lead to injury caused by a laser.
Typographical conventions
The following typographical styles are used in this guide to represent specific
types of information.

About This Guide
Bold Used for names of buttons, dialog boxes, icons, menus,

profiles when placed in body text, and property pages (or
sheets). Also used for commands, options, parameters in
body text, and user input in body text.
Fixed Used in code examples for computer output, file names, path
names, and the contents of online files or directories.
Fixed Bold Used in code examples for text typed by users.
Fixed Bold Used in code examples for variable text typed by users.
Italic
Italic Used for book titles, chapter titles, file path names, notes in
body text requiring special attention, section titles,
emphasized terms, and variables.
PLAIN UPPER Used for environment variables.

CASE
Acronyms
The following acronyms appear throughout this manual:
Table 1: Acronyms and their descriptions
Acronym Description
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BAN Broadband Access Node
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
HDSL2 High-bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line
IAD Integrated Access Device

MALC Multi-Access Line Concentrator
MIB Management Information Base
PBX Private Branch Exchange

RIP Routing Information Protocol
SDSL Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line
SLMS Single Line Multi-Service
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

Related documents
Table 1: Acronyms and their descriptions
Acronym Description
VCL Virtual Channel Link

VPI Virtual Path Identifier
ZMS Zhone Management System
Related documents
Refer to the documentation that came with your Zhone device for information
about configuring the device.
Contacting Global Service and Support

Contact Global Service and Support (GSS) if you have any questions about
this or other Zhone products. Before contacting GSS, make sure you have the
following information:
• Zhone product you are using
• System configuration
• Software version running on the system
• Description of the issue
Technical support
If you require assistance with the installation or operation of your product, or

if you want to return a product for repair under warranty, contact GSS. The
contact information is as follows:
E-mail support@zhone.com
Telephone (North America) 877-ZHONE20
Telephone (International) 510-777-7133
Internet www.zhone.com/support
If you purchased the product from an authorized dealer, distributor, Value

Added Reseller (VAR), or third party, contact that supplier for technical
assistance and warranty support.
Service requirements
If the product malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by the

manufacturer or a Zhone-authorized agent. It is the responsibility of users
requiring service to report the need for service to GSS.

About This Guide

1
INTRODUCTION TO THE CLI
This chapter describes how to use the Zhone command line interface (CLI). It
contains the following sections:
• Terminology, page 11
• Logging in, page 12
• Basic commands, page 13
• Viewing profiles, page 15
• Viewing records, page 16
• Viewing commands, page 16
• Modifying records, page 18
• ifTypes, page 21
• CLI shortcuts, page 22
Terminology
The following terms are used throughout this document:
Term Description
Access levels The privilege level assigned to each user. Access levels
determine the commands the user can execute.
Address Every physical interface in the system has an address.

Addressing on Zhone systems is of the form: shelf/slot/
port/subport, where subport is a logical interface
associated with a physical interface, such as Ethernet
interface.
Profiles not associated with physical interfaces, such as
subscriber profiles, have profile indexes.
CLI The command line interface. Used to configure the

Zhone system.

Introduction to the CLI
Term Description
Command Commands are used to view, add, delete and configure

system profiles. Commands also allow administrators to
perform system administrative tasks such as loading new
software, adding users, and viewing system status.
Parameter An item within a profile that you set in order to
configure the Zhone stem. For example, each Subscriber
profile has a Name parameter that contains the name of
the subscriber.
Profile A profile is a template that is used to create records. For

example, IP interfaces and SDSL lines have profiles,
which are configured by administrative users and
associated with a particular address.
Profile index An index for a profile. Profiles not associated with

physical interfaces, such as subscriber profiles, have
profile indexes. Profiles associated with physical
interfaces, such as SDSL lines, have addresses.
Record A record is an instance of a profile associated with a

particular subscriber, service, or interface. Records store
configuration information.
Subscriber Subscribers are remote users to which the Zhone system

provides services.
User A user is an administrator of the Zhone system. Users

log into the unit to configure or manage it.
Logging in
You can access the CLI through a local serial craft connection or through a
telnet session.
To access the serial port, configure your terminal interface software with the
following settings:
• 9600bps
• 8 data bits
• No parity
• 1 stop bit
• No flow control
Connect a serial crossover cable to the DE-9 port on the unit labeled Serial
Craft. At the prompt, enter default username (admin) and password (zhone):
login:admin
password: *****
zSH>

Profile indexes
Profile indexes
This section describes profile indexes.
Virtual
All non-physical (virtual) if-translate records have their shelf, slot, port,
subport fields set to zero. These interfaces are accessible by name only.
Physical interfaces have both names and shelf-slot-port-subport values.
Examples of a physical interface types include hdsl2, adsl, sonet, atmima,
and ethernetcsmacd. Examples of virtual interfaces types include atm, aal5,
rfc1483 and ip.
Automatically provisioned if-translate records
The system automatically provisions certain if-translate records. These

include physical interfaces (for example hdsl2 and adsl), line group interfaces
(other), and ATM interfaces (for example atm, aal5, rfc1483). The
addressing of these profiles
Physical interfaces
For physical interfaces the name is a dash (-) separated string of shelf, slot,
port, subport (shelf-slot-port-subport). For example: 1-2-1-0.
Virtual interfaces
For virtual interfaces, the profile address is the same with the addition of the
ianatype name of the physical interface on the end (shelf-slot-port-subport/
physicaltype).
For example, for a virtual interface stacked on an hdsl2 interface, the index
would be 1-2-1-0-hdls2.
Basic commands
The CLI contains profiles, which are templates for configuring the system;
records, which are specific instances of profiles; and commands, which
manipulate records or perform system functions (such as displaying line
status).
The following table describes the most important CLI commands.

Command Description
delete Deletes a record.

Syntax:
delete profile-type [ index | * ]
where profile-type is the type of profile and * is a
wildcard character.
get Displays the contents of a record.

Syntax:
get profile-type index
where profile-type is the type of profile and index is
the index of the profile (for example,
shelf-slot-port-subport/type).
help Displays the available commands or help on a

particular command.
Syntax:
help [ command ]
list Lists available profiles or displays the contents of a
specified profile.
Syntax:
list [ profile-type | * ]
where profile-type is the type of profile and * is a
wildcard character.
Without options, the list command displays all the
profiles on the system.
new Creates a new record.
Syntax:
new profile-type index

Viewing profiles
Command Description
show Displays the content of the specified profile along

with the possible values of the parameters.
Syntax:
show profile-type
where profile-type is the type of profile.
update Updates the contents of an existing record.

Syntax:
update profile-type index
Viewing profiles
To view the profiles on the system, use the list command. After each profile is
the format of the address or profile index for the profile. For example, the
card-profile requires a shelf/slot/port address:
card-profile: shelf/slot/type/
Where shelf and slot are the physical location of the device and type is the
type of the card.
Note: The profiles on your system may vary, depending on the

configuration of your unit.
For example:
zSH> list
aal2-audio-profile: audioProfileIdentifier/apIndex
aal2-cid-profile: ifIndex/vpi/vci/cid
aal2-vcl-profile: ifIndex/vpi/vci
adsl-co-profile: shelf/slot/port
adsl-cpe-profile: shelf/slot/port
adsl-profile: shelf/slot/port
atm-cc: atmVcCrossConnectIndex
atm-if: ifIndex
atm-if-stats: ifIndex
atm-traf-descr: index
atm-traf-descr-idx-next: index
atm-traf-descr-stats: index
atm-vcl: ifIndex/vpi/vci
atm-vcl-param: index
atm-vcl-stats: ifIndex/vpi/vci
atm-vpi: ifIndex/vpi
atm-vpl: ifIndex/vpi
bulk-statistic: index

bulk-statistics-config: index<SPACE> for next page, <CR>

for next line, A for all, Q to quit
Viewing records
To view the configured records of a particular type, enter list command then
the name of the profile. For example:
zSH> list atm-vcl
atm-vcl 1-6-1-0-sonet/atm/0/35
To view all configured records on the system, use the list command with the
wildcard character (*):
zSH> list *
aal2-audio-profile 7/1
atm-cc 14
atm-cc 5
atm-cc 6
atm-cc 7
atm-cc 8
atm-cc 1
<SPACE> for next page, <CR> for next line, A for all, Q to
quit
Viewing commands
To see a list of all the commands available, along with a short description of
their use, enter the help command without arguments:
zSH> help
1 help [commands]
2 adduser
3 ata - initialize/show ATA flash partitions.

Viewing commands
4 bootstate - <slot> display the boot state of a given

slot card
5 cd - change current directory.
6 changepass
7 commit <profile-type> <profile-storage-key>
8 copy - copy a file.
9 create <profile-type> <profile-storage-key>
10 del - Delete a file.
11 delete <profile-type> <profile-storage-key>
Wildcards may be used in the profile-storage-key.
12 deleteuser <userName>
13 dir - list directory contents.
14 dump <[console] | [file filename] | [network host
filename]>
15 eeset elementID elementValue <epromID> <slot>
16 eeshow eepromName <slot>
17 featurebitdisplay <featurenum>
18 featurebitset offset mask value hashCode
19 fhrameping shelf/slot</port>
20 file - download/upload files.
21 filter command [arguments]
Type A<CR> to print all, <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop:
Getting help on a command
To get help on a particular command, enter the help command with the name
of the command. For example:
zSH> help get
Usage: get <profile-type> <profile-storage-key>
This command retrieves an existing profile record and
displays its contents.
EX: zSH> get a-profile <profile-storage-key>
zSH> show a-profile
aField: ------>[0 - 1]
bField: ------>[0 - 2]
cField: ------>[0 - 5]
dField: ------>[0 - 7]
Note: A message is displayed if there is no record
matching the profile storage key
Finding a command
The find command allows you to search through the available commands.
The command uses the following syntax:
find [-s(ubSearch) | -d(etailed)] stringToSearch
-s
Search the previous search results for the specified string.
-d
Search the online help for each command for the specified string.

-ds or -sd
Search the online help of the commands in the previous search for the
specified string.
substring
The string to search for.
For example, the following command finds all commands containing the
string “show”:
zSH> find show
eeshow msgtrafficshow
show showdatetime
showlinestatus showlogo
showresolver showuser
showzhonecpe
Modifying records
The new, update, and delete commands are the primary commands to modify
records.
new command
The new command creates new profiles. Some profiles, such as those
associated with physical devices, can only be created if the device is installed
in the system.
The following example creates a new ip-interface-record. Press Enter to
accept the default value:
zSH> new ip-interface-record 1-1-1-0/ip
Please provide the following: [q]uit.
vpi: ---------------> {0}:
vci: ---------------> {0}:
rdindex: -----------> {1}:
dhcp: --------------> {none}: ** read-only **
addr: --------------> {0.0.0.0}: 192.168.8.21
netmask: -----------> {0.0.0.0}: 255.255.255.0
bcastaddr: ---------> {0.0.0.0}: 192.168.8.255
destaddr: ----------> {0.0.0.0}:
farendaddr: --------> {0.0.0.0}:
mru: ---------------> {1500}:
reasmmaxsize: ------> {0}:
ingressfiltername: -> {}:
egressfiltername: --> {}:
pointtopoint: ------> {no}:
mcastenabled: ------> {yes}:
ipfwdenabled: ------> {yes}:
mcastfwdenabled: ---> {yes}:
natenabled: --------> {no}:
bcastenabled: ------> {yes}:
ingressfilterid: ---> {0}:

Modifying records
egressfilterid: ----> {0}:

ipaddrdynamic: -----> {static}:
dhcpserverenable: --> {false}:
....................
Save new record? [s]ave, [c]hange or [q]uit: s
Record created.
After entering the values the system displays the values you’ve entered and
prompts you to save the record. If you want to save the changes, press s. If
you want to make changes, press c to re-enter values. Press q at any time to
quit without saving changes.
Note: The CLI accepts abbreviated or complete input to modify

records: You can enter s or save to save changes, enter c or change to
make more changes, enter q or quit to stop without saving changes.
Displaying parameter values
There are two ways to display valid values for a parameter, with the show
command or inline while you are updating the record.
To use the show command:
zSH> show ip-interface-record
vpi:---------------> {0 - 4095}
vci:---------------> {0 - 65535}
rdindex:-----------> {0 - 2147483647}
dhcp:--------------> none client server both
addr:--------------> {0 - -1}
netmask:-----------> {0 - -1}
bcastaddr:---------> {0 - -1}
destaddr:----------> {0 - -1}
farendaddr:--------> {0 - -1}
mru:---------------> {0 - 2147483647}
reasmmaxsize:------> {0 - 65535}
ingressfiltername:-> {33}
egressfiltername:--> {33}
pointtopoint:------> no yes
mcastenabled:------> no yes
ipfwdenabled:------> no yes
mcastfwdenabled:---> no yes
natenabled:--------> no yes
bcastenabled:------> no yes
ingressfilterid:---> {0 - 2147483647}
egressfilterid:----> {0 - 2147483647}
ipaddrdynamic:-----> static ppp dhcpclient
dhcpserverenable:--> true false
NOTE: Supported VPI/VCI ranges vary based on card type.
See documentation for the exact range of supported VPI/
VCI values

To use view the valid enumerated values while updating the record, enter a
question mark (?) when prompted for a value:
zSH> update ip-interface-record 1-2-1-0/ip
vpi: ---------------> {0}: ?
Invalid entry: vpi range: [0 to 4095]
vpi: ---------------> {0}:
vci: ---------------> {0}:
rdindex: -----------> {1}:
addr: --------------> {192.168.80.190}: ?
Invalid IP address format. Try "n.n.n.n", where n is 0 to
255
addr: --------------> {192.168.80.190}:
netmask: -----------> {255.255.252.0}:
bcastaddr: ---------> {192.168.83.255}:
destaddr: ----------> {0.0.0.0}:
farendaddr: --------> {0.0.0.0}:
mru: ---------------> {1500}:
update command
The update command changes an existing record. The command uses the
following syntax:
The following example updates an ip-interface-record:
zSH> update ip-interface-record 1-1-1-0/ip
vpi: ---------------> {0}:
vci: ---------------> {0}:
rdindex: -----------> {1}:
addr: --------------> {192.168.8.21}: 192.168.8.23
netmask: -----------> {255.255.255.0}:
bcastaddr: ---------> {192.168.8.255}:
destaddr: ----------> {0.0.0.0}:
farendaddr: --------> {0.0.0.0}:
mru: ---------------> {1500}:

ifTypes

....................
Save changes? [s]ave, [c]hange or [q]uit: s
Record updated.
delete command
The delete command deletes an existing record. You can delete a single
record by specifying the address or the index, or multiple records by using a
wildcard (*).
Some records, such a card-profiles, delete all associated records when you
delete them.
ifTypes
Table 2 lists the ifTypes used in Zhone devices.
Tip: When entering an record address, you can specify either the
ifType name or its number.
Table 2: ifTypes
ifType Number Description
EthernetCsmacd 6 Ethernet
ds1 18 DS1 or E1
basicISDN 20 ISDN BRI
primaryISDN 21 ISDN PRI
ppp 23 Point-to-point protocol
DS3 30 DS3
rs232 33 RS-232
atm 37 ATM cells
sonet 39 SONET or SDH

Table 2: ifTypes (Continued)
ifType Number Description
V35 45 V.35
AAL5 49 AAL5 over ATM
ISDN 63 ISDN or X.25
Async 84 Asynchronous protocols

ADSL 94 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber
Loop (ADSL)
radsl 95 Rate-adaptive Digital Subscriber

Loop
voiceEM 100 Voice receive and transmit
voiceFXO 101 Foreign Exchange Office
voiceFXS 102 Foreign Exchange Station
voiceEncap 103 Voice encapsulation
voiceOverIp 104 Voice over IP encapsulation
atmima 107 Inverse multiplexing over ATM
IP 126 Internet Protocol
voiceOverATM 152 Voice over ATM
rfc1483 159 Multiprotocol over ATM AAL5
hdsl2 168 High Bit-Rate DSL, 2nd

generation or SDSL
shdsl 169 Multirate HDSL2
CLI shortcuts
This section describes the following CLI shortcuts:
• Command completion, page 22
• Command history and shortcuts, page 23
Command completion
Command completion provides a shortcut to entering commands and profile

names at the CLI. If you type part of a command or profile name and then
press the TAB key, the CLI will present you with either the remaining portion
of the command/profile name or a list of possible completions.

CLI shortcuts
If there is one option to complete the line, the CLI will provide the complete
command or profile name (as in the following command and profile
examples).
zSH> sw <TAB>
zSH> swversion
If there is more than one option to complete the line, the CLI will display a list
of options that could complete command or profile (as in the following
command and profile examples).
zSH> show <TAB>
show
showdatetime
showhost
showinetstat
showipstat
showlinestatus
showmem
showresolver
showuser
showzhonecpe
zSH> show
zSH> list atm <TAB>

atm-if
atm-if-stats
atm-traf-descr
atm-traf-descr-idx-next
atm-traf-descr-stats
atm-vcl
atm-vcl-stats
zSH> list atm-
Command history and shortcuts
The Zhone CLI supports vi-like commands. This section describes the CLI
command shortcuts.
Basic control commands

Table 3 describes the basic commands to edit, delete, and enter commands
into the system.
Table 3: Basic control commands
Command Description
ESC Switch the line editing mode from regular input mode.
ENTER Enter line and leave edit mode.
CTRL + H Delete a character (backspace).

Table 3: Basic control commands
Command Description
CTRL + U Delete and entire line (in edit mode).

CTRL + L Redraw a line (in edit mode).
CTRL + S Suspend output.
CTRL + Q Resume output.
Movement and search commands

Table 4 describes the movement and search commands.
Table 4: Movement and search commands
Command Description
nG Go to command n.
/string Search for the specified string backward in the history buffer.
?string Search for the specified string forward in the history buffer.
n Repeats the last search.
nk or n- Execute the nth previous shell command.
nj or n+ Execute the nth next shell command.
nh Move the cursor n characters to the left.
nl or SPACE. Move the cursor n characters to the right.

nw Move the cursor n words forward.
(Words are separated by blanks or punctuation.)
nW Move the cursor n large words forward.

(Large words are separated by blanks only.)
ne Move the cursor to the end of the next nth word.

nE Move the cursor to the end of the next nth large word.
nb Move the cursor back n words.

nB Move the cursor back n large words.
$ Move cursor to end of the current line.
0 Move cursor to the beginning of the line.

CLI shortcuts
Table 4: Movement and search commands (Continued)
Command Description
^ Move cursor to the first non-blank character.

fc Search forward for the character c.
Fc Search backward for the character c.
Insert and change commands

Table 5 describes the insert and change commands.
Table 5: Insert and change commands
Command Description
a Append text.
A Append text at the end of line.
i Insert text.
I Insert text at the end of the line.
ns Change n characters.
nc SPACE Change n characters.
cw Change word.
cc or S Change the entire line.
c$ or C Change from cursor to end of line.
c0 Change from the cursor to the beginning of the line.
R Type over characters.
nrc Replace following n characters with c.

~ Toggle case, lower to upper, or upper to lower.
Delete commands
Table 6 describes the delete commands.
Table 6: Delete commands
Command Description
nx Delete n characters, beginning at the cursor.
nX Delete n characters to the left of the cursor.

dw Delete word.
dd Delete entire line.

Table 6: Delete commands
Command Description
d$ or D Delete text from the cursor to the end of the line.

d0 Delete text from the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Put and undo commands

Table 7 describes the put and undo commands.
Table 7: Put and undo commands
Command Description
p Put last deletion after the cursor.
P Put last deletion before the cursor.
u Undo last command.

2
COMMANDS
This chapter describes each of the CLI commands.
A
adduser
Creates a new user account and adds it to the database. The command also
generates a random password which the user can change with the changepass
command.
Syntax adduser
Follow the system prompts.
Example zSH> adduser
User Name: jjsmith
User Prompt[zSH>]:
Please select user access levels.
admin: -------> {no}: yes
zhonedebug: --> {no}:
voice: -------> {no}:
data: --------> {no}:
manuf: -------> {no}:
database: ----> {no}:
systems: -----> {no}:
tool: --------> {no}:
useradmin: ---> {no}:
..................................
User name:(jjsmith) User prompt:(zSH>)
Access Levels:
(admin)
Save new account? [s]ave, [c]hange or [q]uit: s
User record saved.
TEMPORARY PASSWORD: sqgUr2J7
Access Level user

Products BAN, MALC, Raptor 100, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723, Sechtor
100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also changepass

Commands
alarm
Displays all active alarms since the last system reboot.

Syntax alarm show [summary]
Options show
Displays the alarm totals and lists alarm details, such as resource ID and
alarm type and alarm severity.
summary
Displays only alarm totals.
Example zSH> alarm show
zSH> alarm show
************ Central Alarm Manager ************
ActiveAlarmCurrentCount :8
ActiveAlarmTotalCount :9
ClearAlarmTotalCount :1
OverflowAlarmTableCount :0
ResourceId AlarmType AlarmSeverity

1-1-1-0/sonet linkDown critical
1-3-1-0/adsl linkDown minor
1-1-1-0/sonet sonetSectionStatusChange major
Access Level admin

Products MALC, Raptor 100, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723
ata
Initializes, formats, or displays the contents of the system flash cards.
Caution: Formatting or initializing a PC card destroys all existing

data on the card.
Syntax ata [ show | format | init ] slot

Options show
Displays the flash partition table in the specified PC card.
format
Formats the specified PC card.
init
Initializes the specified PC card by creating partitions and a file system.
This destroys all existing data on the card.

A
slot
The slot that contains the PC card.
Access Level admin
Products BAN, MALC, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723
atmping
Sends an ATM OAM F4 and F5 loopback cell to a VCL.
Note: You must turn on logging before issuing the atmping

command.
Syntax atmping [ifindex/vpi/vci] | [name/type/vpi/vci] | [shelf/

slot/port/subport/type/vpi/vci] [segmentF4/F5 |
endtoendF4/F5]
Options ifindex
The ifindex of the interface Use the lineGroup command to find the
ifindex.
vpi
The virtual path identifier of the ATM interface.
vci
The virtual path identifier of the ATM interface.
name
The name of the interface (for example, uplink1, or a user-defined name
configured in the if-translate profile for the interface).
shelf/slot/port/subport
The physical location of the interface. For the Sechtor 100A and the
Z-Edge, shelf and slot are always 1.
type
IANA type for the interface. For example, adsl, ds1, ds3, hdsl2, sonet.
segmentF4/F5
Sends the ping to the next ATM interface using either F4 (VP) or F5 (VC)
loopback cells. This option is currently unsupported.
endtoendF4/F5
Sends the ping to the far-end ATM interface.
Example Enable logging before issuing a atmping command.
zSH> log serial on

Serial port logging enabled.
If you are connected to the device over a network:

zSH> log session on
Logging enabled.
Find the VCL which you want to ping:

Commands
zSH> list atm-vcl

atm-vcl 1-1-1-0-hdsl2/atm/0/35
For example, to manually send segment and end-to-end OAM F4 loopbacks

and segement OAM F5 loopbacks, issue the following commands:
zSH> atmping uplink1/atm/0/37 segmentf4
zSH> Received OAM ping response for uplink1, vpi 0 ,vci 37
APR 06 20:31:22: info : 1/1/16 : atmmgr: atmMgrDrv.c:
AtmMgrOamPingRspProcess(): l=4492: atmmgr: Received OAM
ping response for uplink1, vpi 0, vci 37
zSH> atmping uplink1/atm/0/37 endtoendf4

zSH> atmping uplink1/atm/0/37 segmentf5

Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge
atmvclshow
The atmvclshow command provides the administrative user with the ability
to view Virtual Channel Link (VCL) status information, as well as audit
members in a traffic descriptor group.
Syntax atmvclshow [port [vpi vci]]
Options (no option)
Displays global information of all ATM VCL records on the system.
port
Displays all ATM VCL records on the specified port.
port vpi vci
Displays the ATM VCL record on a singular occurrence of a VCL.
Example 1 This first example displays a global ATM VCL record which includes the task
state, message count, error rate, and shelf/slot/port/VPI/VCI information. In
this instance, the ATM VCL record displays information on shelf 1, slot 1,
port 8.
zSH> atmvclshow
ATMMGR task state = READY

A
ATMMGR rx msg cnt = 1778

ATMMGR rx errors = 0
shelf = 1 slot = 1
VC Switched vpi = 4 vci = 202 ifIndex = 0xc (12) port = 1
rxTdIndex = 1 txTdIndex = 1
MPHY bank = 0 Priority Queue = 0
vclState = active adminStatus = up, AALType = aal2(6)
connId=263 intVpi = 0 intVci = 36


<SPACE> for next page, <CR> for next line, A for all, Q to quit
Example 2 This second example shows all of the ATM VCL records. In this instance, the
ATM VCL record displays status information of all VCLs on port 1.
zSH> atmvclshow 1
shelf = 1 slot = 1



Example 3 This third example shows the ATM VCL record on a specific VCL as defined
by the port, VCI, and VPI. In this instance, the ATM VCL record displays port
1, VPI of 4, and VCI of 202.

Commands
zSH> atmvclshow 1 4 202

shelf = 1 slot = 1

Access Level admin

100A
B
bootstate
Displays the boot state of a card in the system.

Syntax bootstate slotcard
Options slotcard
Number of the slot card.
Example 1 The following example shows the slot card in slot 8 in the middle of loading
its image.
zSH> bootstate 8
Boot State: Loading Image over backplane
Example 2 The following example shows the output of the bootstate command if there is
no slot card in the slot:
zSH> bootstate 6
POST Result Register Value = 255
Example 3 The following example shows the output of the bootstate command for a slot
card that has successfully booted:
zSH> bootstate 3
Boot State: BootMgr: Booting Completed Successfully
Access Level user

bridge
The bridge command can add, delete, or show bridges.

B
Syntax bridge add interface/type

[vc vpi/vci] [tc tcvalue] [td tdvalue | txtd txtdvalue |
rxtd rxtdvalue]
other| llc
[uplink | downlink | intralink | vlan vlan_id | tagged |
untagged]
[ifname]
add
Add a bridge interface on the specified physical interface.
interface/type
Name and type of the physical interface.
vc vpi/vci
Used to specify the VPI and VCI values for ATM circuits. For example:
0/23. This is a mandatory field if you are creating a bridge on an ATM
logical interface. This is field is not required if you are creating a bridge
on an Ethernet interface.
tc tcvalue
Traffic container information. This is a mandatory field if you are creating
a bridge on a PON physical interface. This field is not required for
non-PON interfaces.
td tdvalue | rxtd rxtdvalue | txtd txtdvalue
Used to specify the traffic descriptor index to be used. Optionally,
separate rxtd rxtdvalue and txtd txtdvalue values may be specified for
ADSL connections, where separate traffic descriptors are used for the
upstream and downstream traffic due to the asymmetric nature. This is a
mandatory field if you are creating a bridge on an ATM logical interface.
This is field is not required if you are creating a bridge on an Ethernet
interface.
other | llc
The type of AAL5 data encapsulation used: llc sets logical link control
encapsulation over AAL5, which is commonly used with routers; other
sets RFC 1483 multiprotocol encapsulation over AAL5, which is
commonly used with bridges. If no value is given, the AAL5
encapsulation type default is llc.
uplink | downlink | intralink
Indicates bridging behavior of the interface. This field is omitted when
creating transparent bridges.
• Uplink
Causes the interface to forward packets to the network. Uplink
interfaces support one or more bridging domains and allow VLANs
that terminate on a MALC IP interface. Broadcasts received on an
uplink port are not sent to any downlink port, except for ARP and

Commands
DHCP when customARP and customDHCP options are enabled.

Unicast packets received on an uplink are forwarded to the downlink
where the MAC address was learned. Uplink ports do not learn MAC
addresses and do not strip or insert VLAN tags.
• downlink
Causes the interface to send packets to the customer interface. Requires
a specific VLAN ID or VLAN tagging.
Downlink interfaces with a specific VLAN ID peform strip and insert
function for outgoing and incoming traffic and learn MAC addresses.
All traffic (unicast and broadcast) received on a downlink is sent to the
default interface as specified in the bridge-path default command.
Tagged downlink interfaces do not strip and insert VLAN tags. Other
dowlink interface functions are identical.
• Intralink
Causes the interface to forward all traffic from the uplink that is not
local.
• No value creates a transparent bridge. Transparent bridges send
broadcasts to all ports, learn an unlimited number of MAC addresses on
a port, and allow any port to send traffic to any other port.
vlan vlan_id
VLAN identifier associated with the interface. This is a mandatory field
for downlink interfaces that do not use the tagged option.
tagged | untagged
The tagged/untagged status of the bridge. The tagged option is a
mandatory field if you are creating a VLAN on a downlink interface and
do not specify a specific LAN ID.
ifname
The name for the interface. This is an optional field.
Syntax bridge delete Interface/type vc vpi/vci

delete
Delete a bridge interface from the specified physical interface.
Interface/type
Name and type of the physical interface, such as 1-4-3-0/adsl.
vc vpi/vci
ATM layer information for bridge over ATM (for example, vc 0/35).
Omitted for bridge over Ethernet
Syntax bridge show vlan vlan_id | interfaceName/bridge

show
The bridge show command displays a truncated record for the bridge.
vlan vlan_id

B
List all bridge interfaces for the specified VLAN. This includes tagged
interfaces, but only the bridge filter table information for the specified
VLAN is displayed.
interfaceName/bridge
List only the information for specified bridge interface.
Syntax showall vlan vlan_id | interfaceName/bridge

showall
The bridge showall command displays the entire contents of bridge
record.
Example 1 Create an untagged downlink (over ATM):
zSH> bridge add 1-7-1-0/shdsl vc 0/35 td 1 downlink vlan vlan-id
Example 2 Create a tagged downlink (over ATM):
zSH> bridge add 1-7-1-0/shdsl vc 0/35 td 1 downlink tagged
Example 3 Create an uplink over Ethernet:
zSH> bridge add 1-1-1-0/ethernetcsmacd uplink
Example 4 Delete an untagged downlink (over ATM):
zSH> bridge delete 1-7-1-0/shdsl vc 0/35
Example 5 Delete a tagged downlink (over ATM):
zSH> bridge delete 1-7-1-0/shdsl vc 0/35
Example 6 Delete an uplink over Ethernet:
zSH> bridge delete 1-1-1-0/ethernetcsmacd
Example 7 Display bridges created:
zSH> bridge show

VLAN Bridge State Table Data
-----------------------------------------------------------------
0 1-8-2-0-adsl-0-101/bridge UP
0 1-1-1-0-ethernetcsmacd/bridge UP
Access Level admin

Products MALC, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723
bridge flush
Use this command to purge bridge filters of learned MAC entries, either
separately or for a specified interface.

Commands
Note: Only learned bridge entries are purged with this command.
Static bridge entries are not removed with this command.
Syntax bridge flush <<interface <ifIndex>|<name>/<type>> | <mac

<vlan> <MAC addr>>
ifIndex
ifIndex value of the bridge interface.
interface/type
Name and type of the bridge interface.
vlan
VLAN identifier associated with the bridge interface. For the mac
option, the vlan must be specified even if it is 0.
MAC_addr
The MAC address associated with the specified VLAN. The
mac_address is in hexadecimal notation (for example,
00:01:02:03:04:05).
Example 1 Purges the learned MAC entries for the specified bridge interface.
zSH> bridge showall

-----------------------------------------------------------------
0 1-3-1-0-adsl-0-35/bridge UP D 00:00:00:00:00:01
D00:02:b9:72:9d:41
D 10.1.1.2
0 ethernet2/bridge UP S Global default [3600 sec]
0 1-3-2-0-adsl-0-35/bridge UP D 00:00:00:00:00:02
D 223.30.2.130
zSH> bridge flush interface 1-3-1-0-adsl-0-35/bridge
zSH> bridge showall

-----------------------------------------------------------------
0 1-3-1-0-adsl-0-35/bridge UP
0 1-3-2-0-adsl-0-35/bridge UP D 00:00:00:00:00:02
D 223.30.2.130
Example 2 Purges the learned MAC entries for the specified VLAN and MAC address.
zSH> bridge showall

-----------------------------------------------------------------
0 1-3-1-0-adsl-0-35/bridge UP D 00:01:38:31:f1:6e
D 00:02:b9:72:9d:41
D 223.30.1.130

B

0 1-3-2-0-adsl-0-35/bridge UP D 00:00:00:00:00:02
D 00:01:38:31:ee:fb
D 223.30.2.130
zSH> bridge flush mac 0 00:01:38:31:f1:6e
zSH> bridge showall

-----------------------------------------------------------------
0 1-3-1-0-adsl-0-35/bridge UP D 00:02:b9:72:9d:41
D 223.30.1.130
0 1-3-2-0-adsl-0-35/bridge UP D 00:00:00:00:00:02
D 00:01:38:31:ee:fb
D 223.30.2.130
Access Level user

bridge-path
Use this command to add, modify, delete, or show static-bridge profiles.
Syntax bridge-path add interface/type

global
global-intralink
intralink
vlan vlan_id
[age value] default | [mac] mac_address | ip ip_address
add
Add a static-bridge assignment between an existing MAC address and an
interface.
interface/type
global
Global default route for the whole network. If global is specified, no
further parameters are required.
global-intralink
Global intralink. All traffic that cannot be resolved will be forwarded out
this interface. If global is specified, no further parameters are required.
intralink
A type of bridge that receives forwarded traffic from the uplink that is not
local traffic.
vlan vlan_id

Commands
VLAN identifier associated with the interface.

age value
The AgingPeriod measured in seconds. This is an optional field.
default
The specified interface is the default destination for bridge packets with
the specified vlan_id. If default is specified, no other parameters are
required.
[mac] mac_address
Use this option to associate a specific MAC address and VLAN with an
interface. The [mac] argument is optional. The mac_address is in
hexadecimal notation (for example, 00:01:02:03:04:05).
ip ip_address
Use this option to associate a specific IP address and VLAN with an
interface.
Syntax bridge-path delete interface/type

global | global-intralink | vlan vlan_id
default | [mac] mac_address | ip ip_address
delete
Delete a static-bridge assignment thus breaking an association between an
IP address and an interface.
Syntax bridge-path show

show
List all static-bridge assignments.
Example 1 Create a static bridge between an interface and a specific MAC address and
VLAN.
zSH> bridge-path add 1-1-1-0/ds3 vlan 22 00:10:c0:ad:79:22
Example 2 Create a static bridge between an interface and a specific IP address and
VLAN.
zSH> bridge-path add 1-1-4-0/ds3 vlan 3 ip 192.16.80.1
Example 3 Create a static bridge between an interface and a default destination (specified
by the vlan_id).
zSH> bridge-path add 1-1-3-0/ds3 vlan 2 age 1000 default
Example 4 Delete a static bridge between an interface and a specific MAC address and
VLAN.
zSH> bridge-path delete 1-1-1-0/ds3 vlan 22 00:10:c0:ad:79:22
Example 5 Delete a static bridge between an interface and a specific IP address and
VLAN.

C
zSH> bridge-path delete 1-1-4-0/ds3 vlan 3 ip 192.16.80.1
Access Level user

C
ccshow
The ccshow command shows associated connections and call state

information given a range and type of endpoint.
Syntax ccshow [-d] AAL2|GR303|V52|POTS|ELCPAAL2 address | *

Displays call related information for the given address(es). Note that the
format of the address depends on the type of endpoint.
AAL2 | GR303 | V52 | POTS | ELCPAAL2
The type of endpoint to display.
address
The address for the type of endpoint.
*
Use an asterisk after the endpoint type to display all of the endpoints.
Syntax ccshow AAL2 lgid [/vpi[/vci[/cid]]]

lgid
The line group ID of the AAL2 interface. Use the lineGroup command to
find this number.
vpi/vci/cid
Depending upon the level of detail required, enter the VPI or the VPI/VCI
or the VPI/VCI/CID.
Syntax ccshow V52 ifname [|userid [ / POTS|ISDND|ISDNB [/

bchanid]]]
ifname
The V5.2 interface name (V52).
userid
The V5.2 user port number. List the v52-user-port profiles to display the
user port number. For example, if the profile has the following address:
v52-user-port 1/192/2
the user port number is 192.
POTS | ISDN | ISDNB
The user endpoint type.

Commands
bchanid
The B-channel ID number.
Syntax ccshow GR303 igname/ crv

igname
The name of the GR-303 Interface Group (IG).
crv
The GR-303 endpoint Call Reference Value (CRV).
Syntax ccshow POTS lgid [/potsnumber]

lgid
The line group ID of the POTS interface. Use the lineGroup command to
find this number.
potsnumber
The number of the POTS interface.
Example 1 The following example displays call state information for all the AAL2 calls
in the system (note the output is abbreviated)
zSH> ccshow AAL2 *
AAL2:36/0/304/20 UP V52:ZTL1/29/P UP CallState:ACTV
AAL2:36/0/304/16 UP V52:ZTL1/25/P UP CallState:IDLE
quit
Example 2 The following example displays call state information for all the V52 calls in
the system (note the output is abbreviated):
zSH> ccshow V52 *
V52:ZTL1/192/P UP AAL2:36/0/324/23 UP CallState:ACTV
V52:ZTL1/182/P UP AAL2:36/0/323/21 UP CallState:IDLE

C

quit
Example 3 The following example displays detailed call state information (using the -d
option) for calls on a with a MALC DS3 Uplink: interface.
First, find the linegroup for the interface:
zSH> linegroup 1-1-1-0/ds3
lineGroupId: 36
Then use the linegroup to display detailed information about AAL2 calls on
the interface (note the output is abbreviated):
zSH> ccshow -d AAL2 36 linegroup
Term Address: PVC-AAL2:36:VPI-0:VCI-304:CID-20
Term State: UP
Sibling Address: V52:Link-ZTL1:UserID-29:UserType -POTS_USER
Sibling State: UP
Call state: ACTIVE

Term State: UP
Sibling State: UP
Call state: ACTIVE

Term State: UP
Sibling State: UP
Call state: ACTIVE

Term State: UPSibling Address: V52:Link-ZTL1:UserID-32:UserType -POTS_USER
Sibling State: UP
Call state: ACTIVE
Term State: UP
Sibling State: UP
Call state: IDLE

Term State: UP
Sibling State: UP
Call state: IDLE

Commands
Example 4 The following example shows AAL2 call information for a particular VPI and
VCI (0/324) on a MALC Uplink interface (linegroup 36):
SH> ccshow AAL2 36/0/324 linegroup/VPI/VCI
8 out of 384 records matched
Example 5 The following example shows detailed AAL2 call information for a particular
VPI/VCI/CID (0/324/20) on a MALC Uplink interface (linegroup 36):
zSH> ccshow AAL2 36/0/324/16 linegroup/VPI/VCI/CID
zSH> ccshow -d AAL2 36/0/324/16
Term State: UP
Sibling State: UP
Call state: ACTIVE
Example 6 The following example shows detailed V52 call information for the user
number 192 in the interface group ZTL1. List the v52-user-port profiles to
view the userID.
zSH> ccshow -d V52 ZTL1/192/POTS ifname/userid/call-type
Term Address: V52:Link-ZTL1:UserID-192:UserType -POTS_USER
Term State: UP
Sibling Address: PVC-AAL2:36:VPI-0:VCI-324:CID-23
Sibling State: UP
Call state: ACTIVE
1 out of 384 records match
Products MALC, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723, Sechtor 100A
cd
Changes the current directory on the flash card file system.

Syntax cd directory [ options ]
Options directory
Name of directory to change. Prepend a / (forward slash) to the directory
to specify an absolute path.
options
The CD command accepts the following options:

C
.. moves up one level in the directory structure

/ moves to the root level of the flash card
Example The following example changes to the second PC card:
zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1
Access Level admin

See Also dir, pwd
changepass
Changes password for the current user.

Syntax changepass
Example zSH> changepass
Current Password:
New Password :
Confirm New Password :
Password change successful.
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also resetpass
clkmgrshow
To view the clock information on the system, use the clkmgrshow command.
Syntax clkmgrshow [current | eligible | list ]
Options current
Displays the current primary and secondary clock sources.
eligible
Displays only the eligible clock sources. Eligible clock sources are
interfaces that are configured as eligible and are active.
list
Lists the eligible and non-eligible clock sources. Non-eligible clock
sources are interfaces that either not configured as eligible, or are not
active.
Example 1 The following example displays the eligible and non-eligible clock sources:
zSH> clkmgrshow list

eligible list has 2 entries

Commands
1 * eligible 1/21/1/0 (10) : T1 : LOOP

2 eligible 1/1/1/0 (1) : DS3 : LOOP
ineligible list has 3 entries
1 not eligible 1/1/2/0 (5) : DS3 : LOOP
The asterisk (*) on a clock source indicates it the active clock source.
Example 2 The following example displays the current primary and secondary clock
sources:
zSH> clkmgrshow current
Primary system clock is 1/21/1/0 (10) : T1
Secondary system clock is 1/1/1/0 (1) : DS3
100A
commit
This command is only used by the configuration restore process.

Syntax N/A
100A, Z-Edge 64
configsync
Manages the config sync process. Config sync is used to keep the
configuration of a device and ZMS in sync.
In some situations a device may stop sending config sync files to ZMS and the
config sync status becomes stuck in a “syncpending” state. A audit process
monitors the config sync process.
The config sync audit runs every six minutes and checks whether the config
sync process has been in a “syncpending” state for more than 5 minutes
without performing an FTP transfer to ZMS (which indicates that the config
sync process has stalled).
In this case, the config sync process is restarted, the config sync status is set to
“syncerror,” and a configSyncReset trap is sent.
Syntax configsync stat reg | change | V5.2NameID | GR-303NameID

reg
Displays detailed config sync statistics, including the registered
information for the config sync process. This option is only useful for
Zhone development
change
Displays state of change lists and status of FTP transfers.

C
V5.2NameID
Displays the V5.2 config sync cache list for the specified interface group.
This option is only useful for Zhone development
GR-303NameID
Displays the GR-303 config sync cache list for the specified interface
group. This option is only useful for Zhone development
Syntax configsync initiate full | partial
Note: Zhone recommends that you perform a config sync update

from ZMS. For more information, refer to the documentation that
came with the ZMS software.
full
Initiates a manual update of the ZMS database with the device’s
configuration. In a full config sync, all profiles are sent to ZMS. This
option could cause significant processing by ZMS.
Config sync updates are performed automatically whenever a change is
made to the device via the CLI. During a restore, however, the updating
process is suspended. After a restore, a full config sync update is required.
partial
Sends only the new or updated profiles to ZMS.
Syntax configsync reset

reset
Resets the config sync process.
Caution: Do not use this command unless requested to do so by
GSS. Resetting the config sync process may cause a system reboot.
Example To show the status of the config sync process:
zSH> configsync stat change

Config Sync Status:
----------------
FTP Transfer Stats:
Last Time The Timer Popped (seconds) = 947898179
Current Time (seconds) = 947898485
Last Ftp Time (seconds) = 0
ConfigSync Status = SYNC_INITIALIZING
copy
Copies a file on the flash card file system to another location on the same
flash card or to another flash card (BAN only).
Syntax copy source destination
Options source
Full path name of the target file to copy.

Commands
destination
Full path name of the destination file to copy.
Access Level admin
create
This command is used only by the configuration restore process.

Syntax N/A
100A, Z-Edge 64
crossconnect
Add, delete, or show cross connects on the system.

For the T1/E1 CES card, add, delete, or show cross connects for CES circuits.
Syntax crossconnect add interface1/type1 vc vpi1/vci1 tc tc1

interface2/type2 vc vpi2/vci2 tc tc2 td_value | txtd
txtd_value rxtd rxtd_value
Note: The traffic descriptor and traffic container specified in the

crossconnect add command must already exist.
add
Create and cross connect two ATM VCLs.
interface1/type1
Name and type of the first physical interface in the connection.
vc vpi1/vci1
ATM layer information for the first VC in the connection.
tc tc1
Traffic container information. This is a mandatory field if the first
physical interface is PON.
interface2/type2
Name and type of the second physical interface.
vc vpi2/vci2
ATM layer information for the second VC in the connection.
tc tc2
Traffic container information. This is a mandatory field if the second
physical interface is PON.
td_value
The traffic descriptor index to be used for the crossconnect. Enter this
option if both sides of the crossconnect use the same traffic descriptor.

C
txtd txtd_value rxtd rxtd_value

Specify a traffic descriptor for the transmit and receive sides of the
connection.
Syntax crossconnect add interface1/atm vc vpi/vci interface2/ds1

vc vpi2/vci2 ds0 start/length unstr|str signal_type
line_type td txtd_value
Note: The traffic descriptor specified in the crossconnect add

command must already exist.
add
Create and cross connect two ATM VCLs.
interface1/atm
Name and type of the uplink physical interface in the connection.
vc vpi1/vci1
ATM layer information for the uplink VC in the connection.
interface2/ds1
Name of the downlink DS1 physical interface.
vc vpi2/vci2
ATM layer information for the downlink VC in the connection.
start/length
The starting DS0 and the length of the DS0 bundle. For example, 1/6
indicates a DS0 bundle starting at DS0 1 and containing 6 DS0’s
(1+2+3+4+5+6). These fields are required even for unstructured DS0
bunldes.
unstr
Indicates that the DS0 bundle is unstructured: 1-24 DS0’s for T1, 0-32
DS0’s for E1.
str
Indicates that the DS0 bundle is structured: 1-23 DS0’s for T1, 0-32
DS0’s for E1.
signal_type
The signal type used for the connection. Signal types are basic, e1cas,
ds1esfcas, and ds1sfcas. The default signal type basic is used in no signal
type is specified.
line_type
The line type used for the connection. line types are e1, e1unframed,
e1crc, e1mf, e1crcmf, esf, and ds1nframed. The line type specified in the
DS1-profile is used as the default type if no line type is specified.
txtd txtd_value
Specify a traffic descriptor for the transmit and receive sides of the
connection.

Commands
Syntax crossconnect delete interface/type [vc] vpi/vci |

cc index
To delete a cross connect, specify either one of the VCLs in the cross connect
or the cross connect index.
delete
Delete an ATM crossconnect and the VCLs it connects.
interface/type
The name and type of one side of the crossconnect. For example, 1-1-1-0/
ds1.
vc vpi/vci
ATM layer information for bridge over ATM. For example, vc 0/35. If
the interface is supplied it can be either end of the connect. If an interface
is supplied the cc index is omitted
cc index
The cross connect index. If the cc index is supplied, the interface/type
and vc are omitted.
Syntax crossconnect show [cc index | interface/type vc vpi/vci]

To show a cross connect, specify either one of the VCLs in the cross connect
or the cross connect index.
(no arguments)
Displays all crossconnects in the system.
cc index
Displays the cross connect indicated by the index number.
interface/type
The name and type of one side of the crossconnect. For example, 1-1-1-0/
ds1.
vc vpi/vci
List the connection that contains the indicated VCL.
Example 1
zSH> crossconnect add 1-1-1-0-adsl/atm vc 0/37 uplink1/atm vc 1/101 td 1
Example 2
zSH> crossconnect delete 1-1-1-0-adsl/atm vc 0/37
Example 3
zSH> crossconnect show
ATM VCL CC ATM VCL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1-1-1-0-propvirtual/atm 0/32 Up 1 Up 1-6-1-0-adsl/atm 0/32 Up

D

The output of this command displays the following information:
Field Description
ATM VCL The VCL for both sides of the crossconnect and their
admin state. Possible values are Up and Dn. Dn applies to
all states other than Up.
CC The index of the cross connect and its admin state.

Possible values are Up and Dn. Dn applies to all states
other than Up.
Example 4
zSH> cc add uplink2/atm 0/53 1/12/2/0/ds1 vc 1/33 ds0 1/24 unstr td 1
Example 5
zSH> cc delete uplink2/atm 0/53
Example 6
zSH> cc show
ATM VCL CC ATM VCL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
uplink2/atm 0/53 Up 1 Up 1-12-2-0-ds1/atm 1/33 Up
Access Level admin

D
datastorestats
The DataStore is a configuration database containing all the provisioning data

of the system The datastorestats command provides information about the
use of the DataStore configuration database.

Commands
Syntax datastorestats
Example
zSH> datastorestats
Data Store AVL Tree Stats
------------------------Inserts : 509
Deletes : 0
Records in Data Store : 509
Current DataStore Size is 348628 bytes used out of 458752 bytes available
HashStats:
finds: 4
misses: 0
addressSearchExcludes: 0
indexSearchExcludes: 156
slowSearch: 156
slowFind: 156
inserts: 293
dups: 1362
Products Raptor 100, Sechtor 100A
del
Deletes a file from the flash card file system.

Syntax del filename
Options filename
Full path name of the file to delete.
Access Level admin
See Also copy
delete
Deletes a record from the system. Note that for some types of records, such as
card profiles, the delete command also deletes associated records. For
example, if you delete a DSL card-profile, the system deletes all the ATM
VCLs, VPLs, and cross connects configured on that card. It also deletes any
VCLs/VPLs configured on the trunking card if they are part of a cross connect
between the DSL card and the trunking card.
Syntax delete profile-type [index | * ] [-orphan]
Options profile-type
The type of profile to delete.
index
An index for the record. Some records, such as line profiles, use an index
of the form shelf-slot-port-subport/type. Other records, such as ATM
traffic descriptors, use an index of the form n, where n is an integer.

D
Specify a complete address to delete a single record. Specify partial

addresses, to delete a group of profiles. See the examples below for more
information.
*
A wildcard.
orphan
Deletes orphan records that cannot otherwise be deleted. Note that
wildcards cannot be used with the orphan option.
Example 1 The following example deletes a single ATM traffic descriptor:
zSH> delete atm-traf-descr 2

atm-traf-descr 232
1 entry found.
Delete atm-traf-descr 2? [y]es, [n]o, [q]uit : yes
atm-traf-descr 2 deleted.
Example 2 The following example uses a partial address to delete atm-vcl profiles
configured on shelf 1, slot 13:
zSH> delete atm-vcl 1-13
atm-vcl 1-13-1-0-ds3/atm/0/1000
atm-vcl 1-13-2-0-ds3/atm/0/1001
atm-vcl 1-13-3-0-ds3/atm/0/1002
3 entries found.
Confirm prior to each record delete ? [y]es, [n]o, [q]uit : y
Entry 1-13-1-0/ip does not exist.
Delete atm-vcl 1-13-1-0-ds3/atm/0/1000? [y]es, [n]o, [q]uit : y
atm-vcl 1-13-1-0-ds3/atm/0/1000 deleted.
Example 3 The following example deletes multiple atm traffic descriptors using the
wildcard character (*):
zSH> delete atm-traf-descr *
atm-traf-descr 1
atm-traf-descr 2
2 entries found.
Confirm prior to each record delete ? [y]es, [n]o, [q]uit : y
Delete atm-traf-descr 1? [y]es, [n]o, [q]uit : y
Delete atm-traf-descr 2? [y]es, [n]o, [q]uit : y
zSH>
Example 4 On a BAN, MALC, or Raptor, the delete command can also be used to delete
a card-profile and all profiles associated with the card. After the profiles have
been deleted, the card reboots.

Commands
Caution: Before deleting card profiles, remove the card from the
system as explained in the hardware documentation that came with
your unit.
Caution: Back up the system configuration before deleting card

profiles. Refer to the release notes that came with your unit for
details.
The following example deletes a SHDSL card profile in shelf 1, slot 16:
zSH> delete card-profile 1/16/5006 shelf/slot/type
Delete card-profile 1/16/5006? [y]es, [n]o, [q]uit : y
card-profile 1/16/5006 deleted.
Access Level admin

Notes You can only delete one card-profile at a time. Wildcards are not supported
when deleting card profiles.
100A, Z-Edge 64
deleteuser
Deletes a user account from system.

Syntax deleteuser username
Options username
Name of user account to delete.
Example zSH> deleteuser dmiller
OK to delete this account? (yes/no): yes
Account was deleted.
Access Level useradmin

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also adduser, updateuser
dir
Displays the contents of the directory on the device file system.

Syntax dir
Example
zSH> dir
Listing Directory .:
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 668932 Mar 28 17:05 malcoc3fraw.bin
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 5776033 Apr 7 19:23 malcoc3f.bin
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 4197357 Mar 24 00:15 malct1e132vg.bin

D
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 4117051 Mar 24 00:15 malct1e132vgv52.bin

-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 392308 Mar 11 15:38 malct1e132vgrom.bin
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 1563843 Mar 28 17:05 malct1e1atm32.bin
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 1206836 Mar 28 17:05 malcpots.bin
drwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 2048 Apr 13 16:40 datastor/
drwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 2048 Dec 20 2004 bulkstats/
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 668296 Feb 22 14:34 malcoc3raw.bin
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 1855714 Mar 28 17:04 malcgshdsl.bin
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 1030717 Mar 28 17:04 malcmtac.bin
-rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 2368132 Apr 13 17:43 malcolt.bin
drwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 2048 Mar 30 15:13 onreboot/
27384184 bytes available
Access Level admin

See Also cd, pwd
ds1relay
The ds1relay command controls the DS1 relay settings. The relays can be set
to terminate individual or all of the DS1 circuits on the primary 64-pin
connector or on the secondary, redundant 64-pin connector (on the Sechtor
100A) or on the T1/E1 Uplink interface (on the Raptor 100):
Note: The ds1relay command does not persist across system

reboots.
Syntax ds1relay [ all | circuit-number ] [ passthru | terminate ]

circuit-number
A DS1 circuit number from 1 to 8 (Sechtor 100A) or 1-4 (Raptor 100).
all
All of the DS1 circuits that terminate on the system.
passthru
The DS1 circuit or circuits that terminate on the Sechtor 100A primary
connector are electrically connected to the secondary (redundant)
connector. Internal Sechtor 100A hardware that was connected to the DS1
circuit or circuits is connected to a loopback path.
terminate
Terminate the specified DS1 circuit or circuits on the primary 64-pin
connector (Sechtor 100A) or the 50-pin Uplink connector (Raptor 100).
Example 1 zSH> ds1relay all terminate
All of the DS1 circuits terminate on the primary 64-pin connector (Sechtor
100A) or the 50-pin Uplink connector (Raptor 100).
Example 2 zSH> ds1relay all passthru

Commands
All of the DS1 circuits are connected to the secondary 64-pin connector.
Example 3 zSH> ds1relay 1 passthru
The first DS1 circuit is connected to the secondary 64-pin connector, the other
circuits remain unchanged.
Access Level admin
Products Raptor 100, Sechtor 100A
ds1rpshow
Displays information about the T1 interfaces on the system.

Syntax ds1rpshow [linenumbers]
Options
With no options, displays general information about T1 interfaces.
linenumber
Displays information about the specified line numbers.
Example 1
zSH> ds1rpshow
************ DS1 RP Debug Information ************
name: tDS1RP
address: 01:01:106
lineRRLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004e
ds1XlatProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
ds1LineProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
ds1GroupProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
ds1CfgProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
systemProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
numUnits: 8
clkStatus: 0
clkSrc: 0
Attached units:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Example 2
zSH> ds1rpshow 1
************ DS1 RP Debug Information ************
name: tDS1RP
address: 01:01:106
lineRRLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004e
ds1XlatProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
ds1LineProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
ds1GroupProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
ds1CfgProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
systemProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000004f
numUnits: 8
clkStatus: 0
clkSrc: 0

D
Attached units:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
************ Debug Information for Line 1 ************
state: 3
ifIndex: 3
shelf: 1
slot: 1
port: 2
subPort: 0
xlatProf.ifIndex: 3
xlatProf.ifType: 18
xlatProf.adminStatus: 1
groupProf.groupId: 3
groupProf.groupName: 1/1/2
groupProf.primaryName: 3
groupProf.secondaryName: 0
groupProf.primaryWeight: 0
groupProf.secondaryWeight: 0
groupProf.adminStatus: 2
alarms 1
-> No Alarm
loopback 1
Products Raptor 100, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723, MALC
ds3rpshow
Displays information about the T1 interfaces on the system.

Syntax ds3rpshow [linenumbers]
Options
With no options, displays general information about T1 interfaces.
linenumber
Displays information about the specified line numbers.
Example 1
zSH> ds3rpshow
************ DS3ATM RP Debug Information ************
name: tDS3ATMRP
address: 01:01:1091
lineRRLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000006a
ds3AtmXlatProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000006c
ds3AtmCfgProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000006c
lineRRClientLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000006b
ds3AtmRpCardGroupId: 1
iamActiveCard: TRUE
Redundancy Mode CARD
PeerCardAvailable FALSE
PeerCardShelf 0
PeerCardSlot 0
requestLineRRNotification: TRUE
numUnits: 4

Commands
Attached units:
1 2 3 4
Example 2
zSH> ds3rpshow 1
************ DS3ATM RP Debug Information ************
name: tDS3ATMRP
address: 01:01:1091
lineRRLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000006a
ds3AtmXlatProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000006c
ds3AtmCfgProfLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000006c
lineRRClientLeaseId: 0x022b0000_0000006b
ds3AtmRpCardGroupId: 1
iamActiveCard: TRUE
PeerCardAvailable FALSE
PeerCardShelf 0
PeerCardSlot 0
requestLineRRNotification: TRUE
numUnits: 4
Attached units:
1 2 3 4
iamActiveLine: TRUE
state: 4
ifIndex: 4
primaryClock: FALSE
shelf: 1
slot: 1
port: 1
subPort: 0
xlatProf.ifIndex: 4
xlatProf.ifType: 30
cnfgProf.lineType: 4
cnfgProf.lineCoding: 2
cnfgProf.sendCode: 1
cnfgProf.circuitId: ''
cnfgProf.loopbackConfig: 1
cnfgProf.transmitClockSource: 1
cnfgProf.lineLengthMeters: 0
cnfgProf.lineStatusChangeTrapEnable: 1
cnfgProf.channelization: 1
cnfgProf.mediumScrambleConfig: 1
Ds3_Stats_Profile.timeElapsed: 0
Ds3_Stats_Profile.validIntervals: 0
Ds3_Stats_Profile.lineStatus: 0x840
-> LOS
-> Net-Equip-OOS
Ds3_Stats_Profile.plcpAlarmStatus: 1
-> No Alarm
Ds3_Stats_Profile.ifTCAlarmStatus: 2
-> LCD Failure

D
Ds3_Stats_Profile.invalidIntervals: 0
Ds3_Stats_Profile.lineStatusLastChange: 951806042
Ds3_Stats_Profile.loopbackStatus: 0x1
-> None
Products Raptor 100, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723, MALC
dslstat
Displays the DSL training rates for the DSL cards in a system.
Syntax dslstat <[ifIndex] | [name/type] | [shelf/slot/port/
subport/type]>
Options ifIndex
The interface number of the port or port/subport that uniquely identifies
the interface across the system. (Use the linegroup command to find the
ifIndex of an interface.)
name
The name of the interface.
type
IANA type for the interface. For example, adsl, ds1, ds3.
shelf
The physical address or number of the shelf where the desired line is
located. The first shelf in a system is shelf 1.
slot
The physical slot on the system.
port
The port number defines the physical port number at the shelf-slot
location for the line profile. Port numbers begin with 1 and are numbered
sequentially.
subport
Used to identify multiple logical subports on a physical port.
Example 1 zSH> dslstat 1-15-1-0/adsl
General Stats:
-------------
AdminStatus..................................UP
Line uptime (DD:HH:MM:SS)....................0:02:27:52
DslUpLineRate (bitsPerSec)...................512000
DslDownLineRate (bitsPerSec).................8064000
DslMaxAttainableUpLineRate (bitsPerSec)......565333
DslMaxAttainableDownLineRate (bitsPerSec)....856000
Out Octets...................................286571
Out Discards.................................0
Out Errors...................................0
In Octets....................................286571
In Discards..................................0
In Errors....................................0
ATM OCD Count................................0

Commands
ATM NCD Count................................0

ATM HEC Count................................0
ATM far-end OCD Count........................0
ATM far-end NCD Count........................0
ATM far-end HEC Count........................0
ADSL Physical Stats:

------------------
Actual Transmission connection standard......G.dmt
AdslAtucCurrLineSnrMgn (tenths dB)...........310
AdslAtucCurrLineAtn (tenths dB)..............135
AdslAtucCurrOutputPwr (tenths dB)............70
AdslAturCurrLineSnrMgn (tenths dB)...........90
AdslAturCurrLineAtn (tenths dB)..............135
AdslAturCurrOutputPwr (tenths dB)............103
LOFS.........................................0
LOLS.........................................0
LOSS.........................................0
ESS..........................................0
Inits........................................1
Adsl connects................................1
Adsl disconnects.............................5407
near-end statistics:
-------------------
blocks received..............................147087
errored blocks received......................0
CRC errors on interleaved buffer.............0
CRC errors on fast buffer....................0
FEC corrected errors on interleaved buffer...0
FEC corrected errors on fast buffer..........0
background errored blocks received...........0
non-SES blocks received......................0
Severely Errored Seconds.....................0
Unavailable Seconds..........................59
Loss of Signal Seconds.......................0
Seconds with one/more FECs...................0
Seconds declared as high BER.................0
far-end statistics:
-------------------
blocks received..............................147205
errored blocks received......................1
CRC errors on interleaved buffer.............0
CRC errors on fast buffer....................1
FEC corrected errors on interleaved buffer...0
FEC corrected errors on fast buffer..........0
background errored blocks received...........0
non-SES blocks received......................0
Severely Errored Seconds.....................0
Unavailable Seconds..........................0
Loss of Signal Seconds.......................0
Seconds with one/more FECs...................0
Loss of Power (dying gasps)..................0

D
Seconds declared as high BER.................0

Fast retrains................................0
Fast retrain failures........................0
Example 2 zSH> dslstat 1-20-1-0/shdsl

General Stats:
-------------
AdminStatus..................................UP
Line uptime (DD:HH:MM:SS)....................0:04:27:52
DslUpLineRate (bitsPerSec)...................2320
DslDownLineRate (bitsPerSec).................2320
DslMaxAttainableUpLineRate (bitsPerSec)......2320
DslMaxAttainableDownLineRate (bitsPerSec)....2320
Out Octets...................................20442524
Out Discards.................................0
Out Errors...................................0
In Octets....................................20442471
In Discards..................................0
In Errors....................................0
ATM OCD Count................................1
ATM NCD Count................................0
ATM HEC Count................................0
ATM far-end OCD Count........................0
ATM far-end NCD Count........................0
ATM far-end HEC Count........................0
DSL Physical Stats:

------------------
DslLineSnrMgn (tenths dB)....................380
DslLineAtn (tenths dB).......................232
DslCurrOutputPwr (tenths dB).................85
LOFS.........................................1
LOLS.........................................1
LOSS.........................................1
ESS..........................................9
CRC Errors...................................0
Inits........................................65
Products BAN, MALC, Raptor 100, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723
dump
Saves the Zhone system configuration.

Syntax dump [console] | [file filename ] [network host filename]
Options console
Sends the configuration to the console.
network host filename
Sends the configuration to the specified host using trivial file transfer
protocol (TFTP) and writes it to the specified filename. The file must
exist and be writable before the system can write the configuration to it.

Commands
file filename
Sends the configuration to the specified file on the flash card. You must
specify the full path to the file.
Example 1 The following example dumps the configuration to the file named zhone.cfg
on the IP host 192.168.9.55:
zSH>dump network 192.168.9.55 zhone.cfg
Example 2 The next example dumps the configuration to the file named zhone.cfg on the
first flash card on the system:
zSH>dump file /card1/zhone.cfg

Notes • Set the TFTP server time-out value to at least 5 seconds, and 5 retries to
help prevent TFTP time-out or retry errors.
• The Z-Edge 64 and the Sechtor 100A do not support saving the
configuration to a local file.
100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also restore
E
eeset
Sets values in the device EEPROM. This command is only used to configure
Sechtor 100A redundancy.
Syntax eeset slot [1 | 2] card [1 | 2]

slot [1 | 2]
The slot number to set the device to. For the Sechtor 100A this is always 1
for the active unit and 2 for the standby unit.
card [1 | 2]
The card number to set the device to. For the Sechtor 100A this is always
1 for the active unit and 2 for the standby unit.
Syntax eeset failover on card 1
Configures failover mode on the primary device (always card 1).
Syntax eeset peer mac_address card 1

E
Sets the MAC address of the redundant peer on the primary device
(always card 1).
Access Level user
Products Sechtor 100A
eeshow
Displays the contents of the specified electrically erasable programmable

read-only memory (EEPROM). The information include the serial number of
the device, the CLEI code (if any), the Zhone card type, and the type of I/O
cards installed.
Syntax eeshow eeprom-name slot
Options eeprom-name
Name of the EEPROM contents you want to display. Possible values are:
• 1daughter | 2daughter | 3daughter: up to 3 daughter cards are supported
on MALC or Raptor cards
• card
• iocard: slots 1 through 17 (BAN only)
• mezz
• shelfme: slot 0 only
• shelfmon: slot 0 only
• backplane: slot 0 only
• fantray: slot 0 only
For the Z-Edge 64 card is the only valid eeprom-name. For the Sechtor
100A and Raptor 100, card and mezz are the only valid eeprom-names.
slot
Slot number containing the eeprom. If you do not specify a slot number,
the eeprom on the current card or on slot 0 (the system EEPROM).
Example 1 To display the Zhone card type, use the eeshow card command:
zSH> eeshow card 1

EEPROM contents:
EEPROM_ID : 00 -- CARD
Version : 01
Size : 054
CardType : 05035 -- MALC_GIGE
CardVersion : 800-01322-02-A
SerialNum : 04440120
ShelfNumber : 00001
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Cksum : 0x4D60
MAC Address are enabled for 2 address(es) starting at:
00:01:47:43:C0:38
Example 2 (BAN only) To display the type of I/O card installed in a slot, use the eeshow
iocard command:

Commands
zSH> eeshow iocard 1

EEPROM contents:
EEPROM_ID : 03 -- MEZZ
Version : 01
Size : 018
CardType : 00013 -- OC3ATM_SM indicates an OC3-c/STM1 interface
CardVersion : 00001
SerialNum : 02610001
ShelfNumber : 00001
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Cksum : 0x0531
Feature bits modification date: 0/0/2000 00:00:00
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
F
featurebitdisplay
Displays the features enabled on the system.

Syntax featurebitdisplay featurenumber
Options (no option)
Displays all available features.
featurenumber
Indicates whether the feature is enabled.
Access Level admin
100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also featurebitset
featurebitset
Enables certain features on Zhone systems. You must obtain a hash code from
Zhone Global Services and Support before using this command.
Syntax featurebitset offset mask value hashcode
Options offset
Number of bits to offset.
mask
Mask to apply to the EEPROM.

F
value
New value to write to the serial EEPROM bits as specified by the offset
and mask.
hashcode
The hash code that enables the feature.
Access Level admin
100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also featurebitdisplay
fhrameping
Pings a specified location within the device. You can only ping slot cards, you
cannot ping I/O cards.
Syntax fhrameping shelf slot [ port ]
Options shelf
Destination shelf number. Currently this is always 1 (one).
slot
Destination slot number. Slots are numbered from 1 to 17, left to right.
port
Destination port number.
Example 1 The first example shows the fhrameping response received from an inactive
card.
zSH> fhrameping 1 14
Pinging Shelf 1, slot 14
FhramePing Timeout with Shelf 1, Slot 14
Example 2 The next example shows the fhrameping response received from an active
card.
zSH> fhrameping 1 3 1
Pinging Shelf 1, slot 3 port 1
Shelf 1, Slot 3, Port 1, is Alive!
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also ping
file
Transfers files to or from a TFTP server without verifying the image header.
This command can be used to download a dump file previously made to the
network or upload one that was made to a local file.

Commands
Note: The file command should be used only for general purpose file
transfer, not for upgrading system software. To upgrade software, use
the image command.
Syntax file [download | upload] tftphost sourcefilepath

targetfilepath
Options download
Downloads the file to the flash card on the device. This option is typically
used to restore a configuration created using the dump command.
upload
Uploads the specified file to the TFTP server. This option is typically
used to save a copy of the software image files.
sourcefile
The full path name of the source file. On the BAN Infoservice card flash
cards, the path is /card1/file or /card2/file, depending on the flash cards
installed. On a MALC or Raptor, do not specify the card.
targetfile
The full path name of the target file. On the BAN Infoservice card flash
cards, the path is /card1/file or /card2/file, depending on the flash cards
installed. On a MALC or Raptor, do not specify the card.
If you are transferring a file to a TFTP server, the file must exist and be
writable.
Example The following example downloads a file to the host 192.168.9.55 named
savedump and writes it to the file named localdump on the first Infoservices
flash card (/card1).
zSH> file download 192.168.9.55 saveddump localdump
Access Level admin

Notes Set the TFTP server time-out value to at least 5 seconds, and 5 retries to help
prevent TFTP timeout or retry errors.
See Also image
filter
IP filtering is typically performed to enhance network security by limiting

access between two networks. IP filtering is based on the recognition and
selective transmission or blocking of individual IP packets. Packets meeting
some criterion are forwarded, and those that fail are dropped. On BAN, IP
filtering is used to block inbound traffic to the management network.
Syntax The following command adds a rule to the currently loaded filter. If the rule
argument (line and rule are interchangeably used to signify a user-defined
value for the filtering rule) is omitted, the line number of the rule will be 100

F
greater than the highest numbered rule in the filter. That is, the rule will be
appended to the end of the rule list with the default stride.
filter add rule [from | to] [IP address] [permit | deny]
rule
A user-defined value for the filtering rule.
from | to
Defines incoming or outgoing.
IP address
The interface address.
permit | deny
Permit or deny traffic flow.
Syntax The following command deletes the specified line (also known as rule) from
the currently loaded filter.
filter delete line
line
The filter identifier.
Syntax The following command sets the description field of the currently loaded
filter.
filter description description_string
description_string
A string of text and spaces describing the purpose of the filter.
Syntax The following command deletes the specified filter.

filter destroy specIndex
specIndex
The user-defined value for the filter.
Syntax The following command discards the currently loaded filter along with any
uncommitted changes.
filter discard
Syntax The following command displays help for the specified filter command.
filter help [command]
[command]
The specific argument to the filter command.
Syntax The following command lists all defined filters showing specIndex, name,
version, and description.

Commands
filter list
Syntax The following command loads a filter into the CLI for modification.
filter load specIndex
specIndex
The index value for the filter.
Syntax The following command replaces rule in the currently loaded filter with
newrule.
filter modify line newrule
line
newrule
A number value defining the new rule.
Syntax The following command sets the name field of the currently loaded filter.
filter name name
name
An arbitrary string, containing no spaces, that is considered a name for
this filter. While it is desirable, it is not required that this name be unique.
Syntax The following command locates a new specIndex, and establishes a new filter
in the CLI for modification.
filter new [name] [description_string]
[name]
An arbitrary string, containing no spaces, that is considered a name for
this filter. While it is desirable, it is not required that this name be unique.
[description_string]
A string of text and spaces describing the purpose of the filter.
Syntax The following command lists each interface that is configured to use the
specified filter. If specIndex is omitted, it lists each interface that is
configured to use any filter.
filter references [specIndex]
[specIndex]
The index value for the filter.
Syntax The following command renumbers all rules in the currently loaded filter with
the default stride of 100 or the stride given.
filter renumber [stride]

F
renumber [stride]
The range between rule numbers.
Syntax The following command commits the currently loaded filter for modification.
filter save
Syntax The following command displays the filter currently committed to Infostore.
If the specIndex is omitted, it displays the filter currently loaded for
modification.
filter show [specIndex]
[specIndex]
find
Searches through available commands.

Syntax find [-s(ubSearch) | -d(etailed)] stringToSearch
Options -s
Search the previous search results for the specified string.
-d
Search the online help for each command for the specified string.
-ds or -sd
Search the online help of the commands in the previous search for the
specified string.
substring
The string to search for.
Example 1 For example, the following command finds all command s containing the
string “show”:
zSH> find show
eeshow show
showdatetime showhost
showinetstat showipstat
showlinestatus showmem
showresolver showuser
showzhonecpe
Example 2 You can also search within results. For example:
zSH> find -s ip
showipstat

Commands
Example 3 To search command online help for a particular string, use the -d option. For
example, the following command searches all the online help for the
commands for the word profile:
zSH> find -d profile
delete get list
new show update
Example 4 After you have performed a command search, the lst command lists only the
results of the last search. For example:
zSH> lst
delete get list
new show update
Example 5 To reset the lst command so it displays all the available commands, use the -m
option with the lst command:
zSH> lst -m
adduser ata
bootstate cd
changepass commit
copy create
del delete
deleteuser dir
dump eeshow
featurebitdisplay featurebitset
fhrameping file
find get
help history
ifxlate image
interface list
load log
logout lst
mkdir msg
new ping
pollzhonecpe pwd
resetcliprov resetpass
restore rip
rmdir route
set setdatetime
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also get, show

F
find-matching-data
The find-matching-data command displays the provisioned data path

through the system which includes the specified ATM VCL.
Syntax find-matching-data ATM interface/type vpi vci

ATM
Keyword
interface/type
vpi
Virtual path indicator.
vci
Virtual channel indicator
Example
zSH> find-matching-data ATM 1-3-1-0-adsl/atm 0 35

VCL 1-3-1-0-adsl/atm 0 35 is used in atm-cc 1
The far end of this cross connect is 1-1-1-0-aal5proxy/atm 0 32
find-matching-subvoice
The find-matching-subvoice command displays the other endpoint of a

subscriber-voice connection, given one endpoint. You can find endpoints for
the following voice connections:
• AAL2
• CLASS5
• DS1
• ELCPAAL2
• GR-303
• ISDN
• POTS
• V52
• VOIP
The system displays information about each endpoint and the
subscriber-voice profile that links them. If there are provisioning errors that
prevent the matching profile from being displayed, the system reports an
error.

Commands
Syntax find-matching-subvoice AAL2 LGID/VPI/VCI/CID

AAL2
The type of voice endpoint.
LGID
The line group identifier (also known as the ifIndex). Use the linegroup
command to find the line group ID for an interface.
VPI
Virtual Path Identifier of the AAL2 connection. You can find this in the
aal2-vcl profile.
VCI
Virtual Channel Identifier of the AAL2 connection. You can find this in
the aal2-vcl-profile.
CID
Channel Identifier. You can find this in the aal2-cid-profile.
Syntax find-matching-subvoice CLASS5 ID/EndPointIndex

CLASS5
ID
ID for the Class5 switch.
EndPointIndex
Index of the voice connection endpoint.
Syntax find-matching-subvoice DS1 LGID/ChannelID

DS1
LGID
ChannelID
Matching channel ID of the DS0 signal.
Syntax find-matching-subvoice ELCPAAL2 LGID/VPI/VCI/PortID/

PortType/ChannelID
ELCPAAL2
LGID
VPI
Virtual Path Identifier of the ELCP AAL2 connection.
VCI

F
Virtual Channel Identifier of the AAL2 connection.

PortID
The port Identifier.
PortType
Port type.
ChannelID
Matching channel ID of the AAL2 signal.
Syntax find-matching-subvoice GR303 IG name/CRV

GR303
IG name
Interface Group name.
CRV
Call Reference Value.
Syntax find-matching-subvoice ISDN groupID/portType/channelID

ISDN
Group ID
port type
The ISDN D or B channel. Values are isdndchannel or isdnbchannel.
channel id
The channel identifier. Values are 1 (D channel), 2 (B channel) or 3 (B
channel).
Syntax find-matching-subvoice POTS LGID

POTS
LGID
Syntax find-matching-subvoice VOIP LGID/EndPointIndex

CLASS5
LGID
EndPointIndex

Commands
Index of the voice connection en
Syntax find-matching-subvoice V52 Interface name/portId/user

type/channelId
V52
Interface name
Name of the V5.2 interface group.
portId
The port ID of the V5.2 connection. This is the local-interface-id from
the v52-interface-group profile.
user type
The type of voice connection. Value can be POTS or ISDN.
channel id
The channel identifier. For POTS this is 0.
Example 1 In this example, the AAL2 voice connection is associated with a V5.2
interface.
zSH> list subscriber-voice-aal2
subscriber-voice-aal2 5
...
zSH> get subscriber-voice-aal2 5

voice-aal2-line-group-id: -> {134}
voice-aal2-vpi: -----------> {2}
voice-aal2-vci: -----------> {701}
voice-aal2-cid: -----------> {16}
zSH> find-matching-subvoice AAL2 134/2/701/16

INPUT:
profile type: subscriber-voice-aal2
logical address: LGID: 134 VPI: 2 VCI: 701 CID: 16
profile address: 5
subscriber-voice INFO:
voice-connection-type = AAL2TOV52
voice-endpoint1-addr-index = 5
voice-admin-status = Enabled
subscriber-voice addr: subId: 2 LGId: 134
subVoiceId: 1
MATCHING:
profile type: subscriber-voice-v52
logical address: IfName: rtl UserId: 1
IsdnBChannelId: 0
profile address: 6

F
The endpoint on the other end of the subscriber-voice connection is

described under the MATCHING heading. The system lists the endpoint
profile types, their logical addresses, and each endpoint profile address (the
profile number).
The find-matching-subvoice command also displays information about the
subscriber-voice profile that links endpoints, including the voice connection
type, the addresses of each endpoint, the administrative status of the profile,
and its address.
Example 2 This example finds the endpoint associated with a GR-303 interface.
zSH> list subscriber-voice-gr303

subscriber-voice-gr303 10001
...
zSH> get subscriber-voice-gr303 10001

voice-GR303-ig-name: -> {RTL}
voice-GR303-ig-crv: --> {1}
zSH> find-matching-subvoice GR303 RTL/1

INPUT:
profile type: subscriber-voice-gr303
logical address: IgName: RTL Crv: 1
profile address: 10001
voice-connection-type = AAL2TOGR303
subVoiceId: 1
MATCHING:
profile address: 1
Example 3 If there is no profile found for the address entered, the system returns Address
not found. The following example asks for the other endpoint of an AAL2
subscriber-voice-aal2 profile that has an undefined CID of 232:
INPUT:
profile address: Address not found
If there is more than one endpoint with the same address, the system returns a
message that includes the duplicate end point address:
INPUT:

Commands

profile address: 11
More than 1 subscriber-voice have the same end point
address: 11
Example 4 If the AAL2 address exists, but is not configured as part of a subscriber-voice
profile, the system will display an error message as in the following example:
INPUT:
profile address: 33
No subscriber-voice has end point address: 33
Example 5 If the subscriber-voice-aal2 endpoint does not have a second endpoint

configured, the system will return an error that the other endpoint can not be
found:
INPUT:
l ogical address: LGID: 1 VPI: 1 VCI: 1 CID: 44
profile address: 44
voice-connection-type = AAL2TOGR303
voice-admin-status = Disabled
subscriber-voice addr: subId: 1 LGId: 1 subVoiceId: 44
MATCHING:
profile address: Matching subscriber-voice endpoint with
address 1111 not found
Example 6 ISDN
This example finds the other end of an ISDN endpoint.
zSH> list subscriber-voice-isdn
subscriber-voice-isdn 6012
...
zSH> get subscriber-voice-isdn 6012

voice-isdn-line-group-id: -> {89}
voice-isdn-port-type: -----> {isdnbchannel}
voice-isdn-channel-id: ----> {2}
zSH> find-matching-subvoice ISDN 89/isdnbchannel/2

INPUT:
profile type: subscriber-voice-isdn

F
logical address: LGId: 89 PortType: ISDNBCHANNEL

ChannelId: 2
voice-connection-type = UNKNOWN
subVoiceId: 16012
MATCHING:
IsdnBChannelId: 1
Example 7 POTS
This example finds the AAL2 endpoint that is associated with a POTS
interface.
zSH> list subscriber-voice-pots
subscriber-voice-pots 3001
...
zSH> get subscriber-voice-pots 3001

voice-pots-line-group-id: -> {33}
zSH> find-matching-subvoice POTS 33

INPUT:
profile type: subscriber-voice-pots
logical address: LGId: 33 PotsNumber: 1
voice-connection-type = POTSTOAAL2
subVoiceId: 1
MATCHING:
Example 8 V52
This example finds the AAL2 endpoint that is associated with a V5.2 user
port.
zSH> list subscriber-voice-v52
subscriber-voice-v52 6

Commands
...
zSH> get subscriber-voice-v52 6

voice-V52-interface-name: --> {rtl}
voice-V52-user-port-id: ----> {1}
voice-V52-user-type: -------> {pots}
voice-V52-isdn-channel-id: -> {0}
zSH> find-matching-subvoice V52 rtl/1/pots/0

INPUT:
IsdnBChannelId: 0
profile address: 6
voice-connection-type = AAL2TOV52
subVoiceId: 1
MATCHING:
profile address: 5
Products BAN, MALC, Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge 64
G
get
The get command displays the contents of record and its configured
parameters.
Syntax get profile-type index
Shows the parameters in the specified profile with the parameter value
ranges.
index
Record to display.
Example To view the configuration of a particular record, use the get command and
specify the address of the record:
zSH> get ip-interface-record ethernet1/ip
vpi: ---------------> {0}
vci: ---------------> {0}
rdindex: -----------> {1}

G
dhcp: --------------> {none}

addr: --------------> {192.24.200.223}
netmask: -----------> {255.255.255.0}
bcastaddr: ---------> {192.24.200.255}
destaddr: ----------> {0.0.0.0}
farendaddr: --------> {0.0.0.0}
mru: ---------------> {1500}
reasmmaxsize: ------> {0}
ingressfiltername: -> {}
egressfiltername: --> {}
pointtopoint: ------> {no}
mcastenabled: ------> {yes}
ipfwdenabled: ------> {yes}
mcastfwdenabled: ---> {yes}
natenabled: --------> {no}
bcastenabled: ------> {yes}
ingressfilterid: ---> {0}
egressfilterid: ----> {0}
ipaddrdynamic: -----> {static}
dhcpserverenable: --> {false}
subnetgroup: -------> {0}
unnumberedindex: ---> {0}
mcastcontrollist: --> {}
vlanid: ------------> {0}
maxVideoStreams: ---> {0}
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also list, show
gr303showcrv
The gr303showcrv command displays information about GR-303 call

reference values (CRVs).
Syntax gr303showcrv igName crvNumber
Options igName
The GR-303 interface group (IG) name.
crvNumber
The GR-303 call reference value (CRV) number.
Example 1 To view information on all CRVs within an IG, use the gr303showcrv
command with only the IG name specified:
zSH> gr303showcrv test
ig: 0 crv: 1 in-serivce this CRV is operational on the switch and the device
ig: 0 crv: 2 in-serivce

Commands

ig: 0 crv: 11 out-of-serivce - SWITCH NOT PROV this CRV is provisioned on the device but is not
provisioned on the switch
ig: 0 crv: 12 out-of-serivce - SWITCH NOT PROV
...
Note: This is a truncated response to the gr303showcrv igname

command.
Example 2 To view information on one CRV within the IG, use the gr303showcrv
command with the IG name and CRV specified:
zSH> gr303showcrv test 1
Access Level user

Products MALC, Sechtor 100A
H
help
Displays help text for a command.

Syntax help [ -p ][ command ]
Options (no option)
Displays the available commands with a brief explanation.
command
Displays detailed help for the specified command.
-p
Displays the available commands, a brief explanation of the command,
and the access level.
Example 1 Enter the help command without options to display the available commands:
zSH> help
1 adduser
2 ata - initialize/show ATA flash partitions.
3 bootstate - <slot> display the boot state of a given
slot card
4 cd - change current directory.
5 changepass
6 commit <profile-type> <profile-storage-key>

H
7 copy - copy a file.

8 create <profile-type> <profile-storage-key>
9 del - Delete a file.
10 delete <profile-type> <profile-storage-key>
11 deleteuser <userName>
12 dir - list directory contents.
13 dump <[console] | [file filename] | [network host
filename]>
14 eeshow eepromName <slot>
15 featurebitdisplay <featurenum>
16 featurebitset offset mask value hashCode
17 fhrameping shelf/slot</port>
18 file - download/upload files.
19 find [-s(ubSearch) | -d(etailed)] <stringToSearch>
20 get <profile-type> <profile-storage-key>
21 help [commands]
Example 2 To get help on a particular command, enter the help command followed by
the name of the command. For example:
zSH> help slots
Use: slots [<slotNum>]
This command displays the card type present in each slot.
If <slotNum> is provided, it shows detailed information
about the card.
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
history
Displays the commands stored in the command buffer.

Syntax history [ size ]
Options
With no options, history displays the commands stored in the command
buffer.
size
Specifies the number of commands to store in the history buffer.
Example zSH> history
1 addroute
2 addhost
3 help
4 showinetstat
5 showversion
6 list subscriber
7 list
8 showhost

Commands
9 showroute
10 setprompt
11 help
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
host
The host command is used to add, delete, or show hosts in a

point-to-multipoint network.
Syntax zSH> host add interface/type vc vpi/vci [tc tcvalue] td

tdvalue | txtd tdvalue rxtd tdvalue other | llc static
x.x.x.x | dynamic SubnetGroup count [video
MulticastControlList/NumberofVideoStreams]
add
Add hosts to an IP multi-point subnet. Hosts may be given static IP
addresses or dynamically assigned addresses using DHCP.
interface/type
vc vpi/vci
vc 0/23.
tc tcval
Used to specify the traffic container index to be used. This is a mandatory
field if the physical interface type is PON.
td tdvalue | rxtd rxtdvalue txtd txtdvalue
upstream and downstream traffic due to the asymmetric nature.
other | llc
The type of AAL5 data encapsulation used: other sets RFC 1483
multiprotocol encapsulation over AAL5, which is commonly used with
bridges; llc sets logical link control encapsulation over AAL5, which is
commonly used with routers. If no value is given, the default other is the
AAL5 encapsulation type.
static x.x.x.x
Add a host to the given subnet with the static IP addresses of x.x.x.x.
dynamic subnetgroup count
Add count number of hosts to the given subnet and have their IP
addresses assigned dynamically using DHCP from IP addresses that are in
the subnet group as specified by subnetgroup.

H
video MulticastControlList/NumberofVideoStreams
Adds a video client connection using the specified multicast control list
entry and maximum number of video streams.
When the video argument is specified, the VCL cast type for the
subscriber interface (vcl_cast_type) is set to p2mpleaf.
Syntax host delete interface/type vc vpi/vci ip x.x.x.x | unused

count | all
delete
Delete a host or hosts from an IP multi-point subnet.
interfacename/type
vc vpi/vci
vc 0/23.
ip x.x.x.x
Delete the host with the IP address of x.x.x.x. This host may have been
assigned its address either via DHCP or statically.
unused count
Delete up to count number of DHCP host entries that have not yet been
assigned an IP address.
all
Delete all hosts on this subnet and the subnet itself.
video MulticastControlList/NumberofVideoStreams
Deletes the video client connection using the specified multicast control
list entry and maximum number of video streams.
Syntax host show interface interface/type vc vpi/vci | addr

x.x.x.x | host x.x.x.x
show
Show hosts that are part of an IP multi-point subnet.
interface interfacename/type
Show only hosts on this physical interface.
vc vpi/vci
Must be used with interface keyword. Show only hosts on given interface
with this VCL value.
addr x.x.x.x
Show only hosts with on the interface with the address of x.x.x.x.
host x.x.x.x
Show only the host with the address of x.x.x.x.
Example 1
zSH> host add 1-11-1-0/adsl vc 0/35 td 1 llc dynamic 1 3

Commands
Example 2
zSH> host delete 1-11-1-0/adsl vc 0/35 all
Example 3
zSH> host show interface 1-11-1-0/adsl vc 0/35
Example 4
zSH> host add 1-11-1-0/adsl vc 0/35 td 1 llc dynamic 1 3 video 1/4
I
ifxlate
Translates between ifindex values and physical interfaces (of the form
shelf-slot-port-subport-type).
Syntax ifxlate ifindex
Options ifindex
The interface index to translate into a physical interface.
Example The following example displays the associated shelf-slot-port-subport-type of
the interface:
zSH> ifxlate 1
ifIndex: ----------> {1}
shelf: ------------> {1}
slot: -------------> {3}
port: -------------> {1}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {ethernetcsmacd}
adminstatus: ------> {up}
physical-flag: ----> {true}
iftype-extension: -> {none}
ifName: -----------> {1-3-1-0}
redundancy-param1: -> {0}
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
image
Downloads software to the system from a TFTP server, updates the boot
partition, or verifies the flash card file system.

I
Note: The image command should be used to download software

image files, because it verifies the image header as part of the
download process.
Syntax image download tftphost file_path [destination]

Downloads the software image and verifies the image header.
tftphost
The name or IP address of the TFTP server.
file_path
The full path name of the software image file on the TFTP server.
destination
The full path name where the software image file should be downloaded
to. If not specified, the file is downloaded to the current directory with the
original file name.
Note: BAN system software is loaded onto the flash cards on the
Infoservices card. The path to the software image file is either /card1/
file or /card2/file, depending on which PC card contains the software.
Syntax image flash file port [standby | all]

Updates the boot partition on the PC card.
file
Full path to the software image file. For example, /card1/infoservraw.bin
is the full path to the software image on the first PC card.
port
The PC card port that contains the boot partition. For the MALC or
Raptor this value is always 1.
standby
Performs the image flash on the standby card.
all
Performs the image flash on both the active and the standby card.
Syntax image verify file

Verifies the specified file.
file
Full path to the software image file. For example, /card1/infoservraw.bin
is the full path to the software image on the first PC card.
Example The following example verifies the image file on the first PC card:
zSH> image verify malcgige.bin

File: malcgige.bin
Size: 7749520 bytes
Header Version: 1

Commands
Card Type: MALC GIGE

Load Type: compressed binary
Load Address: 0x00010000
Checksum: 0xb5443578
Image verify successful
Access Level admin

Products BAN, Raptor 100, MALC, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723
See Also file
imalink
The imalink command enables you to move, add, delete, or view IMA links.
Syntax imalink move SourceIMAGroup DestinationIMAGroup

ds1Interface
Moves an IMA link from one group to another.
SourceIMAgroup
The IMA group to move the link from, in the form
shelf-slot-port-subport/atmima.
DestinationIMAgroup
The IMA group to move the link to, in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/
atmima.
ds1Interface
The link group to move, in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/ds1.
Syntax imalink show IMAgroup

Displays information about the specified IMA group.
IMAgroup
The IMA group to view, in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/atmima.
Syntax imalink add IMAgroup ds1Interface

Adds an IMA link. Do not use this command unless requested to by GSS.
IMAgroup
The IMA group to remove, in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/atmima.
ds1Interface
The link group to add, in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/ds1.
Syntax imalink remove IMAgroup ds1Interface

Removes an IMA link.

I
Note: This option should not be used. If you do not want a link to
belong to any IMA group, it is recommended that you admin down
the interface in the if-translate profile.
IMAgroup
The IMA group to remove, in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/atmima.
ds1Interface
The link group to remove, in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/ds1.
Example 1 To move a link:
zSH> imalink move 1-1-1-0/atmima 1-1-4-0/atmima 1/1/8/0/

ds1
Stack unbind successful.
Link moved successfully.
Then view the group with the new link:

zSH> imalink show 1-1-4-0/atmima
DS1 Links for IMA Group 1-1-4-0/atmima:
If Index If Name
--------- ---------------
000011 1-1-8-0
Example 2 To view information about the links in an IMA group:

zSH> imalink show 1-3-1-0/atmima
DS1 Links for IMA Group 1-3-1-0/atmima:
If Index If Name
--------- ---------------
000736 1-3-1-0
000737 1-3-2-0
000738 1-3-3-0
000739 1-3-4-0
Access Level admin

Products MALC, Raptor, Raptor 100
imarpshow
The imarpshow command displays information about the MALC IMA

group. The command uses the following syntax:
Syntax imarpshow [index]
Options index
The IMA group number (currently, 1 (one) is the only supported value).
Example 1 zSH> imarpshow
RP Info:
rp state -------------------> RP_INITIALIZED
address --------------------> 01:01:113
rp shelf -------------------> 1

Commands
rp slot --------------------> 1
rp ima core started --------> TRUE
imaGrpProfLeaseId ----------> 0x02070000_00000057
LineRRProvLeaseId ----------> 0x02070000_00000055
LineRRClientLeaseId --------> 0x02070000_00000056
numImaGroups ---------------> 1
ImaGroupIndecies: 1
Example 2 To display complete information about an IMA group, specify the group
number:
zSH> imarpshow 1
RP Info:
rp state -------------------> RP_INITIALIZED
address --------------------> 01:01:113
rp shelf -------------------> 1
rp slot --------------------> 1
rp ima core started --------> TRUE
imaGrpProfLeaseId ----------> 0x02070000_00000057
LineRRProvLeaseId ----------> 0x02070000_00000055
LineRRClientLeaseId --------> 0x02070000_00000056
numImaGroups ---------------> 1
ImaGroupIndecies: 1
IMA Group Index =1
..............................................
group status ==========> OOS
......................... group ne state -------->
INSUFFICIENTLINKS
group fe state --------> OPERATIONAL
.........................
group ctlr state ------> GRP_INITIALIZED
group ifIndex ---------> 11
group in service ------> TRUE
driver attached -------> TRUE
driver unit -----------> 0
auto-created ----------> FALSE
ifxLeaseId ------------> 0x02070000_00000057
lineProfLeaseId -------> 0x02070000_00000057
lineGrpLeaseId --------> 0x02070000_00000057
ifStackLeaseId --------> 0x02070000_00000057
ds1LeaseId ------------> 0x00000000_00000000
.........................
ifxlateProfValid ----------------> TRUE
ifxlatProf.ifIndex --------------> 11
ifxlatProf.shelf ----------------> 1
ifxlatProf.slot -----------------> 1
ifxlatProf.port -----------------> 2
ifxlatProf.ifType ---------------> ATMIMA
ifxlatProf.adminStatus ----------> UP
.........................
lineProfValid -------------------> TRUE
lineProf.profileName ------------> Atm IMA Group default line profile
lineProf.physicalAddress.shelf --> 1
lineProf.physicalAddress.slot ---> 1

I
lineProf.physicalAddress.port ---> 2
lineProf.lineGroupName ----------> 11
.........................
lineGrpProfValid ----------------> TRUE
lineGrpProf.groupName -----------> 1/1/1
lineGrpProf.primaryName ---------> 11
lineGrpProf.secondaryName -------> 0
lineGrpProf.primaryWeight -------> 0
lineGrpProf.secondaryWeight -----> 0
lineGrpProf.adminState ----------> UP
.........................
imaGrpProfValid -----------------> TRUE
imaGrpProf.groupSymmetry --------> SYMMETRICAL
imaGrpProf.minNumTxLinks --------> 1
imaGrpProf.minNumRxLinks --------> 1
imaGrpProf.txClkMode ------------> CTC
imaGrpProf.txImaId --------------> 1
imaGrpProf.txFrameLength --------> M128
imaGrpProf.diffDelayMax ---------> 75
imaGrpProf.alphaValue -----------> 1
imaGrpProf.betaValue ------------> 1
imaGrpProf.gammaValue -----------> 1
imaGrpProf.testLinkIfIndex ------> 0
imaGrpProf.testPattern ----------> -1
imaGrpProf.testProcStatus -------> DISABLED
imaGrpProf.txTimingRefLink ------> 0
imaGrpProf.rxTimingRefLink ------> 0
.........................
Link#1
linkType -----------> DS1_PROFILE_LINETYPE_ESF
ifIndex ------------> 2
framerstatus -------> OOS
netxlinkstatus -----> NOT-IN-GROUP
nerxlinkstatus -----> NOT-IN-GROUP
..........................
...
...
...
imatppshow
Displays the status of an IMA test pattern procedure.

Syntax imatppshow [group]
Options group
Number of the IMA group to display information about.
Example 1 If the test is successful, imaGroupTestProcStatus displays OPERATING:
zSH> imatppshow 1
TestLink .....................: 2

Commands
imaGroupTestPattern ..........: 23
imaGroupTestProcStatus .......: OPERATING
Example 2 If the test fails (if, for example, the remote link is down),
imaGroupTestProcStatus displays LINKFAIL:
zSH> imatppshow 1
TestLink .....................: 2
imaGroupTestProcStatus .......: LINKFAIL
Example 3 After the test is disabled, the imaGroupTestProcStatus displays

DISABLED:
zSH> imatppshow 1
TestLink .....................: 2
imaGroupTestProcStatus .......: DISABLED
initiateconfigsync
Initiates a manual update of the ZMS database with the device’s

configuration. Config sync updates are performed automatically whenever a
change is made to the device via the CLI. During a restore, however, the
updating process is suspended. After a restore, a full config sync update is
required.
Note: Zhone recommends that you perform a config sync update

from ZMS. For more information, refer to the documentation that
came with the ZMS software.
Syntax initiateconfigsync [full | partial]

Options full
Sends all profiles to ZMS. This option could cause significant processing
by ZMS.
partial
Sends only the new or updated profiles to ZMS.
Access Level admin
100A, Z-Edge 64
interface
The interface command can add, delete, or show interfaces in different

subnets.

I
Syntax interface add interface/type vc vpi/vci [tc tcvalue] td

tdvalue | txtd tdvalue rxtd tdvalue llc | other IPaddr
netmask
add
Provides one-line configuration of IP interfaces, including the creation of
the ip-interface-record, if-translate, and atm-vcl records.
interfacename/type
vc vpi/vci
0/23.
td tdvalue | rxtd rxtdvalue txtd txtdvalue
upstream and downstream traffic due to the asymmetric nature.
tc tcvalue
Used only for PON interfaces to specify the traffic container index to be
used.
llc | other
The type of AAL5 data encapsulation used: llc sets logical link control
encapsulation over AAL5, which is commonly used with routers; other
sets RFC 1483 multiprotocol encapsulation over AAL5, which is
commonly used with bridges. If no value is given, the default llc is the
AAL5 encapsulation type.
IPaddr
Address will given as a static IP address. The IP address can have a
subnet portion denoted by /x.
netmask
Masks out certain parts of host address and all of the network portion of
the IP address.
Syntax interface delete physicalInterface vpi/vci

delete
Removes all of the configuration done by the interface add command.
physicalInterface
Name and type of the physical interface, such as 1-4-3-0/hdsl2.
vpi/vci
0/23.
Syntax interface delete physicalInterface vpi/vci

a

Commands
Displays all provisioned interfaces, including floating (unnumbered)

interfaces and internal interfaces such as the loopback interface.
l
Displays the interface IfIndex values and flag information.
i
Displays just the specified interface.
Example 1
zSH> interface add 1-11-1-0/adsl vc 0/35 td 1 10.0.0.1 netmask 255.255.255.0
Example 2
zSH> interface delete 1-11-1-0/adsl vc 0/35
Example 3
zSH> interface show

579 interfaces
Interface Status Rd/Address Media/Dest Address IfName
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/1/0/ip UP 1 192.24.200.223/24 00:01:47:43:c0:38 ethernet1
1/1/1/0/ip DOWN 1 [10.223.8.1] 0/772 multipoint 1-10-21-0-adsl-0-35
L
lineGroup
Displays the line group number of the interface.

Syntax linegroup index
Options index
The shelf-slot-port-subport/type or user-defined string of the interface.

L
Example 1 zSH> linegroup 1-1-1-0/ds3

lineGroupId: 5
Example 2 zSH> linegroup uplink2/other

lineGroupId: 7
100A, Z-Edge 64
line-red
Sets the redundancy behavior of Ethernet lines so Ethernet uplink cards, such
as GigE card, will switchover from an active to a standby card when the active
link goes down. The standby card must be in a running state for the
switchover to occur.
Syntax line-red set | clear | show ifname/type [timeout seconds]
[revertive | nonrevertive] [timeout seconds]
Options set
Sets the line redundancy behavior on the specified interface to the
specified settings.
clear
Removes any line redundancy settings on the specified interface.
show
Displays the current line redundancy settings.
ifname/type
Specifies the physical interface name and type. For example, ethernet1/ip
specifies the uplink Ethernet interface on the malcGigE card.
timeout seconds
Specifies the amount of time to wait after a failure occurs before
performing the switchover. If no timeout value is specified, a value of 0 is
used.
revertive
After a redundancy switchover occurs and the failure is resolved, this
setting forces the currently active card to wait the specified timeout period
and then reboot to return traffic back to the other card.
nonrevertive
After a redundancy switchover occurs and the failure is resolved, this
setting allows the currently active card to remain active, until another
redundancy switchover occurs.
timeout seconds
Specifies the amount of time to wait after a failure is resolved before the
revertive switch is performed. If no timeout value is specified, a value of
0 is used.

Commands
Example 1 This example enables redundancy on the ethernet1 physical interface with
options set to timeout of 30 seconds, revertive, and revertive timeout of 600
seconds.
zSH> line-red set ethernet1/ip timeout 30 revertive timeout 600
Example 2 This example shows the display of the current line redundancy settings for the
physical interface ethernet1:
zSH> line-red show ethernet1/ip
redundancy status for ethernet1/ip:
REBOOT timeout 30 REVERTIVE revert timeout 600
Example 3 This example enables redundancy on the ethernet1 physical interface with
options set to nonrevertive, and revertive timeout of 200 seconds. Because no
switchover timeout value is specified, a value of 0 is used.
zSH> line-red set ethernet1/ip nonrevertive timeout 200
Access Level user

Products MALC, Raptor
list
Displays system profiles or records.

Syntax list [ profile-type ] [ * ]
Options (no options)
Without options, displays available profiles.
profile-type
The type of profile to display. This option displays all the profiles of the
specified type, along with their profile indexes.
*
A wildcard that can be added anywhere in the command line after the list
command:
• If it is the only option, it lists all records in the system, along with their
index values.
• When added after profile-type, it lists all the records of that type, along
with their indexes.
• When added as part of the profile-index, it lists all the profiles matching
the specified index elements.
Example 1 The following example displays the available profiles:
zSH> list
aal2-audio-profile: audioProfileIdentifier/apIndex
aal2-cid-profile: ifIndex/vpi/vci/cid
aal2-vcl-profile: ifIndex/vpi/vci
adsl-co-profile: shelf/slot/port
adsl-cpe-profile: shelf/slot/port

L
adsl-profile: shelf/slot/port
atm-cc: atmVcCrossConnectIndex
atm-if: ifIndex
atm-if-stats: ifIndex
atm-traf-descr: index
atm-traf-descr-idx-next: index
atm-traf-descr-stats: index
atm-vcl: ifIndex/vpi/vci
atm-vcl-param: index
atm-vcl-stats: ifIndex/vpi/vci
atm-vpi: ifIndex/vpi
atm-vpl: ifIndex/vpi
bulk-statistic: index
bulk-statistics-config: index
quit
Example 2 The following example displays the atm-vcls configured on the system:
zSH> list atm-vcl

atm-vcl 1-7-4-0-ds3/atm/0/101
atm-vcl 1-7-4-0-ds3/atm/0/102
atm-vcl 1-7-4-0-ds3/atm/0/301
atm-vcl 1-7-4-0-ds3/atm/0/103
atm-vcl 1-15-1-0-ds3/atm/0/103
atm-vcl 1-15-1-0-ds3/atm/0/104
atm-vcl 1-15-1-0-ds3/atm/1/104
atm-vcl 1-7-4-0-ds3/atm/0/104
atm-vcl 1-15-1-0-ds3/atm/1/105
atm-vcl 1-7-4-0-ds3/atm/1/201
atm-vcl 1-7-4-0-ds3/atm/1/202
quit
Example 3 The following example displays all the records configured on the system:
zSH> list *

Commands
atm-cc 14
atm-cc 5
atm-cc 6
atm-cc 7
atm-cc 8
atm-cc 1
quit
Example 4 The following example displays all the if-translate profiles associated with
shelf 1, slot 1:
zSH> list if-translate 1/1/*
if-translate 1-1-1-0/ethernetcsmacd
if-translate 1-1-1-0/rs232
if-translate 1-1-1-0/ip
3 entries found.
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also get, show
load
Loads new software onto the system.
Note: The image command should be used to download software

image files, because it verifies the image header as part of the
download process.
Syntax load tftphost image-file destination

Options tftphost
The name or IP address of the TFTP server.
image-file
The full path name of the software image file on the TFTP server.
destination
The full path name where the software image file should be downloaded
to.
System software is loaded onto the system flash memory. On a BAN, the
path to the software image file is either:
/card1/file or /card2/file
depending on which PC card contains the software.

L
On a MALC or Raptor, it is not necessary to specify a card in the

destination.
Access Level admin
prevent TFTP time-out or retry errors.
See Also image
log
Configures logging levels for messages on the system. The system sends log
messages to a management session (either on the console or over a telnet
session), a log file on the device, and, optionally, a syslog server.
The log command configures the type of information sent in these messages.
By default, the system sends the same type of information to all log message
destinations, and logging is disabled on both the serial craft port and over
telnet sessions.
If the messages sent to the syslog server are configured the same as the log
messages sent to the console or the persistent storage (the default) the log
command also configures the syslog message contents. If the syslog messages
have been modified (using the log-module profile or the syslog command),
use the syslog command to modify syslog levels.
Syntax log help

help
Displays the help menu.
Syntax log show

show
Displays the currently configured logging levels for each software
module.
Syntax log level module level

module
The system module to set the level for. Use the log show command to
display all the system modules.
level
Sets the logging level for the specified module. Logging levels are:
• 1 emergency
• 2 alert
• 3 critical
• 4 error
• 5 warning

Commands
• 6 notice
• 7 information
• 8 debug
You can specify either the name of the level or the number.
Syntax log option type [ on | off ]

Specifies the information to include in logging messages.
type on
Specifies that the type of information be included in log messages. To
view the type of information you can include in a logging message, enter
the log option command without any arguments.
type off
Specifies that the type of information not be included in log messages.
Syntax log [ enable | disable ] module

enable module
Enables logging for the specified module. Use the log show command to
display all the system modules and whether they are enabled or not.
disable module
Disables logging for the specified module.
Syntax log session [on | off]

on
Enables logging for the current session only.
off
Disables logging for the current session.
Syntax log serial [on | off]

on
Enables logging on the serial craft port. This setting persists across
reboots.
off
Disables logging on the serial craft port. This setting persists across
reboots.
Syntax log display
Displays entries in the persistent log.
Syntax log cache [ max | grep pattern | size | clear | help ]

L
Note: The cache option is only supported on the BAN, MALC, and
Raptor.
log cache
Displays the log cache.
log cache max length
Sets the maximum number of log messages to store. The maximum log
cache size is 2147483647, depending in the amount of memory available.
log cache grep pattern
Searches through the log cache for the specified regular expression.
log cache clear
Clears the log cache.
log cache size
Sets the maximum amount of memory for the log cache. Without options,
displays the current log size.
log cache help
Displays help on the log cache command.
Example 1 The following example displays the logging levels and enabled status for the
system modules:
zSH> log show
MODULE LEVEL STATUS
message error enabled
taskclock error enabled
card error enabled
bds_client error enabled
alarm_mgr error enabled
tnsxmgt error enabled
leaseapi error enabled
vcs-client error enabled
dirserclient error enabled
rebootserver error enabled
pcmciadiag error enabled
...
...
...
Example 2 The following example sets the logging level for the card module to
information:
zSH> log level card info
Module: card at level: information
Example 3 The following example shows how to configure what information to include
in log messages.
zSH> log option all on
time:date:level:address:log:taskname:taskid:file:function
:line:(0xff)

Commands
Example 4 To return the log messages to their default format, enter the following
command:
zSH> log option default on
time: date: level: address: log: taskname: (0xf)
Example 5 The following example configures the log cache size:
zSH> log cache max 200

Maximum number of log messages that can be saved: 200
Example 6 following example searches through the log cache for the word “IMA”:
zSH> log cache grep IMA

Searching for: "IMA"
[1]: JAN 06 20:36:10: alert : 1/2/50 : alarm_mgr:
tLineAlarm: 01:02:02 Critical IMA Down Line
tLineAlarm: 01:02:02 Critical IMA Up Line
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also syslog
logout
Terminates the current session. If a previous user is still connected as an

inactive user of the current session, the previous user becomes the active user
of the session. If there is only one user connected in current session, the
logout command terminates the connection. If the session is over the local
serial port, the current user is logged out and the system prompts appears.
Syntax logout
Example The following example shows logging out from a local serial port session:
zSH> logout
Connecting...........
Tips:(`lst' 2 list)(`find' 2 search)(`s' 2 skip)
User Name:
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
lst
Lists available commands.

Syntax lst [ -m ]

M
Options
With no option, displays all the available commands for the current user.
If a search has been performed using the find command, and the -m
option has not been specified since the search was performed, the lst
command displays only the results of the most recent search.
-m
Lists all commands, not just the results of the previous search.
Example The following example shows the lst command with no search results:
zSH> lst
? adduser
ata bootstate
cd changepass
commit copy
create del
delete deleteuser
dir dump
eeset eeshow
featurebitdisplay featurebitset
fhrameping file
filter find
find-matching-subvoice get
help history
ifxlate image
initiateconfigsync interface
list load
log logout
lst mkdir
msg new
ping pollzhonecpe
pwd resetcliprov
resetpass restore
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also find
M
mcast
Displays multicast control lists.

Syntax mcast show mcl [ entry | precedence ]
Options entry
Entry number to be displayed.

Commands
all
Sends the message to all users.
Example zSH> mcast show mcl 1
MCAST CONTROL LIST : 1
224.10.10.10 224.10.10.11 224.10.10.12
224.10.10.13
zSH> mcast show mcl 2/1

MCAST CONTROL LIST : 2
192.24.84.144
zSH> mcast show mcl

MCAST ID IP Address
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
1 192.24.2.10
2 192.24.84.144
Access Level user

Notes Entering this command without any options displays all configured multicast
control lists.
mkdir
Creates a directory on the system card flash card file system.

Syntax mkdir directoryname
Access Level admin
Products BAN, MALC
See Also rmdir
msg
Enables users to send text messages to a specific user, or to all users currently
logged into the system.
Syntax msg [ username | all ] message
Options username
The recipient of the message.
all
Sends the message to all users.
message
The text of the message to send. The message must be in quotes.
Example The following command:
zSH> msg all "please log off."

N
Results in the following message being sent to every user logged into the
system:
Msg: root: please log off.
Access Level user
100A, Z-Edge 64
mtac-linetest
Enables connecting a third-party device to the MALC MTAC card to set test
relays. The default baud rate is 9600 bps.
Syntax mtac-linetest <portaddr> <mode> [ force ]
Options portaddr
The port address in shelf/slot/port. Valid shelf value is 1. Maximum slot
value is 21. Maximum port value is 48.
mode
Sets the relay mode to lookout, lookin, bridge or release mode. Only
lookout and release modes are supported in this release. Use the release
mode to set the relay back to idle mode.
Note: There is a 5 minute maximum time limit for activating a relay.

If this time limit is reached, the relay automatically goes back to idle
mode.
force
Forces an override when the line is in use. Currently not supported in this
release.
Example The following command:
zSH> mtac-linetest 1/8/48 lookout

Successful - In TestMode
zSH> mtac-linetest 1/8/48 release

Successful - Return to operational state
Access Level user

Products MALC
N
new
Creates new records of the specified profile type.

Syntax new profile-type index

Commands
The type of profile to create.
index
of the form shelf-slot-port-subport-interface/type. Other records, such
as subscriber records, use an index of the form n, where n is an integer.
Example The following example creates a new ip-interface-record. Pressing Enter
accepts the default values:
zSH> new ip-interface-record 1-1-0-0/ip
vpi: ---------------> {0}:
vci: ---------------> {0}:
rdindex: -----------> {1}:
addr: --------------> {0.0.0.0}: 192.168.8.21
netmask: -----------> {0.0.0.0}: 255.255.255.0
bcastaddr: ---------> {0.0.0.0}: 192.168.8.0
destaddr: ----------> {0.0.0.0}:
farendaddr: --------> {0.0.0.0}:
mru: ---------------> {1500}:
subnetgroup: -------> {0}:
unnumberedindex: ---> {0}:
mcastcontrollist: --> {}:
vlanid: ------------> {0}:
maxVideoStreams: ---> {0}:
....................
Save new record? [s]ave, [c]hange or [q]uit: s
Record created.
After entering the values, the system displays the values you have entered and
prompts you to save the record. If you want to save the changes, press s. If
you want to make changes, press c to re-enter values. Press q to quit without
saving changes.
Access Level admin
100A, Z-Edge 64

P
See Also delete, update
P
ping
The ping command uses an ICMP ECHO_REQUEST datagram to elicit an

ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from the specified host or network gateway. The
ping command can be interrupted by pressing any key during its operation.
Syntax ping [-c rxcount] [-i txwait ] [ -s packetsize ]
[-w timeout] [-t] [-h] host
Options -c rxcount
Stop after receiving rxcount ECHO_RESPONSE packets. If this option is
not specified, ping will operate until interrupted by the user.
-i txwait
Wait txwait seconds between sending ECHO_REQUEST packets. The
value of txwait must be a positive integer. If not specified, a value of 1 is
used.
-s packet-size
Specifies the packet size of the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST. The default is
56 (which results in a 64 byte ICMP datagram when combined with an 8
byte ICMP header).
-t timeout
Specifies the timeout for the ping. The default is 1 second.
-t
Continue the ping until it is interrupted by the user.
-h
Display the hostname of the source for any returned ICMP packet instead
of the network address.
host
Host name or IP address of destination host.
Example 1 The following example shows the ping command able to successfully reach
the destination:
zSH> ping ietf.org
PING ietf.org (132.151.1.19): 64 data bytes
!!!!!
----ietf.org PING Statistics----
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received
round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 80/99/160
Example 2 The following example shows the ping command unable to reach the
destination:
zSH> ping 192.168.211.2

Commands
PING 192.168.211.2: 64 data bytes

UUUUU
----192.168.211.2 PING Statistics----
5 packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet
loss
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
pollzhonecpe
The pollzhonecpe command polls attached Zhone customer premises

equipment (CPE) devices to determine their status.
Syntax pollzhonecpe
Example zSH> pollzhonecpe
Polling all connected Zhone CPE devices...
Zhone CPE at vrd:0 ip:192.16.199.205 status:UP
Total Zhone CPE devices: 1 (1 up) (0 down)
Access Level admin

Notes If the device detects that a CPE is down, it sends a trap to ZMS (if configured
to do so). If a ZMS is not connected or its connection is inactive, the device
does not send a trap.
See Also showzhonecpe
pwd
Displays the current directory on the system flash card file system.
Syntax pwd
Example zSH> pwd
zSH> /card1
Access Level admin

Products BAN, MALC, Raptor
See Also cd, dir

R
R
resetcliprov
Enables provisioning from a CLI session. Provisioning using the CLI is

usually enabled, except when the device is being managed by ZMS.
Syntax resetcliprov [ index | all ]
Options index
Re-enables CLI provisioning for the specified CLI session. CLI session
indexes are displayed in the output of the who command.
all
Re-enables CLI provisioning for all active CLI sessions.
Access Level admin
Notes CLI provisioning is automatically disabled after logging out of the session.
100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also setcliprov
resetpass
Resets a user password.

Syntax resetpass username
Options username
User whose password is being reset.
Example In the following example, the user jjsmith is assigned a new password
(newpassword):
zSH> resetpass jjsmith
Password: newpassword the password is not displayed on the screen

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also changepass
restore
Restores a previously saved Zhone system configuration.

Syntax restore [console] | [ network host filename ] | [ file
filename ]

Commands
Options console
Restores the configuration displayed on the local console terminal. Note
that when restoring a file from the console, specify a line an character
delay to allow the system to interpret the command. A delay of 40
milliseconds is usually sufficient.
network host filename
Restores the configuration from the specified host and filename using
TFTP. This option is not supported on the BAN or the MALC.
file filename
Restores the configuration from specified file on the flash card. You must
specify the full path to the file. This option is only available on the BAN
and the MALC.
prevent TFTP time-out or retry errors.
100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also dump
rip
Administers how routing information protocol (RIP) operates on Zhone

devices.
Syntax The following command enables or disables RIP for the entire system.
rip [domain domain-spec] enable|disable
domain domain-spec
Specifies the routing domain. Only domain 1 is supported.
enable
Enables RIP.
disable
Disables RIP (the default).
Syntax The following command displays the administrative and operational status of
RIP.
rip domain domain-spec show
domain domain-spec
The domain spec identifies the IP address range of the subnet. One (1) is
the only supported value.
show
Displays RIP information for the system.
Syntax The following command specifies the interval between RIP advertisements.

R
rip domain domain-spec timer seconds

domain domain-spec
timer seconds
The RIP advertisement in seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
Syntax The following command specifies the type of advertisements to transmit on

an interface.
rip [domain domain-spec] interface interface-address talk
v1 | v1compat | v2 | disabled
domain domain-spec
interface interface-address
Interface address to transmit RIP advertisements on.
talk v1 | v2 | v1v2 | disabled
The type of RIP packets to transmit:
• v1: RIP version 1 advertisements
• v1v2: RIP version 2 advertisements using RFC 1058 subsumption rules
• disabled: RIP advertisements disabled (default)
Syntax The following command specifies the type of interface to receive on an

interface.
rip [domain domain-spec] interface interface-address
listen v1 | v1v2 | v2 | disable
domain domain-spec
Interface address to receive RIP advertisements on.
listen v1 | v2 | v1v2 | disabled
The type of RIP packets to receive:
• v1v2: RIP version 1 and version 2 advertisements
• disabled: RIP advertisements disabled (the default)
Syntax The following command specifies whether poison-reverse updates are

transmitted on an interface.
poison on | off
domain domain-spec

Commands
Interface address to transmit poison-reverse RIP advertisements on.
poison on | off
On enables poison reverse updates.
Off disables poison reverse updates. In this case, the system uses
split-horizon updates. The default is off.
Syntax The following command specifies the default metric value to be advertised for
an interface.
metric metric-number
domain domain-spec
Interface address to assign a metric to.
metric metric-number
Metric number for an interface.
Access Level admin
Products BAN, MALC, Raptor 100, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723, Z-Edge 64
See Also route
rmdir
Removes a directory.
Syntax rmdir directory
Options directory
Name of directory to remove.
Access Level admin
See Also cd, dir, mkdir, pwd
romversion
Displays the read-only memory (ROM) version of a slot card.

Syntax romversion 1-17
Example 1 The following example displays the ROM version of an Ethernet card in slot
17:
Example 2 zSH> romversion 4

MALC CAN 1.10.0.6
Jun 21 2004, 13:11:49

R
Access Level user

route
Administers the routing information base (RIB).
Syntax The following command displays the forwarding information base.

route [domain domain-spec] show
domain domain-spec
show
Displays the routes in the route domain.
Syntax The following command adds a static route to the system routing table.
route [ domain domain-spec ] add destination-address
netmask nexthop-address nexthop-interface metric
domain domain-spec
add destination-address netmask
Adds a static route with the specified destination and network mask.
nexthop-address
IP address of the next hop.
nexthop-interface
Interface for the next hop. This is valid only when the next-hop address is
0.0.0.0. Otherwise, this should be 0 (zero). This option is currently
unsupported.
metric
A numeric value specifying the metric for the route. Lower metrics
indicate more preferred routes.
Syntax The following command deletes a static route from the system routing table.
route [ domain domain-spec ] delete destination-address
netmask nexthop-address nexthop-interface
domain domain-spec
delete destination-address netmask
Deletes the destination address and netmask from the routing table.
nexthop-address
IP address of the next hop address.
nexthop-interface

Commands
Interface for the next hop. This is valid only when the next-hop address is
0.0.0.0. Otherwise, this should be 0 (zero). This option is currently
unsupported.
Access Level admin
100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also rip
rpr
Displays information about the resilient packet ring (RPR) configuration.

Syntax rpr show topo | stats | config | status
Options topo
Displays the RPR topology.
stats [clear | noclr]
Displays RPR statistics. The optional argument clear will clear the
statistics. The noclr argument (the default) will not clear the statistics.
config
Displays the current RPR configuration.
status
Displays the status of the nodes in the RPR ring.
Example 1 This example shows a closed ring (no broken spans).
zSH> rpr show topo

total number of ring nodes= 4 (ringlet 0= 3, ringlet 1= 3)
ring protection= STEERING, ring topology= CLOSED ring
V=valid; R=reachable; E=ringlet edge states; PSW/PSE=protect state; prot/pref=raw
values
hop ----macAddr_0---- VR EE PSW PSE prot pref ----macAddr_1-- VR EE PSW PSE prot/pref
0 00:01:47:5c:34:59 tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x0d
1 00:01:47:59:1f:ea tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x04 00:01:47:59:1f:f3 tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x0c
2 00:01:47:5d:b0:f1 tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x0a 00:01:47:5d:b0:f1 tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x0a
3 00:01:47:59:1f:f3 tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x0c 00:01:47:59:1f:ea tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x04
4 00:01:47:5c:34:59 tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x0d 00:01:47:5c:34:59 tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x0d
The output of the rpr show topo command displays the information for each
ringlet (MacAddress_0 for ringlet 0; and MacAddress_1 for ringlet 1). The
fields are described in the table below.
Field Description
total number of ring nodes The total number of nodes on the ring. On an unbroken
ring, the number of nodes on each ringlet will be equal.

R
Field Description
ring protection Type of ring protection. This is configured in the
wrap-config parameter in the rpr-config profile.
Values:
steering
wrapped
ring topology Whether the ring is closed (no broken spans and traffic
can be sent on either ring) or open (at least one broken
span is detected).
hops Number of hops upstream this node is. The current node
is always displayed with a hop count of 0.
MacAddress_x The MAC address of the node on ringlet X.
V Valid. t indicates the entry is valid, f indicates not valid.
R Reachable. t indicates the entry is valid, f indicates not
valid. f indicates the span is broken between node and
its immediate downstream neighbor.
E Ringlet edge state on the west and east span. An edge
indicates the span is broken. t indicates an edge exists, f
indicates an edge does not exist.
PSW/PSE The protection state on the west (PSW) and east (PSE)
span.
Values:
IDL: Signal OK. Link is up with neighbor.
WTR: Wait-to-restore. The span has recovered from a
fault but it’s been configured to wait a period of time
before declaring it’s OK to other nodes on the ring. The
wait-to-restore time is configured in the protection-wtr
parameter in the rpr-config profile.
MS: User has requested the span to deactivate. Not
supported.
SD: Signal degraded. Not supported.
SF: Signal failure. Link is down with neighbor.
FS: User has forced span to deactivate. Not supported.
prot/pref Raw values used by the system to display edge and
protection information.
Example 2 This example shows that east span is broken on the current node:
zSH> rpr show topo

ring protection= STEERING, ring topology= OPEN ring
V=valid; R=reachable; E=ringlet edge states; PSW/PSE=protect state; prot/pref=raw
values
hop ----macAddr_0---- VR EE PSW PSE prot pref ----macAddr_1--- VR EE PSW PSE prot/pref
0 00:01:47:5a:aa:1a tt ft IDL SF 0x44 0x09
1 00:01:47:5a:aa:22 tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x05

Commands
2 00:01:47:5a:aa:2a tt tf SF IDL 0xa0 0x06
Notice the PSE (protection span east) for the current node (hop 0) is SF
(signal failure) and its neighbor across the broken span (hop 2) agrees since its
PSW (protection state west) is also SF.
Example 3 This example shows that span is broken between the other 2 nodes in the ring:
zSH> rpr show topo

ring protection= STEERING, ring topology= OPEN ring
V=valid;R=reachable;E=ringlet edge states;PSW/PSE=protect state; prot/pref=raw values
hop ----macAddr_0-- VR EE PSW PSE prot pref ----macAddr_1-----VR EE PSW PSE prot/ pref
0 00:01:47:5a:aa:1a tt ff IDL IDL 0x00 0x0d
1 00:01:47:5a:aa:22 tt tf SF IDL 0xa0 0x06 00:01:47:5a:aa:2a tt ft IDL SF 0x44 0x09
Notice the PSW (protection span west) and the PSE (protection span east) for
the current node is IDL (link up), but that the PSW for the upstream node
(hop 1) is SF (signal failure) and its neighbor agrees since its PSE (protection
state east) is also SF.
Access Level user
Products MALC, Raptor
S
sar8260
The sar8260 command shows operational and status information about the
Sechtor 100A ATM 8260 driver. This command can be used only after the
ATM driver is added to the system log list.
For more information about system logging, see the log show, log level and
showtask command descriptions.
Note: The Sechtor 100A can only perform sar8260 ping when
connected to IADs that support OAM F5 loopbacks.
Syntax sar8260
startLog
This option entered after the sar8260 command will enable log messages.
Once enabled, the log level can be set with the log level command.
stopLog
This option used with the sar8260 command will disable log messages.
Syntax log level sar8260 log level

sar8260

S
Use sar8260 as a modifier with the log level command to set the level of
logging for the Sechtor 100A ATM driver. Log level NOTICE will log
AAL2 control packets. Log level INFO will log AAL2 voice packet
headers. Log level DEBUG will log AAL2 voice packet payloads.See the
example, below.
Syntax sar8260
stats
This level of ATM driver logging shows high-level information about the
Sechtor 100A ATM driver.
stats vpi vci
Using the VPI and VCI address with the sar8260 command displays
statistics only for the Virtual Circuit (VC) with this address.
stats vpi vci cid
Using the sar8260 command with the VPI VCI and CID numbers gives
information about the ATM driver at the CID level.
Syntax sar8260 ping vpi vci

vpi
VPI to ping.
vci
VCI to ping.
Example 1 This is an example of a sar8260 ping:
zSH> sar8260 ping 0 501

Pinging vpi 0, vci 501 ..
zSH> Ping response received from vpi 0, vci 501
Example 2 This example shows the sar8260 command with the startLog option.
zSH> sar8260 startLog
Example 3 This example shows the log level options.
zSH> log level

Usage: log level < module > < emergency | 1 >
< alert | 2 >
< critical | 3 >
< error | 4 >
< warning | 5 >
< notice | 6 >
< information | 7 >
< debug | 8 >
Example 4 The following example sets the log level for the 8260 ATM driver at the
notice level
zSH> log level sar8260 notice
Module: sar8260 at level: notice

Commands
Example 5 This example shows the result of using the stats modifier with the sar8260
command. The system displays the highest level of information available
about the 8260 ATM driver.
zSH> sar8260 stats
MPC8260 mask 17, AAL2 microcode rev 26
ATM Driver Statistics
Open VCs...... 59
CPS Tx........ 0 CPS Rx........ 0
SAR Tx........ 0 SAR Rx........ 11313
OAM Tx........ 0 OAM Rx........ 0
Faults........ 0
Inv. Lookup... 0 Inv. Vc....... 0
rxInt......... 11626 txInt......... 46164
swErrCount.... 0 swWarnCount... 0
totSeqErr.... 0
ATM AAL2 Statistics
Open VCs........... 59 Open CIDs.......... 314

Active Calls....... 0 Cumulative Calls... 0
Voice Tx........... 0 Voice Rx........... 0
CAS Tx............. 33033 CAS Rx............. 0
Alarm Tx........... 0 Alarm Rx........... 0
I3661 Tx........... 13136 I3661 Rx........... 11130
3661 Chains........ 7825
Unsupported Rx..... 0 Errors............. 13
RP state errors.... 0 RP CFs............. 0
Critical Timeouts.. 0 TxVoiceDrop.........0
Example 6 This example shows the statistics displayed when a VPI of 0 (zero) and a VCI
of 501 are used as arguments.
zSH> sar8260 stats 0 501
ATM Driver VC Statistics
VPI..... 0 VCI....... 501
CC...... 258 PCR....... 182
DelyPcr. 182 pcrTick... 0
Tx...... 9112780 Tx Err.... 0
CPS Rx.. 9103499 SAR Rx.... 1769 Rx Errs.. 0
CPS Errs 1
RxPAR... 0 RxSEQ..... 1 RxOSF.... 0
RxHEC... 0 RxLEN..... 0 RxBusy... 0
RxOVL... 0 RxSPL..... 0
SAR Errs 10
RxRTE... 0 RxSDU..... 0 RxOS..... 0
RxLast.. 1769 RxNotL.... 0
noBuf... 0 badLength. 0
OAM State: ENABLED
Tx OAM.. 10775 Rx OAM.... 299 Faults... 4
ATM AAL2 VC Statistics
Open CIDs.......... 13 Pending Events..... 0

S
Active Calls....... 0 Cumulative Calls... 5

Voice Tx........... 9111039 Voice Rx........... 9103499
Voice Tx Errors.... 0 Voice Rx Errors.... 0
CAS Tx Requests.... 0 CAS Rx Delivered... 0
CAS Tx Redundant... 0 CAS Rx Redundant... 0
CAS Tx Refresh..... 0 CAS Rx Refresh..... 0
CAS Tx Errors...... 0 CAS Rx Errors...... 0
Alarm Tx........... 0 Alarm Rx........... 0
Alarm Tx Errors.... 0 Alarm Rx Errors.... 0
I3661 Tx........... 1741 I3661 Rx........... 1769
I3661 Tx Errors.... 0 I3661 Rx Errors.... (n/a)
Type 3 CRC Errors.. 0 OOS Conditions..... 0
IllegalUUI......... 0 IllegalCID......... 0
The OAM State field in the response details the status of VCL fault detection.
Possible values for the OAM State field include:
• ENABLED: VCL fault detection is enabled. CPE responded to the
loopback. There is no fault on the VCL.
• ENABLED DIAG LOOP FAULT: VCL fault detection is enabled. No
response to the loopback. There is a fault on the VCL.
• ENABLED AIS FAULT: VCL fault detection is enabled. BAN is
receiving AIS cells indicating a fault on the VCL going toward the
downstream endpoint.
• ENABLED RDI FAULT: VCL fault detection is enabled. BAN is
receiving RDI cells indicating a fault on the VCL coming from the remote
endpoint of the VCL.
• DISABLED: VCL fault detection is disabled.
Example 7 Using the sar8260 command with the VPI, VCI, and CID numbers gives
information about the ATM interface at the CID level.
zSH> sar8260 stats 0 201 16
ATM AAL2 CID Statistics [VPI 0 VCI 201 CID 16]
Channel Type....... POTS Status............. OK

Active............. 0 Cumulative Calls... 0
Voice Tx........... 0 Voice Rx........... 0
Voice Tx Errors.... 0 Voice Rx Errors.... 0
CAS Tx Requests.... 1 CAS Rx Delivered... 0
CAS Tx Refresh..... 115 CAS Rx Refresh..... 0
CAS Tx Redundant... 3 CAS Rx Redundant... 0
CAS Tx Errors...... 0 CAS Rx Errors...... 0
Alarm Tx........... 0 Alarm Rx........... 0
Alarm Tx Errors.... 0 Alarm Rx Errors.... 0
Type 3 CRC Errors.. 0
Example 8 Issue the sar8260 command with the dchannelcids option to view CIDs
allocated for ISDN D channels by ELCP. The command syntax is sar8260
dchannelcids vpi vci.

Commands
zSH> sar8260 dchannelcids 0 40

128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147
148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
selftest
Runs diagnostics on the device.
Note: Running a diagnostics test can interrupt traffic on the card.
Syntax selftest get index repetition type

index
The user-defined index number of the test to run.
repetition
Number of times to repeat the test.
type
Type of test to run. The possible tests are:
Table 8: Supported diagnostics
Test Devices supported
Back Plane Test verifies the card can access the back All cards except MTAC cards
plane by verifying the back plane EEPROM checksum.
Card EEPROM Test verifies the main card EEPROM All

checksum.
Daughter 1 card EEPROM Test verifies the daughter 1 MALC ADSL-24 card
card is present by verifying the daughter 1 card EEPROM MALC and Raptor ADSL-32 cards
checksum.
MALC and Raptor ADSL-32 + splitter cards
MALC ADSL+POTS 24 card
MALC and Raptor G.SHDSL card
MALC POTS-24 card
MALC and Raptor Uplink cards
Daughter 2 card EEPROM Test verifies the daughter 2 MALC ADSL-24 card
card is present by verifying the daughter 2 card EEPROM MALC and Raptor ADSL-32 cards
checksum.
MALC ADSL+POTS 24 card
Fan Tray Test verifies the fan tray is operational by BAN Infoservices cards
verifying the fan tray EEPROM checks MALC and Raptor Uplink cards

S
Table 8: Supported diagnostics (Continued)
Test Devices supported
Fhrame Bus Test verifies the card can access the fhrame All cards except MALC and Raptor G.SHDSL card
bus by executing a loopback test.
Flash Test verifies the card can access the PCMCIA flash BAN Infoservices cards
card I/O by creating, writing, and reading a 4000-byte file. MALC and Raptor Uplink cards
I/O Card Test verifies the I/O card is present by verifying BAN ADSL 24 card
the I/O card EEPROM checksum. MALC and Raptor ADSL-32 cards
BAN ATM AAL2/5 T3 card
BAN ATM AAL5 OC3-c/STM1 card
BAN ATM AAL5 T3 card
BAN SDSL/G.SHDSL cards
BAN T3/E3 cards
Mezzanine Card Test verifies the mezzanine card is BAN SDSL/G.SHDSL cards
operational by verifying the mezzanine card EEPROM BAN T3/E3 cards
checksum.
BAN ATM AAL5 OC3-c/STM1 card
BAN ATM AAL5 T3 card
BAN ADSL 24 card
Mid Plane Test verifies the mid plane card is present by BAN ATM AAL2/5 T3 card
verifying the mid plane EEPROM checksum. BAN Ethernet 10/100 card
BAN Infoservices cards
BAN SDSL/G.SHDSL cards
Real Time Clock Test verifies the real time clock BAN Infoservices cards
increments. MALC and Raptor Uplink cards
Self Test executes all individual tests. All
Shelf Lamp Test illuminates the shelf alarm indicators for BAN Infoservices cards
1.5 seconds. Once the diagnostic completes, the indicators MALC and Raptor Uplink cards
return to their original settings.
Shelf Monitor Test verifies the shelf monitor board is BAN Infoservices cards
operational by checking the POST status register and MALC and Raptor Uplink cards
verifying the shelf monitor board EEPROM checksum.
Supervisory Bus Test verifies the card can access the BAN Infoservices cards
supervisory bus by executing a loopback test. MALC and Raptor Uplink cards
Syntax selftest start index repetition type

start
Starts the specified test.

Commands
Syntax selftest stop index repetition type

stop
Stops the specified test.
Syntax selftest del index repetition type

del
Deletes the specified test.
Syntax selftest list

list
Lists test results.
Example 1 To display the tests on a MALC:
zSH> selftest list

Name Id FuncPtr Record Time Status Details
-------------------------------------------------------------
Flash-1 5 0x075760 0x2f8fae8 30 PASS Flash:1 shelf:1 slot:1
Shelf Mon 9 0x180bdc 0x2a54070 15 PASS Shelf:1 slot:1.
Supv Lpbk 2 0x1807e4 0x2b24000 15 PASS Wr:0x5aa5 rd:0x00a5 shelf:1 sl
Fan Tray 8 0x1809dc 0x2b24090 15 PASS FANTRAY EEPROM checksum shelf:
Lamp Test 6 0x1805e0 0x27f7700 10 PASS Shelf:1 slot:1.
Card EEprom 3 0x226cd4 0x27f7670 5 PASS CARD EEPROM checksum slot:1.
Daughter-1 13 0x226cd4 0x2b42f20 5 PASS 1DAUGHTER EEPROM checksum slot
Back Plane 12 0x226cd4 0x27f75e0 5 PASS BACKPLANE EEPROM checksum slot
RT Clock 7 0x226cd4 0x27ef590 5 PASS RTC POST slot:1
List memory allocated: 972 bytes.
Example 2 To display the tests on a BAN:
zSH> selftest list

------------------------------------------------------------- Flash-1 5
0x212118 0x7dcfad0 30 PASS Flash:1 shelf:1 slot:3
Flash-2 5 0x21229c 0x7dcfa40 30 FAIL Flash:2 card absent.
Shelf Mon 9 0x22d8f8 0x7b92350 15 PASS Shelf:1 slot:3.
Supv Lpbk 2 0x22d4cc 0x7babb80 15 PASS Wr:0x5aa5 rd:0x00a5 shelf:1 sl
Fan Tray 8 0x22d6dc 0x7bac5f0 15 PASS FANTRAY EEPROM checksum shelf:
Lamp Test 6 0x22d2b0 0x7bac090 10 PASS Shelf:1 slot:3.
frbus-1 4 0x2a1a70 0x7b14d70 30 PASS Fhramelpbk> shelf:1 slot:3 frb
frbus-2 4 0x2a1a70 0x7b1dba0 30 PASS Fhramelpbk> shelf:1 slot:3 frb
frbus-3 4 0x2a1a70 0x7b14980 30 PASS Fhramelpbk> shelf:1 slot:3 frb
Card EEprom 3 0x358170 0x7b1dcc0 5 PASS CARD EEPROM checksum slot:3.
Mid-Plane 13 0x358170 0x7b04030 5 FAIL MIDPLANE EEPROM checksum slot:
RT Clock 7 0x358170 0x7b12b30 5 PASS RTC POST slot:3
Back Plane 12 0x358170 0x7b040c0 5 PASS BACKPLANE EEPROM checksum slot
Example 3 To start all the tests and run them one time (this example is from a MALC):
zSH> selftest start 1 1 1

S
Use the list option to view the results of the test:

zSH> selftest list
-------------------------------------------------------------
Flash-1 5 0x075760 0x2f8fae8 30 PASS Flash:1 shelf:1 slot:1
Shelf Mon 9 0x180bdc 0x2a54070 15 PASS Shelf:1 slot:1.
Supv Lpbk 2 0x1807e4 0x2b24000 15 PASS Wr:0x5aa5 rd:0x00a5 shelf:1 sl
Fan Tray 8 0x1809dc 0x2b24090 15 PASS FANTRAY EEPROM checksum shelf:
Lamp Test 6 0x1805e0 0x27f7700 10 PASS Shelf:1 slot:1.
Card EEprom 3 0x226cd4 0x27f7670 5 PASS CARD EEPROM checksum slot:1.
Daughter-1 13 0x226cd4 0x2b42f20 5 PASS 1DAUGHTER EEPROM checksum slot
Back Plane 12 0x226cd4 0x27f75e0 5 PASS BACKPLANE EEPROM checksum slot
RT Clock 7 0x226cd4 0x27ef590 5 PASS RTC POST slot:1
set
This command is used only by the configuration restore process.

Syntax N/A
100A, Z-Edge 64
set2default
Erases the system configuration and restores the factory default settings.
Caution: This command erases your system configuration, reboots

the system, and causes all connections to drop.
Syntax set2default
100A, Z-Edge 64
setcliprov
Enables or disables provisioning from a CLI session. If CLI provisioning

cannot be re-enabled using this command, use the resetcliprov command.
Syntax setcliprov [ enable | disable ] [ index | all ] [ -d ]
Options enable | disable
Enables or disables provisioning from the CLI.
index
Enables or disables CLI provisioning from a single CLI session with the
specified index. CLI session indexes are displayed in the output of the
who command.

Commands
all
Enables or disables CLI provisioning for all active CLI sessions.
-d
Indicates which CLI sessions are enabled for provisioning.
Example The following example displays the CLI sessions that enabled for
provisioning:
zSH> setcliprov -d
Note: Provisioning is only available when Flag Count = 0
CLI session = 0: Flag Count = 0.
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also resetcliprov
setdatetime
Sets the date and time.

Syntax setdatetime [ month day yr hr min sec ]
Options month
Month in the format mm.
date
Day in the format dd.
yr
Year in the format yyyy.
hr
Hour in the format hh.
min
Minutes in the format mm.
sec
Seconds in the format ss.
Access Level admin
Notes If Network Time Protocol (NTP) is enabled, the setdatetime command is
disabled.

S
100A, Z-Edge 64
setline
Specifies the maximum number of lines to be displayed at once.

Syntax setline [ number-of-lines ]
Options
Displays the current number of lines.
number-of-lines
Changes the number of lines displayed per page.
Example zSH> setline 52
cli lines per pager changed to: 52
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
setprompt
Sets the system prompt.

Syntax setprompt [ session | user ] prompt
Options session
Changes the system prompt to the specified string for the current session.
user
Changes the system prompt for the user to the specified string. This
prompt appears every time the user logs in.
prompt
A string of up to 20 characters for the prompt
Example The following example sets the system prompt to Zhone> for the current
session:
zSH> setprompt session Zhone>
Prompt set to Zhone>
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
shelfctrl
Displays overall status of the system.

Syntax sheflctrl [ monitor | show | stats ]

Commands
Options monitor
Displays system status, including temperature, power supply status, and
fan status.
show
Displays state of the shelf monitor.
stats
Displays device stats, including messaging errors, card updates, and clock
messages.
Example 1 The following example displays the overall system status, including alarms on
the slot cards:
zSH> shelfctrl monitor
Shelf uptime: 1 day, 23 hours, 26 minutes
Shelf Monitor CPLD version: 0.5
Shelf Monitor Firmware version: 0.6
Outlet temperature sensor: 77 degrees (normal)
Fan Power A: normal
Fan Power B: normal
Power Supply A: normal
Power Supply B: normal
Fan status: OK.
System: Minor alarm set.
Card 1: Minor alarm set.
Note that not all information is available for all products.
Example 2 The following example displays overall system status for a Raptor 100:
zSH> shelfctrl monitor

Shelf uptime: 4 hours, 21 minutes
Shelf start time: 49
Control CPLD version: 2.1
Outlet temperature sensor: 46 degrees Celsius (normal)
Fan Power A: failure
Fan Power B: failur
Example 3 The following example displays general system statistics:
zSH> shelfctrl stats

Shelf Controller Message Statistics
-----------------------------------
Card updates: 32
Card ECHO: 0
Directory services messages: 2
Clock messages: 513905
Lease messages: 1427
Heartbeat messages: 2217639
Card update errors: 0

Card ECHO errors: 0
Directory services errors: 0
Clock errors: 0

S
Lease errors: 0
Heartbeat errors: 0
Receive errors: 0
No Peer heartbeat check errors: 0
Example 4 The following example (on a MALC) displays whether the shelf is active and
the state of each of the slot cards:
zSH> shelfctrl show
Shelf Controller Address: 01:01:12
Shelf Registry Address: 01:01:1036
Lease ID: 0x02070000_00000032
State: active
Slot 1:
prevState: CONFIGURING currentState: RUNNING
mode: FUNCTIONAL startTime: 1064226409
Slot 2:
Slot 3:
Slot 4:
Slot 5:
Slot 6:
Slot 7:
Slot 8:
Slot 9:
Slot 10:
prevState: CONFIGURING currentState: RUNNING mode:
FUNCTIONAL startTime: 1064226589
Slot 11:
Slot 12:
Slot 13:
Slot 14:

Commands

Slot 15:
Slot 16:
Slot 17:
Slot 18:
Slot 19:
Slot 20:
Slot 21:
Example 5 The following example is from a Raptor 100:
zSH> shelfctrl show

Shelf Controller Address: 01:01:12
Shelf Registry Address: 01:01:1032
Lease ID: 0x022b0000_00000033
State: active
Slot 1:
mode: NONE startTime: 1061243734
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also slots
shelfreboot
Resets the shelf. When you reset a shelf, all connections are dropped.
Syntax shelfreboot shelf
Options shelf
Shelf to reset. The only supported value is 1.
Access Level admin
Products BAN, MALC
See Also systemreboot

S
show
The show command displays the default contents of profile and its parameter
value ranges. The command uses the following syntax:
Syntax show profile-type
Shows the parameters in the specified profile with the parameter value
ranges.
Example To view the options available for a profile, use the show command and
specify the profile type:
zSH> show ip-interface-record
vpi:---------------> {0 - 4095}
vci:---------------> {0 - 65535}
rdindex:-----------> {0 - 2147483647}
dhcp:--------------> none client server both
addr:--------------> {0 - -1}
netmask:-----------> {0 - -1}
bcastaddr:---------> {0 - -1}
destaddr:----------> {0 - -1}
farendaddr:--------> {0 - -1}
mru:---------------> {0 - 2147483647}
reasmmaxsize:------> {0 - 65535}
ingressfiltername:-> {33}
egressfiltername:--> {33}
pointtopoint:------> no yes
mcastenabled:------> no yes
ipfwdenabled:------> no yes
mcastfwdenabled:---> no yes
natenabled:--------> no yes
bcastenabled:------> no yes
ingressfilterid:---> {0 - 2147483647}
egressfilterid:----> {0 - 2147483647}
ipaddrdynamic:-----> static ppp dhcpclient
unnumbered
dhcpserverenable:--> true false
subnetgroup:-------> {0 - 2147483647}
unnumberedindex:---> {0 - 2147483647}
mcastcontrollist:--> {264}
vlanid:------------> {0 - 4095}
maxVideoStreams:---> {0 - 6}
NOTE: Supported VPI/VCI ranges vary based on card type.
See documentation for the exact range of supported VPI/
VCI values.
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also get, list

Commands
showactivecards
Displays information about the active cards in a redundant card group.

Syntax showactivecards
Example zSH> showactivecards
Shelf/Slot Group Id Card Type
__________________________________
1: 1/21 2 MALC MTAC
2: 1/1 1 MALC DS3
See Also showredundancy
showdatetime
Displays the date and time.

Syntax showdatetime
Access Level admin
100A
See Also setdatetime
showhostname
Displays a list of remote hosts, along with their Internet addresses and aliases.
Syntax showhostname
Access Level user
Notes This command is persistent across reboots.
Products BAN, MALC, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723, Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge 64
showinetstat
Displays information about the active IP sockets.

Syntax showinetstat
Example
zSH> showinetstat
Active Internet connections (including servers)
PCB Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address (state)
-------- ----- ------ ------ ------------------ ------------------ -------
382806c TCP 0 214 192.24.94.223.23 192.16.41.183.5169 ESTABLISHED
3827cd0 TCP 0 0 0.0.0.0.23 0.0.0.0.0 LISTEN
3827dd8 UDP 0 0 0.0.0.0.162 0.0.0.0.0

S
3827d54 UDP 0 0 0.0.0.0.161 0.0.0.0.0
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
showipstat
Displays IP statistics.
Syntax showipstat [ -r ]
Options
Displays IP protocol statistics.
-r
Resets counters to 0 (zero).
Example zSH> showipstat
total 81601
badsum 0
tooshort 0
toosmall 0
badhlen 0
badlen 0
infragments 0
fragdropped 0
fragtimeout 0
forward 11141
cantforward 4303
redirectsent 0
unknownprotocol 2
nobuffers 0
reassembled 0
outfragments 0
noroute 0
fastfwd 6447695
fastfwdnoroute 0
ffwdnointerface 0
nointerface 0
c2ctotal 6447695
c2cbadptr 0
c2cnopkt 0
c2cnoipktmem 0
c2cttlexp 0
c2clastchance 0
flingnoipkt 0
flingerror 0
flung 0
rawflung 0
rawnofling 0
fwdloopdrop 0
localfastpath 55532
pendingarpoverflow 835

Commands
Access Level admin

Products BAN, MALC, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723, Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge 64
showline
Displays information on registered lines in line resource registry's database.

Syntax showline [ shelf | slot| -c number of columns]
Options shelf
Displays all registered lines on the specified shelf.
slot
Displays all registered lines on the specified shelf-slot.
-c number of columns
Specifies the number of columns (1 -12) to display for each line group.
Example zSH> showline 1 -c 5
Search in progress .........
---------------------------------------------------------
shelf = 1, slot = 1, line type = DSPPROXY
line
1-5 NONE ACT
---------------------------------------------------------
shelf = 1, slot = 1, line type = AAL5PROXY
line
1-5 ACT
---------------------------------------------------------
shelf = 1, slot = 1, line type = SONET
line
1-5 OOS
---------------------------------------------------------
shelf = 1, slot = 1, line type = T1
line
1-5 OOS OOS OOS OOS OOS
6-10 OOS OOS OOS
---------------------------------------------------------
shelf = 1, slot = 1, line type = ETHERNET
line
1-5 ACT OOS
---------------------------------------------------------
shelf = 1, slot = 8, line type = DSL
line
21-25 OOS OOS OOS OOS
--------------------------------------------------------
shelf = 1, slot = 15, line type = POTS
line

S

---------------------------------------------------------
shelf = 1, slot = 15, line type = DSL
line
Access Level user

Notes The time-out values persists across resets.
showlinestatus
Displays information about all the lines in the system.

Syntax showlinestatus [ shelf slot port subport ]
Options
With no options, displays status on all available lines.
shelf
Displays status of all lines on the specified shelf. Currently, 1 (one) is the
only supported value.
slot
Displays status of all lines on the specified slot.
subport
Displays status of all lines on the specified subport. Note that not all
interfaces support subports.
Example 1 The following example displays the line status of the lines in shelf 1, slot 2 (in
this example, an ATM trunking card):
zSH> showlinestatus 1 7
.................
Line Type-------> DS3 (1)
GroupId --------> 260
Status ---------> OOS (3)
Redundancy -----> ACTIVE (3)
TxClk ----------> LOOP (4)
RefClkSrc ------> NO
If_index -------> 259
Shelf ----------> 1
Slot -----------> 7
Port -----------> 1
SubPort --------> 0
.................

Commands
Line Type-------> DS3 (1)

GroupId --------> 262
Status ---------> OOS (3)
Redundancy -----> ACTIVE (3)
TxClk ----------> THROUGH (5)
quit
For each connection, the system lists the line type (such as an Ethernet, DS3,
SONET, or T1/E1 line), the number of registered lines, their group ID, the line
status, the ifindex (interface line number), the peer ifindex (the peer line
number), and the shelf, slot, and port where the interface resides.
A value of ACTIVE in the Status field indicates that the physical circuit is
detected. OSS (Out of Service) means that the physical interface is not active.
Example 2 The next example displays the line status of the line in shelf 1, slot 9, port 1
(in this example, an SDSL/G.SHDSL card):
zSH> showlinestatus 1 9 1
.................
Line Type-------> DSL (10)
GroupId --------> 20
Status ---------> OOS (3)
Redundancy -----> NONE (0)
TxClk ----------> NONE (1)
If_index -------> 19
Shelf ----------> 1
Slot -----------> 9
Port -----------> 1
SubPort --------> 0
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
showmem
Displays system memory partition blocks and statistics.

Syntax showmem [ -a ]
Options
Displays all memory partition blocks and pools.
-a
Displays all memory partition blocks and pools as well as the free
memory blocks in the system partition.
Example The following example displays all the system memory blocks:

S
zSH> showmem -a
memory partition blocks and statistics...
FREE LIST:
num addr size
--- ---------- ----------
1 0xfffa9f0 19968
2 0x19b5400 97336376
3 0x7d61858 179992
SUMMARY:
status bytes blocks avg block max block
------ --------- -------- ---------- ----------
current
free 97536336 3 32512112 97336376
--this represents free blocks not yet allocated to the
memory pools
FIXED MEMORY POOLS:
Block Total Free

Size (Bytes) Blocks Blocks
32 7540 59
64 5780 2705
128 5988 85
256 664 33
512 372 105
1024 1532 3
2048 184 4
4096 65 1
8192 107 2
16384 34 1
32768 88 2
65536 13 0
131072 2 0
Pool Totals:
Number of Total Blocks in all Pools: 22369
Number of Free Blocks in all Pools: 3000
Total Bytes in all Pools: 9739152
Total Free Bytes in all Pools: 409760
Total Allocated Bytes in all Pools: 9329392
Statistics on Large Block Allocations:

Number of Large Blocks Allocated: 18
Total Bytes Allocated: 134201072
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64

Commands
showredundancy
Displays system redundancy information.

Syntax showredundancy
Example zSH> showredundancy
Redundancy status for card 01:01 - Not Safe, some
services are standalone
01:01 is active storage
No standby storage
Products BAN, MALC

See Also showactivecards (MALC)
showresolver
Displays information about the Domain Name System (DNS) resolver on the
device. The DNS resolver is configured in the resolver profile.
Syntax showresolver [ -d domain-ID ]
Options
With no option specified, displays all DNS resolver information.
-d domain-ID
Displays DNS resolver information for the specified domain ID.
Example zSH> showresolver
Resolver Configuration:
Routing Domain: 0
Query Order: QUERY_LOCAL_FIRST
Domain Name: zhone.com
Nameserver[0]: 192.168.9.43
Nameserver[1]: 201.12.4.68
Nameserver[2]:
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
showsonetrp
Reports detailed status for an OC3-c/STM1 interface, including the following

line conditions:
• Loss of signal (LOS)
• Loss of frame (LOF)
• Alarm indication signal (AIS)
Syntax showsonetrp [line ]

S
Options line
The number of the interface to display status information for. With no
options, the command displays overall information about the line.
Example The following example shows the showsonetrp command output for line 1:
zSH> showsonetrp 1
************ SONET RP Debug Information ************
name: tSONETRP
address: 01:01:1085
lineRRLeaseId: 0x02070000_0000004f
sonetXlatProfLeaseId: 0x02070000_00000050
sonetCfgProfLeaseId: 0x02070000_00000050
sonetLineRRNotifyLeaseId: 0x00000000_00000000
_sonetRpCardGroupId: 1
iamRedundantCard: TRUE
iamActiveCard: TRUE
PeerCardInfoAvailable TRUE
PeerCardShelf 1
PeerCardSlot 2
PeerCardAlive TRUE
numUnits: 2
Attached units:
1 2

iamRedundantLine: TRUE
iamActiveLine: TRUE
state: 4 ( OOS )
ifIndex: 4
LineGroup ifIndex: 5
primaryClock: FALSE
shelf: 1
slot: 1
port: 1
subPort: 0
xlatProf.ifIndex: 4
xlatProf.ifType: 39
sectionAlarms 6 ( LOS LOF )
lineAlarms 2 ( AIS )
pathAlarms 1 ( NODEFECT )
mediumType sonet
mediumLineCoding sonetmediumnrz
mediumLineType sonetshortsinglemode
mediumCircuitIdentifier
mediumLoopbackConfig sonetnoloop
pathCurrentWidth sts3cstm1
clockExternalRecovery enabled
clockTransmitSource looptiming
mediumScrambleConfig TRUE
mediumLineScrmConfig TRUE
Send APS stats FALSE

Commands
Products BAN, MALC, Raptor 319, Raptor 719, Raptor 723, Sechtor 100A
showuser
Displays information about all users on the system, or for a specific user.
Syntax showuser [ username ]
Options
If the current user has useradmin privileges, displays information about
all users in the system. Otherwise, displays information only about the
current user.
username
Displays information about the specified user.
Example The following example displays information a specific user:
zSH> showuser jjsmith

Full Name: jay_smith
User Name: jjsmith
Access Levels:(user)
....................
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also adduser, deleteuser, updateuser
showzhonecpe
Displays the Zhone Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) connected to the

system, including the virtual routing domain, IP address, and current
connection status.
Syntax showzhonecpe
Example zSH> showzhonecpe
1: Zhone CPE at vrd:0 ip:192.168.199.205 status:UP
failures:0
Total Zhone CPE devices: 1 (1 up) (0 down)
Access Level admin

Products BAN
See Also pollzhonecpe
slotreboot
Resets the specified slot card. When you reset a system, all connections are
dropped.

S
Syntax slotreboot slot

Options slot
The slot to reboot.
Access Level admin
Products BAN, MALC
See Also shelfreboot, systemreboot
slots
Displays the type of cards installed in the chassis.

The slots command can report any of the following states:
• NONE: Card inserted in shelf.
• BOOT: Card is running ROM code.
• LOAD: Card is loading code over the backplane.
• CONFIGURING: Card is loading code over the backplane.
• RUNNING: Card is fully functional.
Syntax slots slot-number
Options slot-number
Displays information about the specified slot card.
Example 1 To view information about all the slot cards in the system, use the slots
command without any arguments:
zSH> slots
1: INFOSERVICES (RUNNING)
3: ETHERNET (RUNNING)
5: ATM TRNK CR/OC3 ATM SM (RUNNING)
7: ATM TRNK/E3 ATM (RUNNING)
9: HDSL2 (RUNNING)
10: ATM TRNK (LOADING)
12: ATM TRNK CR (LOADING)
15: ATM TRNK CR/T3 ATM (RUNNING)
Example 2 To view information about a particular slot card, use the slots command and
specify a slot number. For example:
zSH> slots 3
Type : INFOSERVICES
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 1
Serial # : 4010042
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Card-Profile ID : 1/3/3
Shelf : 1
Slot : 3
State : RUNNING
Mode : FUNCTIONAL

Commands
Heartbeat check : enabled

Longest hbeat : 180
Fault reset : enabled
Uptime : 2 hours, 45 minutes
Access Level user

snmp
Provides access to standard SNMP commands.

Syntax snmp [get|set|next|walk|xlate] ipAddr Community OID
[type] [value]
Options get
Gets the value of the specified OID.
set
Sets the specified OID. Currently unsupported.
next
SNMP next request. Currently unsupported.
walk
Starts a MIB walk on the specified device. Currently unsupported.
xlate
Translates between OIDs and object names.
ipAddr
The IP address of the device.
Community
The SNMP community name for the device.
OID
The OID for the request.
type
SNMP type. Used only in set requests.
value
The value for the OID. Used only in set requests.
Example 1 The following example translates the object name sysDescr to an OID value:
zSH> snmp xlate sysDescr

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1
Example 2 The following example displays the upstream and downstream line rates for
an SDSL interface.
First, find the ifIndex for the interface you want to get the information for:
zSH> ifxlate 1-7-1-0/hdsl2
ifIndex: ----------> {868} use this value in the SNMP get command
shelf: ------------> {1}

S
slot: -------------> {7}

port: -------------> {1}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {hdsl2}
ifName: -----------> {1-7-1-0}
Then use the ifIndex in the SNMP get command:

zSH> snmp get 192.240.200.111 ZhonePrivate zhoneDslUpLineRate.868
zhoneDslLineEntry.zhoneDslUpLineRate.868 Value: 1552 (0x610)
zSH> snmp get 192.240.200.111 ZhonePrivate zhoneDslDownLineRate.868

zhoneDslLineEntry.zhoneDslDownLineRate.868 Value: 1552 (0x610)
Example 3 The following example displays the upstream and downstream line rates for
an ADSL interface.
zSH> ifxlate 1-3-1-0/adsl
shelf: ------------> {1}
slot: -------------> {3}
port: -------------> {1}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {adsl}
ifName: -----------> {1-3-1-0}

zhoneDslLineEntry.zhoneDslUpLineRate.58 Value: 1088000 (0x109a00)
zhoneDslLineEntry.zhoneDslDownLineRate.58 Value: 8128000 (0x7c0600)
Example 4 The following example displays the upstream and downstream line rates for a
SHDSL interface.
zSH> ifxlate 1-3-1-0/shdsl
shelf: ------------> {1}
slot: -------------> {3}
port: -------------> {1}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {shdsl}

Commands

ifName: -----------> {1-3-1-0}

zhoneDslLineEntry.zhoneDslUpLineRate.364 Value: 2320 (0x910)
zhoneDslLineEntry.zhoneDslDownLineRate.364 Value: 2320 (0x910)
Example 5 The following example displays information about an ATM T1/E1 interface.
zSH> ifxlate 1-16-1-0/ds1
shelf: ------------> {1}
slot: -------------> {16}
port: -------------> {1}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {ds1}
ifName: -----------> {1-16-1-0}
Then use the ifIndex in the SNMP get command. The following two
commands get the valid intervals for the DS1 interface and the current
number of severely errored seconds:
zSH> snmp get 192.240.200.111 ZhonePrivate zhoneValidIntervals.8
zhoneDs1Entry.zhoneValidIntervals.8 Value: 26 (0x1a)
zSH> snmp get 192.240.200.111 ZhonePrivate zhoneCurrentSESs.8

zhoneDs1CurrentEntry.zhoneCurrentSESs.8 Value: 0 (0x0)
100A, Z-Edge 64
sonetStatsShow
Displays performance monitoring statistics for the current SONET

connections.
Syntax sonetStatsShow ifIndex
Options ifIndex
The ifIndex number of the SONET interface.
Example
zSH> sonetStatsShow 29
**************** Pmon Statistics of Line 29 ****************

S
______________________Driver Raw Counts_________________
TxCell RxCell HECCor HECUncor FifoOv Locd

73815 73817 0 0 0 0
LineBIP SectBIP PathBIP LineFEBE PathFEBE OOF

0 0 0 426 73387 0
______________________Near-End Current Stats_______________________
...Section Stats............Line Stats..............Path Stats.....
ESs SESs SEFs CVs ESs SESs CVs UAS ESs SESs CVs UAS
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
____________Far-End Current Stats__________
.......Line Stats............Path Stats.....
ESs SESs CVs UAS ESs SESs CVs UAS
426 0 426 0 138 10 194 298
__________________________Near-End Interval Stats________________________
......Section Stats...........Line Stats..............Path Stats.....
INT ESs SESs SEFs CVs ESs SESs CVs UAS ESs SESs CVs UAS
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
____________Far-End Interval Stats__________
....Line Stats...........Path Stats.....
INT ESs SESs CVs UAS ESs SESs CVs UAS
1 301 0 301 0 299 0 537 0
2 287 0 287 0 286 0 410 0
3 589 0 589 0 588 18 3423 0
4 248 0 248 0 247 1 989 0
5 474 0 474 0 474 0 2219 0
6 515 0 515 0 511 8 2121 0
7 233 0 233 0 228 0 391 0
8 227 0 227 0 227 0 302 0
9 269 0 269 0 268 0 452 0
10 274 0 274 0 272 0 359 0
11 461 0 461 0 456 0 1083 0
12 425 0 425 0 422 0 804 0
13 257 0 257 0 255 0 420 0
14 255 0 255 0 250 0 366 0
15 397 0 397 0 397 7 1492 0
16 899 1 898 0 899 80 7532 0
************************ End ************************

Commands
Access Level user

sonetstatusshow
Displays performance monitoring statistics for the current SONET

connections.
Syntax sonetstatusshow ifIndex
Options ifIndex
The ifIndex number of the SONET interface.
Example
zSH> sonetStatusShow 29
Current Time: FRI SEP 24 16:28:21 2004

_______________ Status of Line 29 _______________
no section alarms
no line alarms
no path alarms
___________________ End _____________________
Access Level user

stack
Binds, unbinds, and shows the logical protocol stacks used in the system.
Syntax stack bind [ upperlayer lowerlayer ]

The command can be used in two forms: If no arguments are provided to
stack bind, it will prompt for the upper and lower interfaces. Alternately, the
interfaces can be provided on the command line.
upper layer
The upper layer of the interfaces to be bound. Interfaces can be specified
using either the name/type or the shelf/slot/port/subport/type notations.
lower layer
The lower layer of the interfaces to be bound. Interfaces can be specified
using either the name/type or the shelf/slot/port/subport/type notations.
Syntax stack unbind [ upperlayer lowerlayer ]

Unbinds the specified interface.
upper layer
The upper layer of the interfaces to be unbound. Interfaces can be
specified using either the name/type or the shelf/slot/port/subport/type
notations.

S
lower layer
The lower layer of the interfaces to be unbound. Interfaces can be
specified using either the name/type or the shelf/slot/port/subport/type
notations.
Syntax stack show interface

Displays the protocol stack for the specified interface.
interface
The interface. Interfaces can be specified using either the name/type or
the shelf/slot/port/subport/type notations.
Syntax stack showall interface
Displays all the associated layers of the specified interface.

Example 1 zSH> stack bind
Enter the upper layer: 1-1-2-0/ip
Enter the lower layer: 1-1-2-0-ethernetcsmacd/other
Stack bind successful.
Example 2 zSH> stack show 1-9-48-0-hdsl2/aal5

1483 layer: 1-9-48-0-hdsl2/rfc1483
AAL5 layer: 1-9-48-0-hdsl2/aal5
ATM layer: 1-9-48-0-hdsl2/atm
Line Group: 1-9-48-0-hdsl2/other
Physical: 1/9/48/0/hdsl2
Example 3 zSH> stack showall 1-5-1-0/sonet

ATM layer: 1-5-1-0-sonet/atm
Line Group: 1-5-1-0-sonet/other
Physical: 1/5/1/0/sonet
Example 4 zSH> stack showall 1-3-1-0/ip

IP Layer: 1-3-1-0 197.170.1.254
Line Group: 1-3-1-0-ethernetcsmacd/other
Physical: 1/3/1/0/ethernetcsmacd
100A, Z-Edge 64
su
Logs in the specified user.

Syntax su username
Options username
The superuser name.
Access Level user

Commands
100A, Z-Edge 64
swversion
Displays the current system software version.

Syntax swversion
Example zSH> swversion
Zhone InfoServ software version BAN InfoServ 1.3.2.
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
syslog
Configures logging levels for messages on the system. The system sends log
messages to a management session (either on the console or over a telnet
session), a log file on the device, and, optionally, a syslog server.
The log command configures the type of information sent in these messages.
By default, the system sends the same type of information to all log message
destinations, and logging is disabled on both the serial craft port and over
telnet sessions.
If the messages sent to the syslog server are configured the same as the log
messages sent to the console or the persistent storage (the default) the log
command also configures the syslog message contents. If the syslog messages
have been modified (using the log-module profile or the syslog command),
use the syslog command to modify syslog levels.
Syntax syslog help

help
Displays the help menu.
Syntax syslog show

show
Displays the currently configured logging levels for each software
module.
Syntax syslog level module level

module
The system module to set the level for. Use the syslog show command to
display all the system modules.
level
Sets the logging level for the specified module. Logging levels are:

S
• 1 emergency
• 2 alert
• 3 critical
• 4 error
• 5 warning
• 6 notice
• 7 information
• 8 debug
You can specify either the name of the level or the number.
Syntax syslog option type [ on | off ]

Specifies the information to include in logging messages.
type on
Specifies that the type of information be included in syslog messages. To
view the type of information you can include in a logging message, enter
the syslog option command without any arguments.
type off
Specifies that the type of information not be included in syslog messages.
Syntax syslog [ enable | disable ] module

enable module
Enables logging for the specified module. Use the syslog show command
to display all the system modules and whether they are enabled or not.
disable module
Disables logging for the specified module.
Syntax syslog session [on | off]

on
Enables logging for the current session only.
off
Disables logging for the current session.
Syntax syslog serial [on | off]

on
Enables logging on the serial craft port. This setting persists across
reboots.
off
Disables logging on the serial craft port. This setting persists across
reboots.
Syntax syslog display

Commands
Displays entries in the persistent log.
Syntax syslog cache [ max | grep pattern | size | clear | help ]
Note: The cache option is only supported on the BAN and MALC.
syslog cache
Displays the syslog cache.
syslog cache max length
Sets the maximum number of syslog messages to store. The maximum
syslog cache size is 2147483647, depending in the amount of memory
available.
syslog cache grep pattern
Searches through the syslog cache for the specified regular expression.
syslog cache clear
Clears the syslog cache.
syslog cache size
Sets the maximum amount of memory for the syslog cache. Without
options, displays the current log size.
syslog cache help
Displays help on the syslog cache command.
Example 1 The following example displays the logging levels and enabled status for the
system modules:
zSH> syslog show
MODULE LEVEL STATUS
message error enabled
taskclock error enabled
card error enabled
bds_client error enabled
alarm_mgr error enabled
tnsxmgt error enabled
leaseapi error enabled
vcs-client error enabled
dirserclient error enabled
rebootserver error enabled
pcmciadiag error enabled
...
...
...
Example 2 The following example sets the logging level for the card module to
information:
zSH> syslog level card info
Module: card at level: information

S
Example 3 The following example shows how to configure what information to include
in syslog messages.
zSH> syslog option all on
time:date:level:address:log:taskname:taskid:file:function
:line:(0xff)
Example 4 To return the log messages to their default format, enter the following
command:
zSH> syslog option default on
time: date: level: address: log: taskname: (0xf)
Example 5 The following example configures the log cache size:
zSH> syslog cache max 200

Maximum number of log messages that can be saved: 200
Example 6 following example searches through the log cache for the word “IMA”:
zSH> syslog cache grep IMA

Searching for: "IMA"
tLineAlarm: 01:02:02 Critical IMA Down Line
tLineAlarm: 01:02:02 Critical IMA Up Line
Access Level user

100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also log
systemreboot
Resets the system. When you reset a system, all connections are dropped.
Syntax systemreboot
Access Level admin
100A, Z-Edge 64
See Also shelfreboot
systemrpshow
Displays general information about the system, including memory and flash
usage.
Syntax systemrpshow
Example

Commands
zSH> systemrpshow
System RP Info:
RP Address.........................01:02:98
% Memory used......................87.16
% Flash used.......................10.04
Access Level admin

T
telnet
Initiates an outbound telnet session.

Syntax telnet host
Options host
The hostname or IP address to telnet to.
thermoshow
The thermoshow command returns temperature information about the

system. The system has two thermometers. From the front of the unit,
thermometer 1 is located to the right of the MPC750 microprocessor, and
thermometer 2 is located on the right side of the system circuit board.
Syntax thermoshow
Example The example below shows the system response to the command.
zSH> thermoshow
THERMO1:
Temperature : 24 C
High Threshold : 65
Low Threshold : -5
THERMO2:
Temperature : 29 C
High Threshold : 60
Low Threshold : -5
timeout
Specifies a the period of inactivity after which administrative telnet sessions

will be automatically disconnected. The default time out is set to 10 minutes.
Syntax timeout [ -d | off | minutes ]

T
Options off
Disables the timer.
-d
Resets the timer to the default value of 10 minutes.
minutes
Specifies the timeout period in minutes.
Notes The time-out values persists across resets.
100A, Z-Edge 64
traceroute
The traceroute command uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)

echo and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to determine the path between two
network hosts.
The value of the Time To Live (TTL) field in the IP header is set when the IP
packet is sent. Each router that processes the datagram reduces the TTL value
by one. When a router receives a TTL with a 0 (zero) or one (1) value, it
discards the datagram and sends a time exceeded message to the originating
host.
The traceroute command sends an IP datagram with a TTL value of one (1)
to the destination host. The first router discards the datagram and sends the
time exceeded message back to the originator. This identifies the first router
along the route. This process is repeated using incrementally higher TTL
values until all of the routers are identified. When the datagram reaches the
destination host, the host recognizes that the packet is for an unused port, and
generates a port unreachable error.
Syntax traceroute [-I] [-f first_ttl] [-i shelf/slot/port/
subport/type] [-m max_ttl] [-p port] [-q nqueries] [-s
src_addr] [-w waittime] [ -z pausemsecs] host [packetlen]
Options -I
Use ICMP ECHO instead of UDP datagrams.
-f first_ttl
Sets the initial TTL used in the first outgoing probe packet. The default is
one (1).
-i shelf-slot-port-subport-type
Specifies a network interface to obtain the source IP address for outgoing
packets. This option is not currently supported.
-m max_ttl
Sets the maximum time-to-live (number of hops) to be used in outgoing
probe packets. The default is 30 hops.

Commands
-p port
Sets the base UDP port number used in probes. The default is 33434.
-q nqueries
The number of probes sent to each ttl setting.
-s src_addr
Tells the system to use the following IP address (which usually is given as
an IP number, not a hostname) as the source address in outgoing probe
packets. This option is used with hosts that have more than one IP address
to force the source address to be other than the IP address of the interface
that the probe packet is sent on.
-w waittime
Sets the time, in seconds, to wait for a response to a probe. The default is
5 seconds.
-z pausemsecs
Sets the time, in milliseconds, to pause between probes. The default is 0
(zero).
host
The destination host name or IP address in dotted quad format.
packetlen
The packet length, in bytes, of the probe datagram. The default is 40
bytes.
Example The following example traces a route to a host with an IP address of
192.16.41.218, which is four routers away from the originating host.
zSH> traceroute 192.16.41.218
traceroute to 192.16.41.218 (192.16.41.218), 30 hops max,
40 byte packets
1 192.16.92.254 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
2 192.16.252.121 64 ms 64 ms 64 ms
3 192.16.3.254 64 ms 64 ms 64 ms
4 192.16.41.218 64 ms * *
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
U
update
The update command changes an existing record.

Syntax update profile-type index
The type of profile to update.

U
index
of the form shelf-slot-port-subport-interface/type. Other records, such as
subscriber records, use an index of the form n, where n is an integer.
Example The following example updates the system profile:
zSH> update system 0

syscontact: ----------> {Zhone Global Services and Support 7001 Oakport Road
Oakland Ca. (877) Zhone20 (946-6320) Fax (510)777-7113 support@zhone.com}:
sysname: -------------> {BAN-2000}:
syslocation: ---------> {Oakland}:
enableauthtraps: -----> {disabled}: enabled
setserialno: ---------> {0}:
zmsexists: -----------> {false}:
zmsconnectionstatus: -> {inactive}:
zmsipaddress: --------> {0.0.0.0}:
configsyncexists: ----> {false}:
configsyncoverflow: --> {false}:
configsyncpriority: --> {high}:
configsyncaction: ----> {noaction}:
configsyncfilename: --> {}:
configsyncstatus: ----> {syncinitializing}:
configsyncuser: ------> {}:
configsyncpasswd: ----> {}:
numshelves: ----------> {1}:
shelvesarray: --------> {}:
numcards: ------------> {3}:
ipaddress: -----------> {0.0.0.0}: 192.168.8.21
alternateipaddress: --> {0.0.0.0}:
countryregion: -------> {unknown}:
primaryclocksource: --> {0/0/0/0/0}:
ringsource: -----------> {internalringsourcelabel}:
revertiveclocksource: -> {true}:
voicebandwidthcheck: --> {false}:
....................
Record updated.
Access Level admin

100A, Z-Edge 64
updateuser
Updates access levels for a user.

Syntax updateuser username
Example zSH> updateuser jjsmith
Updating access levels for user (jjsmith)

Commands
admin: -------> {yes}: no

zhonedebug: --> {no}:
voice: -------> {no}:
data: --------> {no}:
manuf: -------> {no}:
database: ----> {no}:
systems: -----> {no}:
tool: --------> {no}:
useradmin: ---> {yes}:
User record updated.

100A, Z-Edge 64
V
verbose-restore-off

Syntax N/A
verbose-restore-on

Syntax N/A
voice
The voice command can add, delete, or show voice connections. The
following types of voice connections are supported:
• POTS to AAL2, DS1, GR303,V5.2, or VOIP
• ISDN to AAL2 or V5.2
Syntax voice add subscriber-endpoint remote-endpoint [sub descr]

[enable]
add
Add a voice connection between subscriber-endpoint and
remote-endpoint.
subscriber-endpoint

V
Name and type of the physical interface on the subscriber’s side of the
voice connection. Values:
pots interface [alaw|mulaw]
isdn interface
aal2 interface vp|vc VPI/VCI [td Tx/Rx] cid CID [alaw | mulaw] [aud
aud-prf-id] [ap pref-ap-id]
elcp interface vp|vc VPI/VCI [td Tx/Rx] port port [alaw|mulaw] [aud
aud-prf-id] [ap pref-ap-id]
voip IPinterface dn directory-number [name username] [pw
<password>] [plar <dest-ipaddr>]
interface is the physical interface in format name/type.
IPinterface is the IP interface name with the type ip.
For GR-303, the interface group must already exist.
For V5.2, the V5.2 interface group must already exist.
For ATM interfaces, the VPI/VCI, the CID, and the traffic descriptor must
exist. The voice add command will automatically create the VCL if it
does not exist.
For VOIP, the IP interface must already exist.
remote-endpoint
Name and type of the physical interface on the remote side of the voice
connection. Values:
gr303 IG/CRV
v52 IG/userport type type [cpath cpath]
aal2 physicalIF vc vpi/vci cid cid [aud aud-prf-id] [ap pref-ap-id]
voip IPinterface dn directory-number [name username] [pw password]
[plar dest-ipaddr]
isdnsig ID
ds1 interface ds0 channelnum
For GR-303 connections, the GR-303 IG must already exist.
For V5.2 connections, the V5.2 IG must already exist.
For VOIP connections, the IP interface must already exist.
For ATM interfaces, the VPI/VCI, the traffic descriptor, and the VCL
must exist; the voice add command will not create them.
alaw | mulaw
Indicates whether the voice connection uses Alaw or Mulaw companding.
This option sets the following parameters:

Commands
For POTS, the analog-if-cfg-profile profile pcmEncoding parameter.

For AAL2 (non-ISDN), the aal2-vcl-profile and aal2-cid-profile profile
pcmEncoding parameter.
sub
Adds a text description to the subscriber-voice profile.
enable
Sets the administrative status of the if-translate of the interface to ‘up’.
For ISDN voice connections, this parameter automatically sets the
following parameters for the voice connection:
• atm-vcl: vcc aal5 cpcs transmit and receive sdu size
• aal2-vcl-profile: timer-cu, frame-mode-data, cas, trunk-type,
pcm-encoding, and ras-timer
• aal2-cid-profile: frame-mode-data, cas, and pcm-encoding
Syntax voice delete subscriber-endpoint

delete
Delete the voice connection from subscriber subscr-info.
subscriber-endpoint
Name and type of the physical voice connection.
Syntax voice show

show
Displays the voice connections on the system. For V5.2 voice
connections, also displays POTS or ISDN connection type. For AAL2
voice connections, also displays VP for VP-switched or VC for
VC-switched.
Example 1 This example adds a voice connection from subscriber’s POTS line to a
GR-303 interface with IG 1 and CRV 45.
zSH> voice add pots 1-4-5-0/voicefxs gr303 1/45
Example 2 This example displays the voice connections currently configured on the
system:
zSH> voice show
Subscriber end-point Remote end-point Voice Prof Id STA
------------------------------ ------------------------------ -------------- ---
1-1-1-0/voicefxs 1-1-1-0/fast VC 0/38 CID 16 1/12/1 ENA
1-1-2-0/voicefxs 1-1-1-0/fast VC 0/38 CID 17 1/12/2 ENA
Total number of voice connections : 2
Example 3 This example adds a POTS to AAL2 connection over an ATM VCL with a
VPI/VCI of 0/38 and a CID of 16:
zSH> voice add pots 1-1-1-0/voicefxs aal2 1-1-1-0/adsl vc 0/38 cid 16
Created subscriber 1/12
Created subscriber-voice 1/12/1
Created subscriber-voice-pots 7

V
Created aal2-cid-profile 13/0/38/16

Created subscriber-voice-aal2 8
Example 4 This example deletes a POTS subscriber profile:
zSH> voice delete pots 1-1-1-0/voicefxs

Deleted aal2-cid-profile 13/0/38/16
Deleted subscriber-voice 1/12/1 and its

subscriber-voice-xxx profiles
Example 5 This example creates a POTS to VOIP subscriber profile:
zSH> voice add pots 1-1-3-0/voicefxs voip 1-1-1-0/ip DN 5105220428

Created subscriber-voice-voip 1005
Example 6 This example creates a VOIP to ISDN subscriber profile:
zSH> voice add voip 1-1-1-0/ip DN 1055558724 isdnsig 1

Created subscriber-voice-voip 1024
Created subscriber-voice-isdnsig 1025
Example 7 This example creates a POTS to GR303 subscriber profile with IG 1 and CRV
2:
zSH> voice add pots 1-8-1-0/voicefxs gr303 1/2
Created gr303-ig-crv 1/2
Created subscriber-voice-gr303 21
Example 8 This example creates an AAL2 to GR303 VP-switched connection between

the uplink interface uplink1 and the voice gateway card:
zSH> voice add atm uplink1/atm vp 0/101 td 1/1 cid 1 alaw
gr303 1/1 type pots
Created aal2-cid 109/16/101/1/1
Created gr303-cid 1/1/2
Example 9 This example creates an ELCP to V5.2 VP-switched connection between the
uplink interface uplink2 nd the voice gateway card:
zSH> voice add elcp uplink2/atm vc 7/111 td 1/1 port 1
alaw v52 1/0
type isdn cpath 5
Created atm-vcl uplink2/atm/7/111

Commands
Created atm-vcl 1-3-3-0-aal2proxy/atm/0/32

Created atm-cc 8
Created aal2-vcl-profile 1-3-3-0-aal2proxy/atm/0/32
Created aal2-elcp-port 109/0/32/1/2
Created subscriber-voice-elcp-aal2 39
Created v52-user-port 1/0/3
Created subscriber-voice-v52 40
Access Level admin
voice vpdelete
The voice vpdelete command deletes the specified VP tunnel between the
uplink interface and the voice gateway card.
Syntax voice vpdelete interface vpi

interface
Specifies the uplink card interface.
vpi
Specifies the VPI to be deleted.
Example This command deletes the VP tunnel for VP 0 between the uplink interface
and the voice gateway card.
zSH>voice uplink/atm 0
Access Level admin
voice vpiadd
The voice vpiadd command builds the ATM VPI between the uplink card and
the voice gateway card aal2proxy on the specified VP. This command is used
for VP-switched connections
Syntax voice vpiadd interface vpi gr303|v52 ig MaximumVcis

interface
vpi
The VPI to be used for this connection.
gr303 | v52
Indicates whether the voice connection connects to a GR-303 or V5.2
protocol switch.

V
ig
Specifies the interface group (IG) to be used for this connection.
For V5.2 and GR-303, the IG must already exist.
MaximumVcis
Specifies the maximum number of VCIs to be used for this VP-switched
connection.
Example This example uses the uplink interface uplink/atm with VP 0. The voice call
type is V5.2 with IG 1. The maximum number of VCs allocated to the
specified VP-switched VPI is 2004.
zSH>voice vpiadd uplink/atm 0 v52 1 2004
Created atm-vpi 1-3-3-0-aal2proxy/atm/20
Created atm-vpi uplink1/atm/7
Access Level admin
voice vpladd
The voice vpladd command builds the VPLs and cross connects for
VP-switched connections. This command applies to the voice gateway card
only.
Syntax voice vpladd interface vpi td rx/rx gr303|v52 ig

interface
vpi
The VPI to be used for this connection.
td rx/tx
The receive and transmit traffic descriptors to be used for this connection.
gr303 | v52
Indicates whether the voice connection connects to a GR-303 or V5.2
protocol switch:
ig
Specifies the interface group (IG) to be used for this connection.
The IG must already exist.
Example This command builds atm-vpl uplink1/atm/0 on the uplink card using traffic
descriptor 1/1 and atm-vpl 1-3-3-0-aal2proxy/atm/16 on the voice gateway
card. VP 16 is the first available VP in the allowed VP range on the voice
gateway card. The ATM cross connect number is 6.
zSH>voice vpladd uplink/atm 0 td 1/1 v52 1
Created atm-vpl 1-3-3-0-aal2proxy/atm/20
Created atm-vpl uplink1/atm/7
Created atm-cc 6
Access Level admin

Commands
voicegateway
The voicegateway command can add, show. or delete voicegateway

connections. The following types of voice connections are supported:
• VoATM: BLES to GR303 or V5.2
• VoATM: ELCP to V5.2
• VoIP: SIP-PLAR to GR303 or V5.2
Syntax voicegateway add [-v] interface td traffic-descriptor

ip-address
add
Add a voice gateway connection for the specified AAL5 proxy physical
interface, traffic descriptor, and IP address.
interface
A valid AAL5 proxy physical interface.
traffic-descriptor
The desired traffic descriptor.
ip-address
The IP address that is part of the configured ip-unnumbered-record.
Syntax voicegateway delete interface

interface
Syntax voicegateway show interface

interface
Example 1 This example adds a host on the voicegateway line card in slot 8 and assigns
the IP address 10.10.10.2.
zSH> voicegateway add 1-8-1-0/aal5proxy td1 10.10.10.2
Example 2 This example displays the voicegateway connection for the specified interface
and AAL5 proxy:
zSH> voicegateway show 1-8-1-0/aal5proxy
Rd/Address Interface Group T Host Address
-----------------------------------------------------
1 10.10.10.1 1-8-1-0-aal5proxy-0-32 0/32 0 S 10.10.10.2
Example 3 This example adds an ATM voice interface on the uplink card in slot 1, port 1
and assigns the virtual connection vpi 0, vci 139 and cid 48. The TDM
connection uses GR303 protocol and interface group 1 with crv 131.
zSH> voice add aal2 1-1-1-0/ds1 vc 0/139 cid 48 gr303 1/131

V
Created aal2-cid-profile 340/0/32/48

Created gr303-ig-crv 1/131
Example 4 This example displays the voicegateway connection for the configured ATM
interface:
zSH> voicegateway show aal2 1-1-1-0/ds1
Subscriber end-point Remote end-point Voice Prof Id STA
----------------------- -------------------- ------------ ---
.......................
1-1-1-0/ds1 VC 0/139 CID 48 GR303 one/131 1/266/6 ENA
Example 5 This example deletes the voicegateway connection for the configured
interface 1-8-1-0/aal5proxy. To remove the configured voice gateway
connection, use the voicegateway delete command. Do not attempt to
manually remove or edit the related subscriber-voice profiles.
zSH>voicegateway delete 1-8-1-0/aal5proxy
Access Level admin
voicestat
The voicestat command displays the following statistics for voice

connections.:
• POTS port
– Incoming Calls Completed
– Incoming Calls Blocked
– Outgoing Calls Completed
– Outgoing Calls Blocked
– Active Calls
• SIP UA/MGCP
– Active Calls
• Card and System Call Statistics

Commands

– Active Calls
Syntax voicestat type [shelf slot] | [subscriber endpoint index]

Type
Specifies voice statistics to be displayed for system, card, or subscriber.
Shelf
For card type, enter the shelf number of the card.
Slot
For card type, enter the slot number of the card.
Subscriber endpoint index
End point index for a subscriber. The subscriber endpoint index can be
displayed using the list subscriber-voice command.
Example 1 This example displays voice statistics for the current system.
zSH> voicestat system

zSH> ******* Voice stats ********
Incoming blocked 0
Incoming completed 0
Outgoing blocked 0
Outgoing completed 0
Active calls 5
Example 2 This example displays voice statistics for the card in shelf 1 and slot 8.
zSH> voicestat card 1 8

zSH> ******* Voice stats ********
Incoming blocked 0
Outgoing blocked 0
Active calls 5
Example 3 This example displays voice statistics for specified POTS subscriber with
index 3. Use the list subscriber-voice commands to list the current POTS
voice subscribers and the subscriber index numbers.
zSH> list subscriber-voice-pots
4 entries found.
zSH> voicestat subscriber 3

******* Subscriber Voice Stats ********
Incoming blocked 0
Outgoing blocked 0

W
Active calls 0
Access Level admin
W
who
Displays the names of all users currently logged into the system.
Syntax who
Access Level user
100A, Z-Edge 64
whoami
Displays the username of the current session.

Syntax whoami
Access Level user
100A, Z-Edge 64
Z
zrgconfig
For the ZRG 800 series devices, the zrgcfg command is used to assign the
VPI to be used for the ATM connections. If you are connecting to a MALC
PON OLT card, each BAN connected must have a unique VPI/VCI pair.
(BAN devices connected to different PON OLT cards can use the same VPI/
VCI.) You can assign a VPI from 1 to 32.
Syntax zrg
Example To have the BAN autocreate the necessary voice, data, and video profiles
using VPI 1, enter the following command:
zSH> zrgcfg pon 1

Commands

ALPHABETIC LIST OF PARAMETERS
access-table-index.......................................... 320 atmVplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex................183

accm-enable ................................................... 293 audio-profile-identifier ...................................184
acfc-enable..................................................... 293 audio-service ..................................................184
ackedseqno..................................................... 364 audio-service ..................................................251
addr ................................................................ 279 auth-key..........................................................307
admin_status .................................................. 181 auth-type.........................................................307
admin-state..................................................... 307 auto-learn........................................................292
admin-status................................................... 181 autoNegCap....................................................254
admin-status................................................... 203 autonegstatus ..................................................255
adminstatus .................................................... 254 bcastaddr ........................................................279
adminStatus.................................................... 265 bcastenabled ...................................................279
adminStatus.................................................... 271 betaValue........................................................277
admin-status................................................... 333 block (V5.2 link) ............................................334
admin-status-enable ....................................... 204 block (V5.2 user port) ....................................334
adslAlarmConfProfile.................................... 169 bootfile ...........................................................216
adslChannelMode .......................................... 169 boot-server......................................................216
adslLineDTMConfMode .............................. 169 bridgeConfigType ..........................................199
adslMaxDownstreamToneIndex.................... 170 bridgeConfigValue .........................................199
adslMaxUpstreamToneIndex......................... 170 bridgeIfConfigGroupIndex ............................199
adslMinDownstreamToneIndex .................... 170 bridgeIfCustomDHCP....................................200
adslMinUpstreamToneIndex ......................... 170 buf-max-size...................................................211
adslNTRModeEnabled .................................. 171 cac-divider......................................................185
adslPotsBypassRelayMaxDuration................ 171 callback-dial-string.........................................294
AdslTransmissionMode................................. 171 callback-enable...............................................294
AdslTrellisModeEnabled............................... 171 callback-type ..................................................294
algorithm........................................................ 181 call-mode........................................................295
alphaValue ..................................................... 277 capable-line-rate-limit ....................................328
alternateipaddress .......................................... 279 card-atm-configuration...................................204
app-id ............................................................. 182 card-group-id..................................................204
apsChanConfigAdminStatus.......................... 322 card-line-type .................................................206
apsChanConfigGroupName........................... 322 cas...................................................................185
apsChanConfigNumber ................................. 322 cas...................................................................211
apsChanConfigPriority .................................. 322 cc-index ..........................................................185
apsConfigCreationTime................................. 323 cell-loss-integration-period ............................212
apsConfigDirection........................................ 323 cell-scramble ..................................................231
apsConfigExtraTraffic ................................... 323 channelization ................................................232
apsConfigMode.............................................. 323 channelization ................................................239
apsConfigRevert ............................................ 323 channel-number..............................................265
apsConfigsdBerThreshold ............................. 324 chap-enable ....................................................295
apsConfigsfBerThreshold .............................. 324 chap-name ......................................................295
apsConfigWaitToRestore .............................. 324 chap-secret......................................................295
atmVplAdminStatus ...................................... 182 check-id ..........................................................335
atmVplCastType ............................................ 183 circuit-id .........................................................232
atmVplConnKind........................................... 183 circuit-id .........................................................240
atmVplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex................. 183 client-hostname ..............................................216
CLI Reference Guide 161

client-identifier .............................................. 216 ds0-channel-id ................................................346
client-match-length ........................................ 217 ds1-for-remote-loop .......................................240
client-match-offset......................................... 217 ds1-group-number ..........................................233
client-match-string......................................... 217 ds1-line-group ................................................346
clksrc.............................................................. 256 ds1LM:array[1..28] ........................................266
clock-external-recovery ................................. 324 ds1-mode ........................................................233
clock-source-eligible...................................... 232 dsn-lg-id .........................................................335
clock-transmit-source .................................... 213 dsx-line-length................................................234
clock-transmit-source .................................... 325 echo-cancellation-type ...................................347
community-name ........................................... 320 echo-return-loss..............................................348
comp-slot-id................................................... 296 egressfilterid ...................................................280
config-line-rate .............................................. 245 enable .............................................................280
connect-mode................................................. 246 enableauthtraps...............................................330
control-channel-t303...................................... 265 ends ................................................................220
control-channel-t396...................................... 265 expires-invite-value........................................348
coset-polynomial............................................ 233 expires-register-method..................................349
countryregion................................................. 330 expires-register-value .....................................348
c-path-valid-flag ............................................ 335 external-server................................................220
csu-line-length ............................................... 233 farendaddr ......................................................281
ctrlChannel..................................................... 266 far-end-equip-code .........................................240
customARP .................................................... 200 far-end-fac-id-code.........................................240
data-access ..................................................... 362 far-end-frame-id-code ....................................241
database-access .............................................. 362 far-end-loc-id-code.........................................241
debug access .................................................. 362 far-end-unit-code............................................241
decoder-coeffA .............................................. 246 fastMaxTxRate ...............................................172
decoder-coeffB .............................................. 247 fastMinTxRate................................................173
defaultLease................................................... 217 fault-detection-type ........................................185
default-lease-time .......................................... 218 fcs-alt-enable ..................................................296
default-metric................................................. 308 fcs-size............................................................296
default-router ................................................. 218 fdl ...................................................................234
destaddr.......................................................... 280 features ...........................................................349
destination-ip-address .................................... 212 filterBroadcast ................................................200
destination-name............................................ 347 first-nameserver..............................................230
destination-port .............................................. 212 fix-bit-rate ......................................................247
dhcp................................................................ 218 flags ................................................................220
dhcpClientErrors............................................ 218 forwardToDefault...........................................201
dhcpClientId .................................................. 219 forwardToMulticast........................................201
dhcpserverenable ........................................... 280 forwardToUnicast ..........................................201
dialplan-type .................................................. 347 frame-mode-data ............................................186
diffDelayMax................................................. 276 framer-type .....................................................247
directory-number ........................................... 347 frames-per-packet...........................................349
dns.................................................................. 219 frame-sync-word ............................................247
dns-fwd-name ................................................ 219 frame-type ......................................................296
dns-rev-name ................................................. 219 fxo-cfg-signal-type .........................................259
domain ........................................................... 219 g711-fallback..................................................349
domain ........................................................... 229 g726-byte-order..............................................350
domainName.................................................. 219 gammaValue ..................................................277
domain-name ................................................. 220 groupSymmetry..............................................274
downshiftSnrMgn .......................................... 172 guaranteed-bw ................................................292
ds0-bundle...................................................... 212 hardware-address............................................221
162 CLI Reference Guide

high-if-index .................................................. 186 ip-ifindex ........................................................298
high-vci .......................................................... 186 ip-interface-index ...........................................351
high-vpi.......................................................... 186 ip-tos...............................................................351
hold-active ..................................................... 208 ipUnnumberedinterface..................................282
hookflash-max-timer...................................... 350 isdn-channel-id ...............................................251
hookflash-min-timer ...................................... 350 isdnds-cpath-id ...............................................286
hostalias1 ....................................................... 230 isdnds-cpath-id ...............................................336
hostalias2 ....................................................... 230 isdn-env-func-start-address ............................286
hostalias3 ....................................................... 230 isdn-env-func-start-address ............................336
hostalias4 ....................................................... 230 isdnf-cpath-id .................................................337
hostName ....................................................... 221 isdnp-cpath-id.................................................337
hostname ........................................................ 230 jitter-buffer-size..............................................352
huntgroup....................................................... 350 jitter-buffer-type .............................................352
hunt-group-index ........................................... 350 learnIP ............................................................201
iad-type .......................................................... 328 learnMulticast.................................................202
id (V5.2 link) ................................................. 336 learnUnicast....................................................202
id (V5.2 path) ................................................ 336 lease-time .......................................................222
idt-admin-state ............................................... 266 lgid..................................................................298
if-cfg-impedence............................................ 260 line-code .........................................................235
if-cfg-pcm-encoding ...................................... 260 line-coding......................................................241
if-cfg-receive-tlp ............................................ 261 line-group-id...................................................252
if-cfg-receive-tlpNum .................................... 262 line-group-id...................................................287
if-cfg-transmit-tlp .......................................... 262 line-group-id...................................................328
if-cfg-transmit-tlpNum .................................. 262 line-length-meters ..........................................242
if-cfg-trunk-conditioning ............................... 260 line-power ......................................................235
ifindex ............................................................ 272 line-rate-limit..................................................328
ifIndex............................................................ 288 line-status-change-trap-enable .......................235
if-maintenance-mode ..................................... 260 line-status-trap-enable ....................................242
ifname ............................................................ 272 line-status-trap-enable ....................................248
ifType............................................................. 256 line-type..........................................................236
iftype-extension ............................................. 272 line-type..........................................................242
inbound-calls.................................................. 336 line-type..........................................................248
ingressfilterid ................................................. 281 link-is-timer....................................................337
initFailureTrapEnable .................................... 173 link-oos-timer .................................................337
initial-mru ...................................................... 297 link-type .........................................................298
inter-arriv-jit-threshold .................................. 351 link-valid-flag.................................................337
interdigit-timeout ........................................... 351 local-admin-state ............................................266
interleaveMaxTxRate .................................... 173 local-interface-id ............................................338
interleaveMinTxRate ..................................... 174 local-ipaddr ....................................................282
ipaddr1 ........................................................... 221 local-port ........................................................282
ipaddr2 ........................................................... 221 local-prov-variant ...........................................338
ipaddr3 ........................................................... 222 local-timezone ................................................290
ipaddr4 ........................................................... 222 logical-channel-id (C-channel).......................338
ipaddrdynamic ............................................... 281 logical-channel-id (C-path) ............................338
ip-addr-enable ................................................ 297 logical-id ........................................................266
ipaddress ........................................................ 230 loopback-config..............................................236
ip-address....................................................... 320 loopback-config..............................................243
ipaddress ........................................................ 330 low-if-index....................................................186
ip-comp-protocol ........................................... 297 low-vci............................................................187
ipfwdenabled.................................................. 281 low-vpi ...........................................................187

lqr-period ....................................................... 298 minNumRxLinks............................................275
lqr-status ........................................................ 299 minNumTxLinks ............................................275
magic-number ................................................ 299 minSnrMgn ....................................................176
magic-number-enable .................................... 299 minUpshiftSnrMgn ........................................176
malicious-caller-uri........................................ 353 min-uui ...........................................................223
manuf-access.................................................. 330 mode ...............................................................346
match-string ................................................... 353 mru .................................................................283
mauType ........................................................ 257 mru-enable......................................................302
max-cid-for-aal2-user-channels..................... 187 multicastAgingPeriod.....................................283
max-config-retries.......................................... 300 n200................................................................339
max-cps-sdu-size ........................................... 187 n201................................................................339
max-fail-retries .............................................. 301 name ...............................................................208
max-failure-retries ......................................... 300 name ...............................................................223
maximum-bw................................................. 293 name ...............................................................329
maxInterleaveDelay....................................... 174 name-group-id ................................................329
max-lease-time............................................... 222 name-id...........................................................267
max-length-frame .......................................... 187 natenabled ......................................................284
max-length-frame .......................................... 252 national-pstn-region .......................................339
max-number-multiplex-channels................... 187 netmask ..........................................................224
max-outstanding-frames ................................ 339 netmask ..........................................................284
max-pad ......................................................... 300 network...........................................................224
max-sdu-length .............................................. 188 ntr ...................................................................249
max-sdu-length .............................................. 252 number-of-digits.............................................353
max-slot-id..................................................... 301 numcards ........................................................330
maxSnrMgn ................................................... 175 num-channels .................................................302
max-terminate-retries..................................... 301 num-mode-enable...........................................302
max-term-retries ............................................ 301 numshelves .....................................................331
maxUnicast .................................................... 202 numunits .........................................................273
max-uui .......................................................... 222 olt-onu-password............................................293
maxVideoStreams.......................................... 282 olt-onu-serial-num..........................................293
mcastcontrollist.............................................. 282 pap-enable ......................................................299
mcastenabled.................................................. 282 pap-password..................................................302
mcastfwdenabled ........................................... 283 pap-peer-id .....................................................303
medium-atmframe-config .............................. 243 partial-fill........................................................212
medium-cell-scramble-config........................ 325 path-current-width..........................................328
medium-cell-scramble-config........................ 327 pcm-encoding .................................................188
medium-circuit-identifier............................... 325 pcm-encoding .................................................252
medium-frame-config .................................... 243 permissions.....................................................331
medium-line-coding....................................... 326 pfc-enable .......................................................303
medium-line-scramble-config........................ 326 physical-flag ...................................................273
medium-line-type........................................... 326 pkts-lost-threshold..........................................353
medium-loopback-config............................... 326 pkt-time ..........................................................188
medium-scramble-config............................... 244 pointtopoint ....................................................249
medium-type .................................................. 327 poison .............................................................308
metric ............................................................. 283 port .................................................................273
min-cid-for-aal2-user-channels...................... 188 port-alignment-request ...................................339
minDownshiftSnrMgn ................................... 175 port-id .............................................................252
minDownshiftTime........................................ 175 port-type .........................................................252
minLease........................................................ 223 portType .........................................................284
min-lease-time ............................................... 223 power-scale ....................................................249

preferred-ap-index ......................................... 188 reserve-start ....................................................226
preferred-ap-index ......................................... 253 restart..............................................................227
preferred-codec .............................................. 353 restart..............................................................258
prefix-add....................................................... 354 restart-timer ....................................................304
prefix-strip ..................................................... 354 restart-timer ....................................................305
primaryclocksource........................................ 214 reversion-mode...............................................259
primaryclocksource........................................ 331 revertiveclocksource ......................................214
primary-name-server...................................... 224 revertiveclocksource ......................................332
primary-ntp-server-ip-address ....................... 289 ring-back ........................................................263
protection-fast-timer ...................................... 258 ring-frequency ................................................263
protection-group ............................................ 340 ringSource ......................................................288
protection-slow-timer .................................... 258 ringsource .......................................................332
protection-wtr ................................................ 258 role..................................................................267
protocol .......................................................... 354 role..................................................................341
protocol-emulation......................................... 237 rs232AsyncPortAutobaud ..............................313
protocol-spec.................................................. 340 rs232AsyncPortBits........................................312
prov-variant-request....................................... 341 rs232AsyncPortParity ....................................312
pstn-layer-3-start-address .............................. 341 rs232AsyncPortStopBits ................................312
public-ipaddr.................................................. 284 rs232PortInFlowType ....................................311
public-port...................................................... 284 rs232PortInSpeed ...........................................311
quality-protocol.............................................. 303 rs232PortOutFlowType..................................312
query-order .................................................... 231 rs232PortOutSpeed ........................................311
range1-end ..................................................... 224 rtcp-enabled....................................................355
range1-start .................................................... 225 rtcp-packet-interval ........................................355
range2-end ..................................................... 225 rx-acc-map......................................................304
range2-start .................................................... 225 rxTimingRefLink ...........................................279
range3-end ..................................................... 225 sapi-0-max-outstanding-frames......................268
range3-start .................................................... 225 sapi-0-n-200 ...................................................268
range4-end ..................................................... 226 sapi-0-pps-mode .............................................268
range4-start .................................................... 226 sapi-0-t-200 ....................................................268
ras-timer......................................................... 189 sapi-0-t-203 ....................................................269
rateChanRatio ................................................ 176 sapi-1-max-outstanding-frames......................269
rateMode ........................................................ 176 sapi-1-n-200 ...................................................269
rdindex ........................................................... 285 sapi-1-pps-mode .............................................269
rdt-admin-state............................................... 267 sapi-1-t-200 ....................................................270
reachExtendedAdsl2 ...................................... 177 sapi-1-t-203 ....................................................270
reasmmaxsize................................................. 285 sdp-enable ......................................................304
receive_traffic_descr_index........................... 189 sdu-multiples ..................................................189
receive-auth-enable........................................ 303 secondary-name-server ..................................227
receive-auth-protocol..................................... 305 secondary-ntp-server-ip-address ....................290
receive-type.................................................... 308 second-nameserver .........................................231
redundancy-over-subscription-type ............... 354 send-auth-enable ............................................305
redundancy-param1 ....................................... 273 send-auth-identity...........................................304
reg-or-lease-user ............................................ 341 send-auth-protocol..........................................305
reject-enabled................................................. 355 send-call-proceeding-tone ..............................355
remote-admin-state ........................................ 267 send-code........................................................237
remotefault..................................................... 258 send-code........................................................244
remotefault..................................................... 309 send-type ........................................................309
resendseqno.................................................... 364 sent-updates....................................................310
reserve-end..................................................... 226 service-provider-id .........................................329

setserialno ...................................................... 332 sysname ..........................................................333
shdsl-clock-offset........................................... 313 system-access .................................................333
shdsl-config-line-rate (2-wire G.SHDSL card)313 system-clock-eligibility .................................215
shdsl-config-line-rate (4-wire G.SHDSL card)314 system-clock-weight ......................................215
shdsl-decoder-coeffA/shdsl-decoder-coeffB . 315 system-domain-name .....................................356
shdsl-dsp-version ........................................... 315 t200.................................................................343
shdsl-firmware-version .................................. 315 t203.................................................................343
shdsl-fix-bit-rate ............................................ 315 targetSnrMgn..................................................177
shdsl-frame-sync............................................ 316 td_frame_discard............................................190
shdsl-ntr ......................................................... 316 td_index..........................................................190
shdsl-power-scale .......................................... 317 td_param1.......................................................191
shdsl-repeater-id ............................................ 317 td_param2.......................................................191
shdsl-standard ................................................ 317 td_param3.......................................................191
shdsl-startup-margin ...................................... 318 td_param4.......................................................191
shdsl-transmit-power-back-off-mode ............ 318 td_param5.......................................................191
shdsl-wire-mode ............................................ 318 td_service_category........................................192
shelf................................................................ 274 td_type............................................................192
shelf................................................................ 342 test_mode .......................................................289
shelvesarray ................................................... 332 testLinkIfIndex ...............................................277
signal-mode.................................................... 238 testPattern .......................................................278
signal-type...................................................... 239 testProcStatus .................................................278
signal-type...................................................... 263 tftp ..................................................................228
signal-type...................................................... 270 thermo-a-lower-threshold...............................319
silence-suppression-type................................ 356 thermo-a-upper-threshold...............................319
sip-ip-address................................................. 356 thermo-b-lower-threshold ..............................319
slot.................................................................. 274 thermo-b-upper-threshold ..............................319
source-ip-address ........................................... 213 third-nameserver ............................................231
source-port ..................................................... 213 thresh15min-badseq .......................................320
src-address ..................................................... 310 thresh15min-congestion .................................320
sroute-advertise.............................................. 310 thresh15MinESs .............................................178
sscs-type......................................................... 190 thresh15MinLofs ............................................178
starts............................................................... 227 thresh15MinLols ............................................178
startup-check-link-id...................................... 342 thresh15MinLoss............................................179
startup-unblock-user-ports............................. 342 thresh15MinLprs ............................................179
state ................................................................ 228 threshFastRateDown ......................................177
status .............................................................. 306 threshFastRateUp ...........................................179
stickyaddr....................................................... 227 threshInterleaveRateDown .............................180
StripAndInsert................................................ 202 threshInterleaveRateUp..................................180
stuff-bits......................................................... 250 threshold-15min-lofs ......................................250
subnetgroup.................................................... 228 threshold-15min-lols ......................................250
subnetgroup.................................................... 285 threshold-15min-loss......................................250
subport ........................................................... 274 timer-cu ..........................................................193
sw-enable ....................................................... 208 time-slot-index ...............................................343
sw-file-name .................................................. 209 tools-access ....................................................329
switch-type..................................................... 271 traffic-container-index....................................193
switch-vendor ................................................ 343 transmit_traffic_descr_index..........................193
sw-pri-load-server.......................................... 209 transmit-clock-source .....................................215
sw-upgrade-admin ......................................... 209 transmit-clock-source .....................................239
syscontact....................................................... 333 transmit-clock-source .....................................245
syslocation ..................................................... 333 transmit-power-back-off-mode ......................250

trapadminstatus .............................................. 321 version ............................................................229
trapdestination................................................ 321 version ............................................................311
traplevel ......................................................... 321 vlanId..............................................................203
traptype .......................................................... 321 vlanId..............................................................286
trnk-vcl-rate ................................................... 193 voice-aal2-cid .................................................356
trunk-type....................................................... 194 voice-aal2-line-group-id.................................357
tx-acc-map ..................................................... 306 voice-aal2-vci .................................................357
txClkMode ..................................................... 275 voice-aal2-vpi.................................................357
txFramLength ................................................ 276 voice-access....................................................357
txImaId........................................................... 276 voice-admin-status .........................................329
txTimingRefLink ........................................... 278 voicebandwidthcheck .....................................197
type ................................................................ 210 voice-connection-description .........................357
type ................................................................ 285 voice-connection-type ....................................253
type ................................................................ 344 voice-connection-type ....................................357
ulc-port-type .................................................. 287 voice-ebs-line-group-id ..................................358
ulc-trap-enable ............................................... 287 voice-endpoint1-addr-index ...........................359
unit-mode....................................................... 245 voice-endpoint2-addr-index ...........................359
unit-mode....................................................... 251 voice-ext-type.................................................359
unnumberedindex .......................................... 285 voice-GR303-ig-crv .......................................359
update-time .................................................... 310 voice-GR303-ig-name....................................359
upgrade-sw-file-name .................................... 210 voice-isdn-channel-id .....................................287
upgrade-vers .................................................. 210 voice-isdn-line-group-id.................................288
up-line-rate..................................................... 251 voice-isdn-port-type .......................................288
upperiftype..................................................... 286 voice-pots-line-group-id.................................264
upperlayer ...................................................... 286 voice-pots-line-group-id.................................360
upshiftSnrMgn ............................................... 180 voice-V52-interface-name..............................345
usage-parameter-control ................................ 194 voice-V52-isdn-channel-id.............................345
user-admin-access.......................................... 363 voice-V52-user-port-id...................................345
user-id ............................................................ 363 voice-V52-user-type.......................................345
user-name....................................................... 363 voip-password ................................................360
user-pass ........................................................ 363 voip-plar .........................................................360
user-prompt.................................................... 363 voip-plar-dest-ipaddr......................................360
us-max-const.................................................. 346 voip-plar-dest-ipaddrtype ...............................361
v52-c-channel:array[1..3] .............................. 344 voip-server-entry-index..................................361
v52-c-path:arrary[1..48]................................. 344 voip-udp-port..................................................361
v52-ig-lapv..................................................... 345 voip-username ................................................361
v52-link[1..16] ............................................... 345 vpi...................................................................198
vcc_aal_type .................................................. 195 vpi...................................................................203
vcc_aal5_encaps_type ................................... 194 vpi...................................................................213
vcc-i ............................................................... 195 vpi...................................................................306
vci .................................................................. 195 weight .............................................................210
vci .................................................................. 202 working-mode ................................................271
vci .................................................................. 213 wrap-config ....................................................259
vci .................................................................. 306 zhone-access...................................................364
vcl_cast_type ................................................. 195 zhoneAtmMaxVciPerVp................................198
vcl_conn_kind................................................ 195 zhoneAtmVpiMaxVci ....................................198
vcl-rate-params (1 through 32) ...................... 196 zhoneAtmVpiSwitched ..................................199
vendor-match-length...................................... 228 zhoneVoipServerAddr....................................361
vendor-match-offset....................................... 229 zhoneVoipServerAddrType ...........................362
vendor-match-string....................................... 229 zhoneVoipServerUdpPortNumber .................362

zmsconnectionstatus ...................................... 364
zmsexists........................................................ 365
zmsipaddress.................................................. 365

3
PARAMETERS
This chapter provides a reference to the Zhone CLI parameters.
ADSL
adslAlarmConfProfile
This parameter is used internally by the system.

Access This parameter is read-only.
Location adsl-profile
adslChannelMode
Specifies the channelization of the ADSL modem.

Values fastonly
No channelization, fast transmission mode.
interleavedonly
No channelization, interleaved transmission mode.
fastAndInterleaved
Unsupported.
fastOrInterleaved
Unsupported.
Default fastonly
Access This parameter is read-write.
Notes G.lite supports only interleaved mode.
adslLineDTMConfMode
Discrete Multi-Tone parameter that selects whether there is overlap

(echoCancel) or no overlap (freqDivMux) of bins.

Parameters
adslMaxDownstreamToneIndex
Specifies the maximum downstream active tone.

Values 32 (128KHz) to 511 (2044KHz)
Each value represents 4KHz.
Default 511
Notes • Changing this value causes the DSL modems to retrain.
• The parameter is only supported on single-slot ADSL (AC5) card
adslMaxUpstreamToneIndex
Specifies the maximum upstream active tone.

Default 30
adslMinDownstreamToneIndex
Specifies the minimum downstream active tone.

Default 32
adslMinUpstreamToneIndex
Specifies the minimum upstream active tone.

Default 6

ADSL

adslNTRModeEnabled
Enables or disables network timing recovery (NTR) mode.

Values true
NTR mode enabled.
false
NTR mode disabled.
Default true
adslPotsBypassRelayMaxDuration
The maximum duration in seconds that an ADSL POTS low-pass filter bypass
relay will remain active (closed). The relay will automatically return a line
back to normal (open) mode when this timer has expired.
Values 1 to 300
Default 60
Notes This object is only valid for MALC ADSL-SPLTR-32 cards.
This parameter can only be set from ZMS.
Products MALC
AdslTrellisModeEnabled
Enables or disables trellis mode on the ADSL interface.

Values true
false
Default true
AdslTransmissionMode
Specifies the line transmission mode for each ADSL line.

Parameters
Values autonegotiatemode
Automatically negotiates all supported transmission modes. The modem
uses the G.hs protocol to negotiate a transmission mode in this order:
T1.413, then G.dmt, then G.lite.
fullratemode
Automatically negotiates full-rate modes (G.dmt and T1 mode). G.dmt has
priority over T1 mode.
glitemode
The modem negotiates only G.lite mode.
t1mode
The modem negotiates only full-rate T1 mode. Use this value if the Zhone
device is connecting to full rate T1.413 issue 2 modems.
gdmtmode
The modem negotiates only G.dmt mode.
ghsmode
The modem negotiates only G.dmt and G.lite modes. G.dmt has priority
over G.lite.
adsl2Mode
the modem negotiates ADSL2 only. (Supported on ADSl 48 port cards
only).
adsl2PlusMode
the modem negotiates ADSL2+ only. (Supported on ADSl 48 port cards
only).
Default autonegotiate
downshiftSnrMgn
The configured signal-to-noise margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin
falls below this level, the modem attempts to decrease its transmit rate.
Values 0 to 310 (in tenths dBs)
Default 0
Location adsl-co-profile, adsl-cpe-profile
Notes If rate adaption is not enabled on the interface, this parameter is 0 (zero).
fastMaxTxRate
Configured maximum transmit rate (bps) for ADSL Fast channels.

ADSL
Values 8160Kbps (1536Kbps for G.Lite) downstream 896Kbps (512Kbps for

G.Lite) upstream, 12Mbps for S=1/2
Default 8160kbps
Notes fastMaxTxRate must be greater than fastMinTxRate.
fastMinTxRate
Minimum transmit rate (bps) for channels configured for fast transmission
mode.
Values 32Kbps to 8160Kbps (1536Kbps for G.Lite) downstream 32Kbps to
896Kbps (512Kbps for G.Lite) upstream
Default 0
Notes fastMinTxRate must be less than fastMaxTxRate.
See rateChanRatio for information regarding RADSL mode and ATUC
transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
initFailureTrapEnable
Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap.This trap controls whether line up or

line down traps are sent while the system is booting up.
Values enable
disable
Default disable
Location adsl-co-profile
interleaveMaxTxRate
Maximum transmit rate (bps) for channels configured for interleaved

transmission mode.
896Kbps (512Kbps for G.Lite) upstream, 12Mbps for S=1/2
Default 8160kbps

Parameters
Notes interleaveMaxTxRate must be greater than interleaveMinTxRate.

interleaveMinTxRate
Minimum transmit rate (bps) for channels configured for interleaved

transmission mode.
896Kbps (512Kbps for G.Lite) upstream
Default 0
Notes interleaveMinTxRate must be less than interleaveMaxTxRate.
maxInterleaveDelay
Maximum interleave delay for this channel. Interleave delay applies only to
the interleave channel and defines the mapping (relative spacing) between
subsequent input bytes at the interleaver input and their placement in the bit
stream at the interleaver output. Larger numbers provide greater separation
between consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream allowing for
improved impulse noise immunity, but at the expense of payload latency.
Values 0
0.5 ms
1
1 ms
2
2 ms
4
4 ms
8
8 ms
16
16 ms
32
32 ms
63
63 ms

ADSL
Default 0
maxSnrMgn
Maximum acceptable signal to noise margin. If the noise margin rises above
this level, the modem reduces its power output to optimize its operation.
Values 0 to 310 (in tenths dBs)
Default 310
minDownshiftSnrMgn
Minimum time that the current signal to noise margin is below

DownshiftSnrMgn before a rate downshift occurs.
Values 0 to 16383 seconds
Default 0
Location adsl-cpe-profile
Unsupported.
minDownshiftTime
Minimum time that the current margin is below DownshiftSnrMgn before a

downshift occurs.
Default 0
This parameter is not supported.

Parameters
minSnrMgn
Minimum acceptable signal-to-noise margin. If the noise margin falls below

this level, the modem attempts to increase its power output. If that is not
possible, the modem will attempt to reinitialize or shut down.
Values 0 to 310 tenths of dBs
Default 0
Location adsl-cpe-profile
minUpshiftSnrMgn
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn before an

upshift occurs.
Default 0
rateChanRatio
The percentage of excess bit rate that the ADSL modem will distribute to the
fast channel. The ratio is defined by the following formula:
[fastMinTxRate / (fastMinTxRate + interleaveMinTxRate)] x 100.
For example, a ratio of 50 percent means that 50 percent of the additional bit
rate (in excess of the fast minimum plus the interleaved minimum bit rate)
will be assigned to the fast channel, and 50 percent to the interleaved channel.
Values 50
Default 50
Notes See ADSL Forum TR-005 [3] for more information.
rateMode
The transmit rate adaptation configured on this modem.

ADSL
Values fixed
The rate is determined by the fastMaxTxRate or the
interleaveMaxTxRate. If the line is unable to support the specified line
rate, it fails to connect.
adaptatstartup
The rate is negotiated at startup and remains fixed. The modem speed is
determined by the fastMaxTxRate or interleaveMaxTxRate
parameters. If the line is able to support a higher rate, the rate above the
minimum is distributed between the fast and interleaved paths in the ratio
specified in the rateChanRatio parameter.
adaptatruntime
The rate is negotiated dynamically and can vary between the maximum
and minimum configured rates.
Default adaptatruntime
Notes See ADSL Forum TR-005 [3] for more information.
reachExtendedAdsl2
Enables and disables extended reach for ADSL2 long loops.

targetSnrMgn
Target signal to noise margin. This is the noise margin the modem must
achieve with a Bit Error Rate (BER) of 10-7 or better to successfully complete
initialization.
Default 0
threshFastRateDown
Applies to Fast channels only. The change in the configured rate that causes
the system to send an adslAturRateChangeTrap.
The system sends a trap whenever:
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this parameter.
Default 0

Parameters
0 disables the trap.

Location adsl-co-profile
thresh15MinESs
The number of Errored seconds encountered by an ADSL interface within any

given 15 minutes performance data collection period that will cause the
SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap (CO) or
adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap (CPE) trap. One trap is sent per interval per
interface.
Default 0
thresh15MinLofs
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface

within any given 15 minutes performance data collection period that will
cause the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap (CO) or
adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap (CPE) trap. One trap is sent per interval per
interface.
Default 0
thresh15MinLols
The number of Loss of Link seconds encountered by an ADSL interface

cause the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap (CO) or
adslAturPerfLolsThreshTrap (CPE) trap. One trap is sent per interval per
interface.
Default 0

ADSL
thresh15MinLoss
The number of Loss of Signal seconds encountered by an ADSL interface

cause the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap (CO) or
adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap (CPE) trap. One trap is sent per interval per
interface.
Default 0
thresh15MinLprs
The number of Loss of Power seconds encountered by an ADSL interface

cause the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap (CO) or
adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap (CPE) trap. One trap is sent per interval per
interface.
Default 0
threshFastRateUp
Applies to Fast channels only. The change in the configured rate that causes
the system to send an adslAtucRateChangeTrap.
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Values 0
Default 0

Parameters
threshInterleaveRateDown
Applies to Interleave channels only. The change in the configured rate that
causes the system to send an adslAtucRateChangeTrap.
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Values 0
Default 0
threshInterleaveRateUp
Applies to Interleave channels only. The change in the configured rate that
causes the system to send an adslAturRateChangeTrap. The system sends a
trap whenever: ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this
object.
Values 0
Default 0
upshiftSnrMgn
The configured signal to noise margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin
rises above this level, the modem attempts to increase its transmit rate.
Default 0
This parameter is not supported.

ATM
ATM
admin_status
Specifies the desired administrative state of the virtual channel link (VCL).
Values up
down
Default down
Location atm-vcl
Notes This parameter should be set to tell the system whether or not to establish the
connection.
The admin status must be set to down before changing or deleting VCLs.
admin-status
Administrative status of the link.

Values up
down
Default down
Location aal2-cid-profile, atm-cc
algorithm
The AAL2 encoding algorithm.

Values G.711
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM). Two encoding laws are recommended,
referred to as A-law and Mu-law.
G.722
Sub-Band Adaptive Pulse Code Modulation (SB-ADPCM).
G.723.1
Not currently supported.
G.726
Adaptive Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM).
G.727
Embedded Adaptive Pulse Code Modulation (EADPCM).
G.728
Low Delay Code Excited Linear Prediction (LD-CELP).
G.729-8
EDU format.

Parameters
G.729
Silence Insertion Descriptor (SID) packet format.
G.729-6.4
Encoding data unit format.
G.729-12
Encoding data unit format for the forward adaptive mode.
Generic SID
Generic SID packet format.
Default G.711
Location aal2-audio-profile
Notes Refer to STR-VMOA-LES-01-00 Annex A, I.366.1 7.7.1, and I.366.2 Annex
B through I for more information.
app-id
Application Identifier. It specifies the protocol used between the IAD and the
ATM switch.
Values caspotsonlynoelcp
Loop Emulation Service using Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)
without Emulated Loop Control Protocol (ELCP), which is used for
POTS.
dss1brionlynoelcp
Loop Emulation Service using Digital Subscriber Signaling System
number 1 (DSS1) in support of ISDN BRI without ELCP.
dss1brionlyelcp
Loop Emulation Service using Digital Subscriber Signaling System
number 1 (DSS1) in support of ISDN BRI with ELCP.
pstnpotsonlyelcp
Loop Emulation Service using PSTN signalling (POTS only) with ELCP.
Default caspotonlynoelcp
Location aal2-vcl-profile
atmVplAdminStatus
Administrative status of the VPL.

Values up
down
Default down
Location atm-vpl
Notes This parameter should be set to tell the system whether or not to establish the
connection.

ATM
The admin status must be set to down before changing or deleting VPLs.
atmVplCastType
Type of connection.
Values p2p
Point-to-point.
p2mproot
Point-to-multipoint root. Currently not supported.
p2mpleaf
Point-to-multipoint leaf. Supported for IP video connections only.
Location atm-vpl
atmVplConnKind
The type of VCL.

Values pvc
Location atm-vpl
atmVplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex
Specifies the ATM traffic descriptor which applies to the receive direction of
this VPL.
Values The index value of an existing atm-traf-descr.
Location atm-vpl
Notes Currently this value must be set equal to the value used for the
atmVplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex.
Traffic descriptors used in active VPLs cannot be modified. You must bring
down the VPL before you can modify the traffic descriptor.
See Also atmVplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex
atmVplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex
Specifies the ATM traffic descriptor which applies to the transmit direction of
this VPL.
Location atm-vpl
atmVplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex.
Traffic descriptors used in active VPLs cannot be modified. You must bring
down the VPL before you can modify the traffic descriptor.

Parameters
See Also atmVplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex
audio-profile-identifier
An index number that refers to the type of audio service provided.

Values 7
For PCM-64, ADPCM-32 and silence-suppression
(pcm64Adpcm32Silence). Supported on the BAN, MALC, Raptor,
Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge.
8
For PCM-64 and silence (pcm64Silence). Supported on the Sechtor
100A, Z-Edge.
9
For PCM-64 without silence (pcm64). Supported on the BAN, Sechtor
100A.
10
For PCM-64, ADPCM-32 without silence (pcm64Adpcm32). Supported
on the BAN, Sechtor 100A.
Notes For pre-defined audio profiles, the range of valid identifier values is 1 to 255,
inclusive. If the audio profile is user-defined, the range of valid identifiers is
256 to 512.
audio-service
The audio-service setting is inherited by the CIDs attached to the AAL2 VCL.
Values enabled
Audio services enabled, including echo cancellation, silence suppression,
and compression algorithms.
disabled
Audio services disabled. This is used for data and video calls.
enabledechocanceloff
Audio service enabled with echo cancellation and silence suppression
disabled.
enableddynamic
Audio service enabled with ability to dynamically disable silence
suppression, silence detection, echo cancellation, and compression
algorithms on a per-call basis.
Default enabled
Location aal2-vcl-profile, aal2-cid-profile

ATM
cas
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS). This setting is inherited by the CIDs

attached to the AAL2 VCL.
Values enabled
disabled
Default enabled
cac-divider
Enables oversubscription for an ATM VCL. During CAC calculations, the

system divides the SCR (for nrt-VBR or rt-VBR VCLs) bandwidth by the
value specified in the cac-divider. It then uses that value to determine if the
VCL can be created.
For example, to configure a 4:1 oversubscription, set cac-divider to 4.
Default 1
Location atm-traf-descr
cc-index
A unique value used to identify the cross connect.

Location atm-cc
fault-detection-type
Used to determine faults on the VCL.

Values disabled
Fault detection is disabled.
oamF5Loopback
On POTS-based AAL2 connections, the unit sends an OAM F5 loopback
if the CAS does not refresh after 10 seconds. If there is no response to the
F5 loopback, the VCL is blocked and a trap is generated.
On ISDN-based AAL2 connections, there is no CAS refresh; the unit
sends an F5 loopback every 5 seconds. If there is no response to the F5
loopback, the VCL is blocked and a trap is generated.
F5 loopbacks on AAL5 connections are not supported.
Default disabled
Location atm-vcl

Parameters
frame-mode-data
The transport of data units as specified in the transmission error detection

service of Recommendation I.366.1. This setting is inherited by the CIDs
attached to the AAL2 VCL.
Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
high-if-index
The index (in the form shelf-slot-port-subport-interface/atm or a user-defined

string) of the ATM interface for this cross connect. The high-if-index is
arbitrary, but by convention it indicates the ATM interface with a numerically
higher ifIndex value than the other ATM interface identified in the same cross
connect.
Location atm-cc
Notes The low-if-index and the high-if-index cannot be equal.
high-vci
The VCI value associated with the interface specified in the high-if-index.
For VP switched connections, specify 0.
Location atm-cc
high-vpi
The VPI value associated with the interface specified in the high-if-index.
Location atm-cc
low-if-index
The index (in the form shelf-slot-port-subport-interface/atm or a user-defined

string) of the ATM interface for this cross connect. The low-if-index is
arbitrary, but by convention it indicates the ATM interface with a numerically
lower ifIndex value than the other ATM interface identified in the same cross
connect.
Location atm-cc
Notes The low-if-index and the high-if-index cannot be equal.

ATM
low-vci
The VCI value associated with the interface specified in the low-if-index. For
VP switched connections, specify 0.
Location atm-cc
low-vpi
The VPI value associated with the interface specified in the low-if-index.
Location atm-cc
max-cid-for-aal2-user-channels
Maximum Channel Identifier (max-cid) value for AAL2 user channels as

defined by the ATM Forum.
Values For an app-id values of caspotsonlynoelcp and dss1brionlynoelcp, the
following Channel Identification (CID) value ranges apply:
CID 16..127: Bearer channels for POTS
CID 128..159: D-channels for ISDN BRI
CID 160..223: B-channels for ISDN BRI
Notes For more information, refer to the ATM Forum AF-VMOA-0145.000.
max-cps-sdu-size
Specifies the AAL2 payload in octets that can be sent and received.
Values 64 octets
45 octets
Default 45
max-length-frame
The maximum length of the frame that this channel will accept.
Values This setting is inherited by the CIDs attached to the AAL2 VCL.
max-number-multiplex-channels
The maximum number of channels that can be multiplexed within the VCL.

Parameters
Values 1 to 259, inclusive

Default 239
max-sdu-length
The maximum size of the SDU, in octets, that is allowed to be reassembled.

min-cid-for-aal2-user-channels
The minimum number of Channel Identifiers (CID) allowed for AAL2 user
channels.
Values For an app-id values of caspotsonlynoelcp and dss1brionlynoelcp, the
following Channel Identification (CID) value ranges apply:
CID 16..127: Bearer channels for POTS
CID 128..159: D-channels for ISDN BRI
CID 160..223: B-channels for ISDN BRI
Notes For more information, refer to the ATM Forum AF-VMOA-0145.000.
pcm-encoding
The type of Pulse Code Modulation encoding used.

Values muLaw
aLaw
pkt-time
Packet time in tenths of milliseconds.

Default 55
preferred-ap-index
Defines the preferred audio encoding format.

ATM
Values 1
Used for G.711 encoding
2
Default 1
Location aal2-cid-profile
ras-timer
The maximum time allowed for ReASsembly of a SSSAR-SDU.

Values milliseconds
receive_traffic_descr_index
Specifies the ATM traffic descriptor which applies to the receive direction of
this VCL.
Location atm-vcl
transmit_traffic_descr_index.
Traffic descriptors used in active VCLs cannot be modified. You must bring
down the VCL before you can modify the traffic descriptor.
See Also transmit_traffic_descr_index
sdu-multiples
Indicates the multiples of the service data unit (SDU) for each algorithm that
occurs. SDUs for audio are defined in relation to the profile of encoding
formats adopted on an AAL type 2 connection. Each algorithm that occurs in
a given profile may appear in multiple entries corresponding to packets of
different lengths. These packet lengths align in a simple sequence, where each
is an integral multiple of the smallest packet length that occurs for the
algorithm (at a given bit rate). The smallest packet length is the SDU of the
algorithm, in relation to the given profile.
Values 1 to 8
Default 1
See Also algorithm

Parameters
sscs-type
The Service Specific Convergence Sublayer (SSCS) is the portion of the

convergence sublayer that is dependent upon the type of traffic that is being
converted.
Values i3661
For channels that carry control and management plane traffic (such as
CCS, ELCP, ISDN D channels, and LES-EOC).
i3662
For channels carry media streams (such as POTS or ISDN B channels).
Default i3662
Location aal2-cid-profile
td_index
This parameter is used by the atm-vcl profile to identify a traffic descriptor.

td_frame_discard
Enables and disable early-packet-discard (EPD) and partial-packet-discard

(PPD). This allows selective discarding of all cells in a frame if one cell is lost
or discarded.
In EPD, the ATM interface monitors the AAL5 traffic and discards an entire
data frame if its output buffers do not have the space to process it. In PPD, the
ATM interface drops the remaining cells of the packet if other cells of the
packet have already been dropped. Both of these techniques increase the
efficiency of the data transfer by dropping frames that have already been
determined to be errored and will have to be retransmitted.
Values true
Indicates that the network is requested to treat data for this connection, in
the given direction, as frames (that is, AAL5 CPCS PDUs) rather than as
individual cells. While the precise implementation is network-specific,
this treatment may involve discarding entire frames during congestion,
rather than a few cells from many frames.
false
This is the recommended setting for voice connections.
Default false

ATM
td_param1
The peak cell rate (PCR) of the interface. Once the peak cell rate (PCR) has
been set, traffic policing ensures that the PCR limitations are enforced. The
system will discard cells of incoming (ingress) traffic that exceed the PCR.
Notes • Refer to the documentation that came with your device for information
about supported traffic parameters.
• The td_param1 and td_param2 parameters in the atm-traf-descr
profile must be set to one of the configured rates in the atm-vcl-param
profile.
• Refer to the following specifications for more information about PCR:
– ATM Forum, ATM User-Network Interface, Version 3.0 (UNI 3.0)
Specification, 1994.
– ATM Forum, ATM User-Network Interface, Version 3.1 (UNI 3.1)
Specification, November 1994.
td_param2
Sustained cell rate (SCR) of the interface. Refer to the documentation that
came with your device for information about supported traffic parameters.
Notes The td_param1 and td_param2 parameters in the atm-traf-descr profile
must be set to one of the configured rates in the atm-vcl-param profile.
td_param3
Maximum burst size (MBS) of the interface. Refer to the documentation that
came with your device for information about supported traffic parameters.
td_param4
Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT) of the interface. Refer to the

documentation that came with your device for information about supported
traffic parameters.
td_param5
Currently not supported.


Parameters
td_service_category
The ATM service category. Zhone devices support currently support the
following classes of traffic:
• Unspecified bit rate (UBR) for data. Supported on the BAN, MALC,
Raptor, Z-Edge.
• Constant bit rate (CBR) for voice. Supported on the MALC, Raptor,
Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge.
• Real time variable bit rate (rt-VBR) for voice or data, depending on the
application. Supported on the BAN, MALC, Raptor, Sechtor 100A.
• Non-real time variable bit rate (nrt-VBR) for voice or data, depending on
the application. Supported on the MALC.
td_type
Traffic descriptor type. Note that not all products support all traffic types.
Refer to the documentation that came with your device for information about
supported traffic categories.
Values atmNoClpNoScr
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.2)
No CLP and no Sustained Cell Rate.
atmClpTaggingNoScr
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.4)
CLP with tagging and no Sustained Cell Rate.
atmClpNoTaggingScr
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.6)
CLP with no tagging and Sustained Cell Rate.
atmClpTaggingScr
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.7)
CLP with tagging and Sustained Cell Rate.
atmClpTransparentNoScr
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.9)
CLP transparent and no Sustained Cell Rate.
atmClpTransparentScr
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.10)
CLP transparent and Sustained Cell Rate.
atmNoClpNoScrCdvt
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.12)
No CLP and no Sustained Cell Rate.

ATM
atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.14)
CLP with no tagging, Sustained Cell Rate.
atmClpTaggingScrCdvt
(OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.37.1.1.15)
CLP with tagging, Sustained Cell Rate.
timer-cu
The timer-cu is always set to 0. Each transmitted ATM contains one AAL2
packet.
Values 0
traffic-container-index
This parameter associates a VCL with a traffic container, and is used to

retrieve PON channel provisioning information.
Location atm-vcl
transmit_traffic_descr_index
Specifies the ATM traffic descriptor which applies to the transmit direction of
this VCL.
Location atm-vcl
receive_traffic_descr_index.
Traffic descriptors used in active VCLs cannot be modified. You must bring
down the VCL before you can modify the traffic descriptor.
See Also transmit_traffic_descr_index
trnk-vcl-rate
This parameter is used to describe the minimum guaranteed rate for a VCL
which is bound to this traffic descriptor for BAN ATM Trunk cards. It is
applicable only for the rt-VBR service category.
Notes The trnk-rate-vcl parameter in atm-traf-descr profiles is only used on BAN
release 1.5.2. In other releases, it does not apply.

Parameters
trunk-type
Specifies supervisory line states, for example, on-hook, off-hook, idle, and
ringing. The trunk-type used for the IAD (Z-Edge) must match the ATM
switch trunk type. This parameter is used only for app-id values of
caspotsonlynoelcp.
Values unknown
loopstart
groundstart
loopreversebattery
Default loopstart
usage-parameter-control
UPC is the process of monitoring and controlling the ATM traffic by

enforcing the traffic parameters. By using this parameter, you can disable on a
per-traffic descriptor basis. This is typically only done during debugging.
Values true
Enforcement of traffic descriptor parameters is enabled.
false
Enforcement of traffic descriptor parameters is disabled.
Default true
Notes The usage-parameter-control parameter must be set to true if the ATM
service category is CBR.
vcc_aal5_encaps_type
This parameter applies only when the local VCL end-point is also the VCC
end-point, and AAL5 is in use. The type of data encapsulation used over the
AAL5 SSCS layer. The definitions reference RFC 1483 Multiprotocol
Encapsulation over ATM AAL5 and to the ATM Forum LAN Emulation
specification.
Values llcencapsulation
Logical link control encapsulation over AAL5. Used for connections
terminated on the device.
other
RFC 1483 multiprotocol encapsulation over AAL5. Used for bridged
termination connections.
Default llcencapsulation

ATM
Location atm-vcl
vcc_aal_type
The type of AAL used on this VCC. This parameter applies only when the
local VCL end-point is also the VCC end-point, and AAL is in use.
Values aal5
For AAL5 terminated data.
other
For cell relay.
aal2
For AAL2 voice. When a VCL is set to AAL2 (either manually or with
the voice add command), the system automatically creates associated
aal2-vcl-profiles.
Default aal5
Location atm-vcl
vcc-i
The VCC Identifier. It is used to differentiate aal2-vcl-profiles and is used to

match profiles between IADs and ATM switches.
Values integer
vci
The VCI value for this virtual channel link (VCL). This must match the
remote end of the connection.
Location atm-vcl
Notes The maximum VCI value cannot exceed the value allowable by
atmInterfaceMaxVciBits defined in the ATM-MIB.
vcl_cast_type
The connection topology type.

Default p2p
Location atm-vcl
vcl_conn_kind
The use of call control.

Default pvc

Parameters
Location atm-vcl
vcl-rate-params (1 through 32)
The atm-vcl-param profile defines the allowable values for the PCR and
SCR for certain traffic types. The values in this profile are used as follows:
• The SCR for rt-VBR traffic descriptors must use one of the first 16 rates.
• The PCR for CBR traffic descriptors can use any of the 32 rates.
• For a UBR traffic descriptor, if usage-parameter-control in an ATM
traffic descriptor is set to false, or if PCR is greater than modem trained
rate, then the UBR traffic is shaped to one of the 32 rates. The shaper will
pick a rate that is equal to or less than the modem trained rate. If there are
multiple rates less than the modem trained rate, the one closest to the
trained rate will be selected.
Note: If your device is being managed by ZMS, changes to the

atm-vcl-param profile should be made using ZMS. If you use the
CLI to change the profile, perform a full config sync update after
making the change.
Note the following about the values in this profile:

• Rates are in cells per second (CPS)
• Duplicate rates are not permitted
• Rates must be in ascending order within the first 16 rates and also within
the second 16 rates.
Location atm-vcl-param
Notes • The td_param1 and td_param2 parameters in the atm-traf-descr
profile must be set to one of the configured rates in the atm-vcl-param
profile.
• Changing the values in the atm-vcl-param profile requires a system
reboot.
• Table 9 explains the atm-vcl-param default settings.
Table 9: atm-vcl-param settings
Setting (in CPS) Application
38 1 to 2 DS0s
at 5:1 to 10:1 oversubscription
76 2 to 4 DS0s
151 4 to 8 DS0s

ATM
Table 9: atm-vcl-param settings (Continued)
Setting (in CPS) Application
189 1 DS0
no oversubscription
302 8 to 16 DS0s
378 2 DS0
no oversubscription
604 16 to 32 DS0s
755 4 DS0
no oversubscription
1208 32 to 64 DS0s
1510 8 DS0
no oversubscription
3661 Full T1
4825 Full E1
28302 8 T1s
37736 8 E1s
106133 DS3
365567 OC3-c/STM1
voicebandwidthcheck
Enables or disables ATM bandwidth checking for voice calls. The system will
reject a call if there is not enough bandwidth. On a MALC or a Z-Edge, if a
call is rejected, the device sends a fast busy to the caller. On the BAN or the
Sechtor 100A, if a call is rejected, the switch sends a busy signal to the caller.
Note: Bandwidth calculations are enabled or disabled for the entire

system.
The bandwidth check is based on the configuration of the transmit and receive
ATM traffic descriptors for the ATM VC/CID used by the call. The system
uses the following parameters to calculate the required bandwidth:
• rt-VBR traffic: SCR
• CBR traffic: PCR
• All other traffic types: calls are always accepted, there are no voice
quality guarantees.

Parameters
The system will reject calls if:

[Receive or transmit cell rate - (180*number of active calls on the VC)] < 180
(The bandwidth calculations assume that approximately 180 AAL2 cells per
second are used for each voice call.)
Values true
false
Default false
Location system profile
vpi
The VPI value for a VPL or VCL. This must match the remote end of the
connection.
Values
Valid values differ depending on the type of device and its revision level.
Refer to the configuration guide for your device for valid ranges.
Location atm-vcl
Notes The maximum VPI value cannot exceed the value allowable by
atmInterfaceMaxVpiBits defined in the ATM-MIB.
See Also vci
zhoneAtmMaxVciPerVp
Specifies the maximum number of VCIs supported in a VP-switched VPI on

the MALC Voice Gateway card.
Default 0
Location atm-vpi
Notes Refer to the release notes for the maximum values for a particular device.
zhoneAtmVpiMaxVci
For the selected VPI, this value specifies the maximum VCI. For VP switched
VPIs, this value must be zero.For VC switched VPIs, this value must be a
power of 2.
Default 0
Location atm-vpi
Notes Refer to the release notes for the maximum values for a particular device.

Bridging
zhoneAtmVpiSwitched
Indicates whether the VPI is VP or VC switched.

Values vp
vc
Default vp
Location atm-vpi
Bridging
bridgeConfigType
Specifies the type of filter to be applied to packets on the interface.

Values bridgeinsertoption82
Inserts identification text into the DHCP packet.
bridgeforbidoui
Drops packets with matching OUI.
Location bridge-config-record
bridgeConfigValue
If the bridgeConfigType is set to bridgeforbidoui, this parameter specifies

the OUI or first 3-bytes of the MAC address in the format nn:nn:nn, where nn
represents a hex number designating a byte. If the bridgeConfigType is set to
bridgeinsertoption82, this parameter contains a text string that is inserted
into the DHCP packet.
Values A string in the form nn:nn:nn, where nn represents a hexadecimal
number designating a byte.
Location bridge-config-record
bridgeIfConfigGroupIndex
Index used for bridge groups.

Default 0

Parameters
Location bridge-interface-record
bridgeIfCustomDHCP
Determines how the BAN handles DHCP offer messages from remote DHCP
servers.
Values true
Forwards broadcast DHCPOFFER or DHCPACK packets even if
bridgeFilterBroadcast is TRUE for that interface.
false
Does not forward broadcast DHCPOFFER or DHCPACK packets.
Default false
customARP
Determines how the BAN treats ARP packets. When a BAN receives a ARP
packet, it compares and filters the requested IP address with the current
forwarding table. If a match is found, the ARP broadcast is forwarded out the
interface that has the appropriate host. This host will then reply to the ARP
with a standard response. If a match is not found, then the ARP is filtered and
it gets dropped as if it were a non-ARP broadcast.
Values true
Sends the ARP packet out regardless of the whether a match is found for
the requested IP address. (If true, sends ARP requests selectively or by
flood.)
false
Drops the packet if there is no match for the requested IP address.
Default false
filterBroadcast
Determines how the BAN handles non-ARP broadcast packets.

Values true
Non-ARP broadcast packets are discarded.

Bridging
false
Non-ARP broadcast packets are forwarded.
Default false
forwardToDefault
If true, attempt to forward via VLAN default paths.

Default false
forwardToMulticast
If true, attempt to forward via multicast MAC paths.

Default false
Location bridge-interface-group
forwardToUnicast
If true, attempt to forward via unicast MAC paths.

Default false
learnIP
If true, snoop unicast packets to build ARP table.

Default false

Parameters
learnMulticast
If true, snoop multicast packets for IGMP joins/leaves.

Default false
learnUnicast
If true, snoop unicast packets to build MAC paths.

Default false
maxUnicast
Maximum number of unicast addresses for I/F.

StripAndInsert
If true, enable VLAN Tagging.

Default false
vci
If this bridge interface is on an ATM VCL, this is the ATM VCI. If the bridge
interface is not an ATM VCL, (for example an Ethernet interface), this
parameter is 0.

Card
vlanId
The Virtual LAN Id for VLAN tag insertion.

Default 0
vpi
The VPI value for a VPL or VCL. The VPI value of 0 is only allowed for a
VCL.
Default 0
Location bridge-interface-group
Card
admin-status
Specifies the administrative status of the unit or card.

Values operational
The unit or card enters the operational state if it is able. In the operational
state the unit or card is able to accept requests from other devices; or, if it
is a stand-alone device, it is able to process requests from the wide area
network (WAN) or local interfaces.
disable
The unit or card ceases to accept requests from other devices. If the unit
or card is operational and receives this command it completes processing
of open requests if able.
maintenance
Enter a special maintenance state if available. If not available enter the
disabled state and set admin-status to disabled.
warm reset
Perform a warm reset of system software that does not reinitialize or reset
hardware resources.
reset
Perform an immediate full reset. Following a successful reset the unit or
card should enter the operational state.

Parameters
Location card-profile
See Also sw-status
admin-status-enable
Enables the collection and forwarding of historical statistics on the unit or

card.
Note: This value should be combined with the system statistics to

determine if the collection and forwarding of statistics should be
enabled.
Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
card-group-id
The unique redundancy group to which the card is assigned. A card group can
contain at most two cards and redundant card pairs must be in the same card
group.
Values 0 to 65535
Default 0 (indicates no redundancy group configured)
Notes Redundancy group IDs must be non-zero.
A non-zero card-group-id cannot be changed. You must delete the card-
profile and recreate it.
card-atm-configuration
Specifies bandwidth allocation for rt-VBR and UBR traffic and used by
Connection Admission Control (CAC). This parameter only applies to ATM
trunking interfaces, such as MALC and Raptor Uplink cards, as well as BAN
ATM trunking cards.
Note: The Raptor 100 does not support CBR.
Values notapplicable
cellrelayonly (BAN only)
The only supported value for ATM trunking (cell relay) card. Specifies
the following bandwidth allocation:
• AAL2/cell relay 99%
• AAL5 1%

Card
For ATM-AAL2/AAL5card, 50% of AAL2/cell relay bandwidth is

rt-VBR.
cellrelayandmanagement (BAN only)
Specifies the following allocation:
• AAL5 5%
rt-VBR.
dataterm (BAN only)
• AAL5 95%
rt-VBR.
voiceGateway (BAN only)
(only supported for ATM-AAL2/AAL5 card)
• AAL5 5%
rt-VBR.
hybridlowaal5data (BAN only)
• AAL5 25%
rt-VBR.
hybriddefeault (BAN only)
• AAL5 40%
For ATM-AAL2/AAL5 card, 75% of AAL2/cell relay bandwidth is
rt-VBR.
hybridhighaal5data (BAN only)
• AAL5 75%
For ATM-AAL2/AAL5 card, 50% of AAL2/cell relay bandwidth is
rt-VBR.

Parameters
vbnrt95rt5 (MALC, Raptor)

• UBR: 1%
• nrt-VBR: 94%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 5%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 80%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 15%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 65%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 30%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 50%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 45%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 35%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 60%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 20%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 75%
• UBR: 1%
• nrt-VBR: 5%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 94%
card-line-type
Specifies the line type of the card and the signaling that runs over it. Does not
apply to MALC OC3-c/STM1 Uplink cards.

Card
Values unknowntype
Unknown mode. Used for cards that do not support this parameter.
e1
E1 UNI mode.
ds1
DS1 UNI mode
e1-ima
E1 ATM IMA mode (MALC T1/E1 IMA Uplink card)
ds1-ima
DS1 ATM IMA mode (MALC T1/E1 IMA Uplink card)
e3
E3 UNI mode
ds3
DS3 UNI mode
t1-uni-gr303
T1 UNI mode of ATM and GR-303 TDM signaling (MALC T1/E1 TDM
Uplink card)
t1-ima-gr303
T1 IMA mode of ATM and GR-303 TDM signaling (MALC T1/E1 TDM
Uplink card)
e1-uni-v52
E1 UNI mode of ATM and V5.2 TDM signaling (MALC T1/E1 TDM
Uplink card)
e1-ima-v52
E1 IMA mode of ATM and V5.2 TDM signaling (MALC T1/E1 TDM
Uplink card)
gshdsl
SHDSL (Raptor 100 SHDSL Uplink model).
t1-uni-t1cas
Used for POTS to DS1 connections on the T1/E1 TDM card or OC12-c/
STM4 Uplink cards.
t1-ima-t1cas
Used for POTS to E1 connections on the T1/E1 TDM card or OC12-c/
STM4 Uplink cards.
rpr
RPR data-only mode (the default for the 2 port GigE RPR card).
rpr-t1-gr303
RPR with data and GR-303 voice.
rpr-e1-v52
RPR with data and V5.2 voice
rpr-t1cas
RPR with data and T1 CAS voice

Parameters
adsl-pots
ADSL and TDM POTS. Supported on ADSL 48 port cards only.
adsl-pots-pv
ADSL and packet voice. Supported on ADSL 48 port cards only.
adsl-splitter
ADSL with splitter. Supported on ADSL 48 port cards only.
pots
TDM POTS. Supported on the POTS 48 port card only.
pots-pv
Packet voice. Supported on the POTS 48 port card only.
Notes Does not apply to DSL card, the MALC ULC card, or POTS cards.
hold-active
When set to true, this indicates that the card, when Active, should remain in
the Active state regardless of any system events. This effectively disables
redundancy for the card group.
name
Name of the software image to load for the card. If the name is not specified,
the slot card loads the image specified in the card-profile for the slot.
sw-enable
Specifies whether a software download for the slot card is enabled.

Values true
Enables the system to download the binary for that slot card when the
card is reset.
false
Software is not downloaded to the slot card. This effectively disables the
slot card.
Default false
Notes The slot card loads the software binary specified in the type-module record
for the card if it is not specified in the card-profile record for that slot.
See Also name, upgrade-sw-file-name

Card
sw-file-name
The file or code image name of the software version that should be loaded by
the unit or card for operation.
The operation of this parameter varies depending on the type of device.
• BAN. MALC, and Raptor: The card will load the specified software
image. If the sw-file-name is not specified, the card will load the image
specified in the type-module for the slot card.
• Z-Edge or Sechtor 100A: If the unit is a Z-Edge or a Sechtor 100A, the
system will first check for a local copy of the specified software image. If
a copy is there, the device will load from the local copy. If the local copy
is not the same revision as the sw-file-name the card will load the new
image.
Notes If a failure occurs when loading an upgrade version, the system automatically
reverts to a software version specified in the sw-file-name. If the
sw-file-name is not specified, the card will load the image specified in the
type-module for the slot card.
See Also name
sw-pri-load-server
The IP address of the primary software load server. This parameter is not used
by BAN, MALC, or Raptor cards. If the value of this parameter is set to
0.0.0.0 then no primary load server is available.
Notes If the system is unable to load the software file from the primary load server,
the system attempts to load the software from the secondary load server.
sw-upgrade-admin
How the unit should be upgraded.

Values loadupgradesw
The device requests a load of the upgrade software from the image
previously downloaded to the system. If an upgrade version of the
software is not available or the upgrade server is unable to respond to the
load request, the card will set sw-status to upgradeloadFailed.
upgradenow
The device upgrades to the already loaded upgrade software if warm
upgrade is supported or it will reboot and load the upgrade software if
warm upgrade is not supported. If the upgrade software has not been
loaded or there is no grade software load available, the device will set

Parameters
sw-status to upgradeFailed. When this value is set, the

sw-upgrade-enable parameter is set to true.
upgradeonreset
The device upgrades to the already loaded software the next time it is
reset. If the upgrade software is not loaded the card will set sw-status to
upgradeFailed following a reset.
reloadcurrrev
The device will reset and load the version of code that was running prior
to the most recent upgrade.
type
This parameter definition differs depending on its location:

• In an if-translate profile, it indicates the type of interface, as specified in
the Interface MIB (RFC 2233).
• In a card-resource profile, it indicates the type of slot card.
upgrade-sw-file-name
The file name of the software image that should be loaded by the unit or card
at the next upgrade. If this is not specified, the name of the image specified in
the type-module record for the slot card is downloaded instead.
See Also name
upgrade-vers
The software version that is loaded into the unit or card memory that can be
loaded after a warm reboot of the system.
weight
A weight given to this card that determines whether this card should become
the active card after both cards are reset. Cards in a card group negotiate
which cards are active and standby by comparing weights. Cards with higher
preferences become active. If multiple cards have the same weight, the card in
the lower numbered slot becomes active.
Values noPreference
No preference.

Channel Emulation Service (CES)
neveractive
The card never becomes active.
slightpreference
mediumpreference
highpreference
Default noPreference
Channel Emulation Service (CES)

buf-max-size
Defines maximum the size of the reassembly buffer in 10 microsecond

increments.
Default 128
Location ces-config
Products MALC
cas
Specifies which AAL1 Format should be used. This applies to structured

interfaces only.
For unstructured interfaces this value, if present, must be set to the default of
basic.
Values basic
No CAS bits with a single 125 usec frame. Default. Required for
unstructured channels.
e1cas
CAS bits used in E1 multiframe structure.
ds1esfcas
CAS bits used in DS1 ESF multiframe structure.
ds1sfcas
CAS bits used in DS1 SF multiframe structure.
Default basic
Location ces-config
Products MALC

Parameters
cell-loss-integration-period
The time in milliseconds for the cell loss integration period.

Default 2500
Location ces-config
Products MALC
destination-ip-address
Shows the configured destination IP address of the CES over IP connection.

Location ces-config
Products MALC
destination-port
Shows the configured destination UPD port number of the CES over IP
connection.
Location ces-config
Products MALC
ds0-bundle
Lists the specified DS0 bundles.

Location ces-config
Products MALC
partial-fill
Specifies the number of user octets per cells. Setting this parameter to zero
disables partial cell fill, and causes all cells to be completely filled before they
are sent.
Default 0
Location ces-config
Products MALC

Clocking
source-ip-address
Shows the configured source IP address of the CES over IP connection.

Location ces-config
Products MALC
source-port
Shows the configured source UPD port number of the CES over IP
connection.
Location ces-config
Products MALC
vci
The VCI used by the ATM VCL mapped through this CES IWF to a CBR
interface. Zero indicates that no ATM VCL has been specified.
Default 0
Location ces-config
Products MALC
vpi
The VPI used by the ATM VCL mapped through this CES IWF to a CBR
interface.
Default 0
Location ces-config
Products MALC
Clocking
clock-transmit-source
Specifies the OC3-c/STM1 or OC12-c/STM4 clocking mode.

Parameters
Values looptiming
The recovered receive clock from the is used as the transmit clock.
localtiming
A local (to the interface) clock source is used on the transmit signal.
throughtiming
The transmit clock is derived from the recovered receive clock of another
interface. Interfaces that are designated as eligible clock sources cannot
be set to through timing.
Default looptiming
Location sonet-profile
Products BAN, MALC, Raptor, Sechtor 100A
primaryclocksource
The shelf-slot-port-subport/type of an interface to provide clocking for the

system.
Note: system-clock-profiles (if supported on the device) are the

preferred method of configuring clock sources.
Values A valid interface on the system.

For the BITS clock on the MALC MTAC/Ring card, specify the address
in the form shelf-slot-1-0/ds1.
Location system
Notes If configured, the setting in the primaryclocksource parameter overrides
settings in the system-clock-profile for all interfaces that provide clocking.
revertiveclocksource
If a standby clock source becomes active after the failure of a primary clock
source, the system will revert to the primary clock source after that clock
source becomes active again. Note that the clock source must be active for 30
seconds before the system will revert back to the primary clock source.
Values true
The system clock is revertive.
false
The system clock is non-revertive.
Default true
Location system

Clocking
transmit-clock-source
Specifies the DS1/DS3 clocking mode.

Values looptiming
The recovered receive clock from the DS1/DS3 is used as the transmit
clock.
localtiming
A local (to the DS1/DS3 interface) clock source is used on the DS1/DS3
transmit signal.
throughtiming
The transmit DS1/DS3 clock is derived from the recovered receive clock
of another DS1/DS3 interface. Interfaces that are designated as eligible
clock sources cannot be set to through timing.
Default looptiming (DS3) throughtiming (DS1)
Location ds1-profile, ds3-profile
system-clock-eligibility
Specifies whether the interface is eligible to provide clocking for the system.
The source must be active in order to provide clock. The following types of
interfaces can provide clock:
• T1/E1
• DS3/E3
• OC3-c
• OC12-c
Values true
false
Default false
Location system-clock-profile
system-clock-weight
Assigns a weight to the clock source. If you assign weight to a clock source
that is higher than the currently active clock source, the system will switch
over to that clock source.
Values 1 to 10
1 is the lowest priority, 10 is the highest
Default 5

Parameters
Location system-clock-profile
Notes If you assign weight to a clock source that is higher than the currently active
clock source, or if you assign a clock source in the system profile, the system
will switch over to the new clock source.
DHCP
bootfile
The name of the initial boot file loaded by the client. The filename should be
recognizable to the file transfer protocol that the client will be using to load
the file.
Default An empty string
Location dhcp-server-subnet, dhcp-server-group, dhcp-server-host
boot-server
The IP address of the server from which the initial boot file (specified in the
bootfile parameter) is to be loaded. If this IP address is specified as 0.0.0.0
then the primary interface address of the DHCP server is used.
Location dhcp-server-subnet, dhcp-server-host, dhcp-server-group
Products BAN, MALC, Raptor, Z-Edge, ZRG
client-hostname
Client host name (if any) that the client used to acquire its address.
Location dhcp-server-lease
client-identifier
The DHCP client identifier.

Location dhcp-server-host

DHCP
client-match-length
The length of the client identifier substring to match.

Default -1
Specifies that the entire string beginning at the match offset value should
be matched.
Location dhcp-server-group
client-match-offset
The offset into the client passed client identifier string where the string match
should start.
Default 0 (zero)
Access This parameter is read-write
client-match-string
Client identifier match string that determines which clients should be placed
in this group.
defaultLease
The default requested lease length, in seconds.

Values From 100 to 604800 (1 week).
Default 604800
Location dhcp-client-resource
Notes This value should be greater than or equal to the minLease.

Parameters
default-lease-time
The default time, in seconds assigned to a lease if the client requesting the
lease does not request a specific expiration time.
Values From -1 - 2147483647
Default -1
Indicates the parameter is ignored.
Notes This value should be greater than or equal to the min-lease-time.
default-router
The IP address of the client default gateway.

Default 0.0.0.0
dhcp
Specifies whether the IP interface is a DHCP client or server.

Values none
The interface is neither a DHCP client or a server.
client
The interface is a DHCP client.
server
The client is a DHCP server.
both
The interface is both a DHCP client and a server.
Default none
Location ip-interface-record
dhcpClientErrors
The number of errors that the DHCP client has encountered.


DHCP
dhcpClientId
The DHCP client ID.

Location dhcp-client-lease-resource
dns
A list of the DNS server and router IP addresses that the system will use.
dns-fwd-name
Dynamic DNS forward host name. Not currently used.

dns-rev-name
Dynamic DNS reverse host name. Not currently used.

domain
The routing domain to which this subnet, group, or host parameter applies.
domainName
The name of the DHCP domain.


Parameters
domain-name
The default domain name that the client should use when resolving host
names using DNS. The default is an empty string.
Default The default is an empty string.
ends
The time in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) that the DHCP lease will expire.
Values 0 to 2147483647, inclusive.
external-server
Non-null IP address value indicates use of external DHCP server instead of

internal DHCP for this subnet.
Default 00000000
Location dhcp-server-subnet
Products MALC
flags
Indicates how the DHCP host acquired its lease.

Values Static
The lease is static. Static leases typically should not appear in the lease
database.
bootp
The lease was allocated using the BOOTP protocol. BOOTP leases are
unsupported.
abandonedlease
A client appears to exist (for example, the device responds to a ping
command) on the network even though the DHCP server has not allocated
the lease address to the client. In this case, the server abandons that lease
and tries to reuse it only when it runs out of available addresses.

DHCP
zhonecpe
The client that was allocated a lease identified itself as a Zhone CPE
device (such as a Z-Edge).
hardware-address
In the dhcp-server-lease profile, this parameter is the MAC address of the

network interface that was used to acquire the lease.
In the dhcp-server-host profile, this parameter is the hardware address of the
client that matches this host parameter. If the client-identifier parameter is
specified, the hardware address is ignored.
Default 0 (zero)
Location dhcp-server-lease, dhcp-server-host
Notes Configure either the hardware-address or client-identifier for host
parameters.
hostName
Name of the DHCP host. This will not be a fully-qualified host name.
ipaddr1
The fixed IP address that should be assigned to this client.

Default 0.0.0.0
ipaddr2

Default 0.0.0.0

Parameters
ipaddr3

Default 0.0.0.0
ipaddr4

Default 0.0.0.0
lease-time
The global default time in seconds that will be assigned to a DHCP lease if the
client requesting the lease does not request a specific expiration time.
Values 0 to 21474836471
Default 43200 seconds (12 hours).
Location dhcp-server-options
max-lease-time
The maximum time in seconds that will be assigned to a lease regardless of

the value specified by a client.
Values -1 to 2147483647
-1 indicates that this parameter is ignored.
Default The default in the dhcp-server-options record is 86,400 seconds.
The default for dhcp-server-group, dhcp-server-host, and
dhcp-server-subnet is -1.
Location dhcp-server-options, dhcp-server-subnet, dhcp-server-group,
dhcp-server-host
max-uui
Maximum user to user indicator.

DHCP
Values 0 to 15
Specify 15 for audio.
Default 15
min-uui
Minimum user to user indicator.

Values 0 to 15
Specify 0 for audio.
Default 0
minLease
The minimum acceptable lease length.

Values 1 to 604800 (one week)
Default 300
Notes This value should not be greater than the defaultLease.
min-lease-time
The minimum expiration time in seconds that will be assigned to a DHCP

lease by the server, regardless of the value specified by a client.
Values -1 to 2147483647
Default -1, which indicates that the parameter is ignored.
Location dhcp-server-options, dhcp-server-subnet, dhcp-server-group,
dhcp-server-host
Notes This value should not exceed the default-lease-time setting.
name
In a dhcp-server-host record this indicates the host name for the client. This
may be fully qualified with the local domain name but it is recommended that
you use the domain-name parameter to specify the domain name.

Parameters
In a dhcp-server-group record this indicates the group parameter name.

Location dhcp-server-host, dhcp-server-group
netmask
The subnet mask associated with the IP interface. The value of the mask is an
IP address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the hosts bits set to 0.
Location dhcp-server-subnet, ip-interface-record
network
The IP network address of this subnet parameter.

primary-name-server
The IP address of the primary domain name server that the client should use
for DNS resolution.
Default 0.0.0.0.
range1-end
The last IP address of the first address pool in this subnet. If either the start or
end range has a value of 0, then the entire address pool is ignored.
Default 0.0.0.0

DHCP
range1-start
The starting IP address of the first address pool in this subnet. If either the
start or end range has a value of 0 then the entire address pool is ignored.
Default 0.0.0.0
range2-end
The last IP address of the second address pool in this subnet. If either the start
or end range has a value of 0, then the entire address pool is ignored.
Default 0.0.0.0
range2-start
The starting IP address of the second address pool in this subnet. If either the
start or end range has a value of 0, then the entire address pool is ignored.
Default 0.0.0.0
range3-end
The last IP address of the third address pool in this subnet. If either the start or
end range has a value of 0, then the entire address pool is ignored.
Default 0.0.0.0
range3-start
The starting IP address of the third address pool in this subnet. If either the
Default 0.0.0.0

Parameters
range4-end
The last IP address of the fourth address pool in this subnet. If either the start
or end range has a value of 0, then the entire address pool is ignored.
Default 0.0.0.0
range4-start
The starting IP address of the fourth address pool in this subnet. If either the
Default 0.0.0.0
reserve-end
The default number of IP addresses at the end of a subnet IP address space

that are reserved by the DHCP server. To override this default, create a
specific subnet rule for each subnet that needs to be handled differently.
Values 0 to 255
Default 5
reserve-start
The default number of IP addresses at the start of a subnet IP address space

that are reserved by the DHCP server. To override this default, create a
specific subnet rule for each subnet that needs to be handled differently.
Values 0 to 255
Default 5
See Also send-type

DHCP
restart
Restarts the DHCP server. A restart should only be done after making manual
changes to the DHCP server lease table. All other configuration changes done
using SNMP are automatically loaded by the server.
Values true
The server should restart by completely reloading its configuration.
false
This value is automatically assigned to the parameter once the restart
command has been acknowledged by the server.
Default false
secondary-name-server
The IP address of the secondary domain name server that the client should use
for DNS resolution.
Default 0.0.0.0.
stickyaddr
Specifies that the DHCP server attempts to hand out the same IP address to
the same host, whenever possible, based on hardware address.
Values disable
enable
Default enable
starts
The time in GMT that the lease was assigned.

Values 0 to 2147483647

Parameters
state
The current state of the lease.

Values init
reboot
bound
verify
release
invalid
bind
Notes Only init, verify and release can be changed.
subnetgroup
The DHCP Subnet group ID used to indicate which address pool grouping
may be used for the CPE subnet.
Default 0 (zero)
Products MALC
tftp
The tftp address for the current interface.

Access This parameter is read-only
vendor-match-length
The length of the vendor class identifier substring to match.

Default -1, which indicates that the entire string starting at the match offset value
should be matched.

DNS
vendor-match-offset
The offset into the client passed vendor class identifier string where the string
match should start.
Default 0 (zero)
vendor-match-string
The vendor class identifier match string that is used to determine which
clients should be placed in the group.
Default An empty string.
version
The version number of the current DHCP server configuration. If this value
changes, the server will reload all of its configuration rules and reinitialize
itself. Any configuration rules modified before this field is changed will not
affect the DHCP server configuration once it is reset.
Values 0 (zero) to 2147483647
Default 0 (zero)
DNS
domain
The routing domain to which this host parameter applies.

Values A string, maximum length 255 characters.
Location resolver

Parameters
first-nameserver
The IP address of the first or primary name server for this routing domain.
Location resolver
hostalias1
Host name alias for specified host. The host name can be qualified or
hostname only. The maximum length for this name is 255 characters.
Location host-name
hostalias2
Host name alias for specified host. The host name can be either fully-qualified
or hostname only. The maximum length for this name is 255 characters.
Location host-name
hostalias3
Location host-name
hostalias4
Location host-name
hostname
Client host name (if any) that the client used to acquire its address.
Location host-name
ipaddress
The IP address of this system or interface on the indicated subnet. For

unnumbered interfaces, a unique internal identifier is used.
Location host-name

DS1
query-order
The type of resolver query for this routing domain.

Values hosts-first
Searches the local hosts table first, then the list of nameservers.
dns-first
Searches the list of nameservers first, then the local hosts table
dns-only
Searches only the list of nameservers.
Default hosts-first
Location resolver
second-nameserver
The IP address of the secondary name server for this routing domain. This
nameserver is queried if the first nameserver cannot resolve the query. If a
secondary name server has not been defined, this field is set to 0.0.0.0
Location resolver
third-nameserver
The IP address of the third name server for this routing domain. This
nameserver is queried if the first nameserver and the secondary nameserver
cannot resolve the query. If a third name server has not been defined, this field
is set to 0.0.0.0
Location resolver
DS1
cell-scramble
Indicates whether ATM cell scrambling is enabled for this interface. Both
sides of the connection must agree on whether scrambling is enabled.
Values true
Cell scrambling enabled.
false
Cell scrambling disabled.

Parameters
Default true
channelization
Indicates whether this DS1/E1 is channelized.

Values disabled
Not currently supported.
enabledDs0
This is a DS1 channelized into DS0s.
enabledDs1
This is a DS2 channelized into DS1s. Not currently supported.
Default enabledDs0
Location ds1-profile
circuit-id
The transmission vendor circuit identification number.

Values integer
clock-source-eligible
Whether the clock source is eligible to become the transmit clock source.
Values not-eligible
The interface is not eligible to be used as the transmit clock source.
eligible
The interface can be used as the transmit clock source.
Default not-eligible

DS1
coset-polynomial
Indicates whether the coset polynomial is used to calculate the ATM header
error control (HEC) value. Both sides of the connection must agree on the
method of calculating the HEC value.
Values true
The coset polynomial is used to calculate the HEC value.
false
The coset polynomial is not used to calculate the HEC value.
Default true
csu-line-length
The length of the CSU WAN interface in feet. This objects provides
information for line build out circuitry.
Values csu00
0 dB line build out.
csu75
-7.5 dB line build out.
csu150
csu225
Default csu00
ds1-group-number
The group index to which this DS1 belongs.

Default 0
ds1-mode
The type of T1 interface to which the system connects.

Parameters
Values other
The T1 interface is neither DSX nor CSU.
dsx
The T1 interface is DSX.
csu
The T1 interface is CSU.
Default csu
dsx-line-length
The physical length of the T1 line. This setting is used to compensate for the
attenuation of the line due to its length.
Values dsx0
Indicates the line is 0 feet.
dsx133
dsx266
dsx399
dsx533
dsx655
Default dsx0
fdl
Specifies the facilities data link protocol in use.

Values other
Indicates that a protocol other than one following is used.
ansit1403
FDL exchange recommended by ANSI.

DS1
att54016
ESF FDL exchanges.
fdlnone
The device does not use the FDL.
Default fdlnone
Notes Not supported on E1.
line-code
The type of Zero Code Suppression used on the interface.

Values b8zs
Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution. A specific pattern of normal bits and bipolar
violations used to replace a sequence of eight zeros. Used for T1.
hdb3
High Density Bipolar of order 3. Used for E1.
ami
Alternate Mark Inversion. No zero code suppression is present and the
line encoding does not solve the problem directly. In this application, the
higher layer must provide data which meets or exceeds the pulse density
requirements Used for T1. Also used for E1 lines, with or without CRC.
Default
b8zs for T1
hdb3 for E1
line-power
Enables and disables line power for the DS1 interface.

Default Disabled
line-status-change-trap-enable
Whether zhoneLineStatusChange traps should be generated for this interface.

Parameters
Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
line-type
The type of DS1 line used on this circuit. The type of circuit affects the
number of bits per second that the circuit can reasonably carry, as well as the
interpretation of the usage and error statistics.
Values esf
Extended SuperFrame DS1 (T1.107).
d4
AT&T D4 format DS1 (T1.107).
e1
ITU-T Recommendation G.704 (Table 4a).
e1Crc
ITU-T Recommendation G.704 (Table 4b).
elMf
G.704 (Table 4a) with TS16 multiframing enabled.
e1crcmf
G.704, table 4b, with TS16 multiframing and cyclic redundancy check
enabled for E1 circuits. Used for V5.2.
Default esf for T1
e1CrcMf for E1
Notes • For more information see ITU-T Recommendation G.704.
• D4 is not supported on the BAN, MALC, or Raptor.
loopback-config
The loopback configuration of the DS1 interface.

Values noloop
Not in the loopback state. A device that is not capable of performing a
loopback on the interface always returns this as its value.

DS1
lineloop
The received signal on this interface does not go through the device
(minimum penetration) but is looped back out.
localloop
The transmitted signal on this interface is looped back and received by the
same interface. What is transmitted onto the line is product dependent.
payloadloop
The received signal on this interface does not go through the device
Default noloop
protocol-emulation
Indicates whether the device is acting as a network-side device or CPE with

respect to this DS1 connection.
Values network
cpe
Default network
Notes Z-Edge 6200 only.
send-code
Indicates what type of code is being sent across the DS1 interface by the
device.
Values sendnocode
Sending looped or normal data. This is the only supported option for E1
interfaces.
sendlinecode
Sending a request for a line loopback.
sendpayloadcode
Sending a request for a payload loopback.T1 only.
sendresetcode
Sending a loopback termination request. T1 only.
sendqrsspattern
Sending a Quasi-Random Signal (QRS) test pattern. T1 only.

Parameters
send511pattern
Sending a 511 bit fixed test pattern. T1 only.
send3in24pattern
Sending a fixed test pattern of 3 bits set in 24. T1 only.
sendothertestpattern
Sending a test pattern other than those described by this parameter. T1
only.
send2047pattern
Sending 2047 test pattern. T1 only.
send1in2pattern
Sending alternate one, zero pattern. T1 only.
sendinbandcode
Sending inband loopback command. T1 only.
sendinbandcodeoff
Sending inband loopback off command. T1 only.
sendlinecodeoff
Sending line loopback command. T1 only.
sendpayloadcodeoff
Sending payload loopback command. T1 only.
Default sendnocode
signal-mode
The DS1 signaling mode.

Values None
No bits are reserved for signaling on this channel.
robbedBit
DS1 robbed bit signaling is in use.
bitOriented
E1 Channel Associated Signaling is in use.
messageOriented
Common Channel Signaling is in use either on channel 16 of an E1 link or
channel 24 of a DS1.

DS3
signal-type
The signaling type of the FXS interfaces within this DS1 connection.
Values loopstart
groundstart
Default loopstart
Notes Z-Edge 6200 only.

Values looptiming
clock.
localtiming
transmit signal.
throughtiming
DS3
channelization
Whether this DS3/E3 is channelized or unchannelized. Setting this object will

cause the creation or deletion of DS2 or DS1 entries in the ifTable.
Values disabled
This interface is unchannelized.
enabledds1
This is a DS3 channelized into DS1s.
enabledds2
This is a DS3 channelized into DS2s. Not currently supported.

Parameters

circuit-id
The transmission vendor’s circuit identification number

Values string of up to 255 characters
ds1-for-remote-loop
Which DS1/E1 on this DS3/E3 will be indicated in the remote DS1 loopback
request. The type of loopback is configured in the loopback-config
parameter.
Values From 0 (zero) to 29, inclusive.
A value of 0 means no DS1s will be looped. A value of 29 means all DS1/
E1 will be looped.
far-end-equip-code
The Far End Equipment Identification code that describes the specific piece
of equipment at the other end of the link. It is sent inside the Path
Identification Message.
Values A string of 0 (zero) to ten (10) characters, inclusive.
far-end-fac-id-code
This code identifies a specific Far End DS3 path. It is sent inside the Path
Identification Message.
Values A string of 0 (zero) to ten (10) characters, inclusive.

DS3
far-end-frame-id-code
The Far End Frame Identification code that identifies where the remote
equipment is located within a building at a given location. It is sent inside the
Path Identification Message.
Values A string of 0 (zero) to 38 characters, inclusive.
far-end-loc-id-code
The Far End Location Identification code that describes the location of the
specific piece of equipment at the other end of the link. It is sent inside the
Path Identification Message.
Values A string of 0 (zero) to eleven (11) characters, inclusive.
far-end-unit-code
The Far End code that identifies the equipment location within a bay. It is sent
inside the Path Identification Message.
Values A string of 0 (zero) to six (6) characters, inclusive.
line-coding
This variable describes the variety of Zero Code Suppression used on this
interface, which in turn affects a number of interface characteristics.
Values dsx3other
dsx3b3zs
Refers to the use of specified patterns of normal bits and bipolar
violations which are used to replace sequences of zero bits of a specified
length.

Parameters
e3hdb3
High Density Bipolar of order 3. Refers to the use of specified patterns of
normal bits and bipolar violations which are used to replace sequences of
zero bits of a specified length. Used for E1 and E3.
line-length-meters
The length of the DS3 line in meters. This parameter provides information for
line build out circuitry (if it exists) and is used to adjust the line build out.
Values From 0 to 6400 meters.
line-status-trap-enable
Indicates whether line-status-trap-enable traps should be generated for this

interface.
Values enabled
disabled
line-type
The DS3 C-bit or E3 application used on this interface. The type of interface
affects the interpretation of the usage and error statistics. DS3 transmits at a
speed of 44.736 Mbps and E3 transmits at 34.368 Mbps.
Values dsx3m23
As defined in ANSI T1.107-1988 [9].
dsx3cbitparity
As defined in ANSI T1.107a-1990 [9a]
Default dsx3cbitparity

DS3
loopback-config
The loopback configuration of the DS3/E3 interface.

Values dsx3NoLoop
Not in the loopback state. A device that is not capable of performing a
loopback on the interface will always return this value.
dsx3PayloadLoop
The received signal at this interface is looped through the device.
Typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission after it has
passed through the device's framing function.
dsx3LineLoop
The received signal at this interface does not go through the device
dsx3InwardLoop
The sent signal at this interface is looped back through the device.
medium-atmframe-config
The ATM framing mode.

Values dsx3AtmFramingOther
The ATM framing format is other than PLCP or direct cell mapped.
dsx3AtmFramingPLCP
The ATM framing format is PLCP.
dsx3AtmFramingDirectCellMapped
The ATM framing format is direct cell mapped.
Default dsx3AtmFramingDirectCellMapped
medium-frame-config
The E3 framing mode.

Values e3FrameOther
An option other than e3FrameG832 or e3FrameG751.
e3FrameG832
E3 framing format will be G832.

Parameters
e3FrameG751
E3 framing format will be G751.
Default e3FrameG832
medium-scramble-config
Whether the DS3 scramble mode is enabled.

Values true
Scramble mode is enabled.
false
Scramble mode is disabled.
Default true
send-code
Indicates what type of code is being sent across the DS3 interface by the
device.
Values dsx3SendNoCode
Sending looped or normal data.
dsx3SendLineCode
Sending a request for a line loopback.
dsx3SendPayloadCode
Sending a request for a payload loopback. (All T1/E1s in the DS3.)
dsx3SendResetCode
Sending a loopback termination request.
dsx3SendDS1LoopCode
Sending a request to loopback a particular DS1/E1 within a DS3/E3
frame. The DS1/E1 is indicated in ds1-for-remote-loop parameter.
dsx3SendTestPattern
Sending a test pattern.
Default dsx3SendNoCode

DSL

Values looptiming
clock.
localtiming
transmit signal.
throughtiming
unit-mode
Specifies whether the unit is configured as a CO or CPE device.

Default For a BAN, the default is CO. For a Z-Edge, the default is CPE.
See Also config-line-rate, fix-bit-enabled
DSL
config-line-rate
The SDSL line rate.

Values line-rate-144kbps, line-rate-160kbps, line-rate-192kbps,
line-rate-208kbps, line-rate-224kbps, line-rate-256kbps,

Parameters

line-rate-2288kbps
Default line-rate-1552kbps
Location sdsl-config
connect-mode
The connection mode compatibility.

Values basic-2b1q-mode
The basic operating mode.
globespan-neg-mode
The globespan mode, when the CO and the CPE can have different rates
that sync on the lower rate.
copper-mtn-mode
The operating mode compatible with Copper Mountain products.
flowpoint-mode
The operating mode compatible with FlowPoint Corporation equipment.
Default flowpoint-mode
decoder-coeffA
The 21 bit value corresponding to the decoder coefficient A.

Default The ANSI HDSL2 default

DSL
Access read-write
Location hds12-config
decoder-coeffB
A 21 bit value corresponding to the decoder coefficient B.

Default The ANSI HDSL2 default
Location hds12-config
fix-bit-rate
Normally, if the central office (CO) and CPE select different line rates at
startup, the lower of the two rates is selected. The fix-bit-rate parameter
enables a CO unit to override the default procedure and require startup at the
rate specified in config-line-rate.
Values fix-bit-disable
This value enables automatic baud rate adaption. If the CO and CPE
devices have different line rates at startup, the lower of the two rates will
be selected.
fix-bit-enable
This value is used for static (set) baud rates.
Default fix-bit-disable
Location sdsl-config profile
Notes This setting applies only if the unit is configured as a CO device.
See Also config-line-rate, unit-mode
frame-sync-word
A 10-bit number indicating the frame sync word used.

Default The HDSL2 standard.
Location hdsl2-config
framer-type
Specifies the type of framer used.

Values atm-clear-channel
Uses direct cell mapping
atm-dllc
Uses DLCC framing specification.

Parameters
atm-g991-1
Uses framing specified in G.991.1
Default atm-clear-channel
line-status-trap-enable
Specifies whether a line status trap should be sent whenever the DSL line
goes up or down. Note that this setting does not apply to line status traps sent
during system bootup. During bootup, line status traps are not sent.
A DSL link down trap has a moderate severity level and a link up trap has a
low severity.
Values enabled
DSL line status change traps should be generated for this interface.
disabled
DSL line status change traps will not be generated for this interface.
auto
For ADSL, a trap is generated on a line status change which is not due to
a dying gasp.
Default enabled
line-type
The DSL type supported on this interface.

Values shdsl
SHDSL. Not compatible with shdsllatest firmware.
sdsl
SDSL. Not compatible with sdsllatest firmware.
shdsllatest
Compatible with future versions of firmware code. Required for
autobaud.
sdsllatest
Compatible with future versions of firmware code. Required for
autobaud.
Default shdsllatest
Location dsl-config
Notes Refer to the release notes for your device firmware revision levels.

DSL
ntr
Network timing recovery (NTR) specifies that the system synchronizes with
an external (network) clocking source.
Values ntr-enable
the system synchronizes with the network.
ntr-disable
the system relies on its own clocking source.
Default ntr-disable
pointtopoint
Specifies whether the interface is point-to-point.

Values true
false
Default false
Notes Configure DSL interfaces as pointtopoint.
power-scale
Adjusts transmit power in small increments to compensate for minor

differences in power between units. The formula for the adjustment is:
Power scale = 29952 * 10([adjustment in dB]/ 20)

The following values are recommended for different loop lengths.
Values 17664
For loop lengths from 0 to 10 feet (0 to 3.05 meters). Corresponds to
-3.39dB.
20992
For loop lengths less than 4000 feet (1219.2 meters). Corresponds to
-1.9dB.
29952
For loop lengths greater than 4000 feet (1219.2 meters). Corresponds to
-1.19dB.
Default 29952

Parameters
stuff-bits
A four bit number for the stuff bits. The default is the HDSL2 standard,
1111'b.
Default The HDSL2 standard, 1111'b.
Location hdsl2-config, hdsl2-status
threshold-15min-lofs
The number of Loss of Framing seconds on a DSL interface within any given
15 minutes performance data collection period, which causes the SNMP agent
to send a trap. Entering 0 will disable the trap.
Default 0
Location dsl-alarm
threshold-15min-lols
The number of Loss of link seconds on a DSL interface within any given 15
minutes performance data collection period, which causes the SNMP agent to
send a trap. Entering 0 will disable the trap.
Default 0
Location dsl-alarm
threshold-15min-loss
The number of Loss of signal seconds on a DSL interface within any given 15
minutes performance data collection period, which causes the SNMP agent to
send a trap. Entering 0 will disable the trap.
Default 0
Location dsl-alarm
transmit-power-back-off-mode
Whether the transmit power backoff defined in the HDSL2 standard is used.

ELCP
Values backoffdisable
backoffenable
nochangebackoff
Default backoffdisable
Location hdsl2-config
unit-mode
Specifies whether the unit is configured as a Central Office (CO) or Customer

Premise Equipment (CPE) device.
Values co
cpe
Default cpe
Location dsl-config
up-line-rate
The upstream DSL rate in bps on the interface.

Location dsl-status-profile
See Also down-rate
ELCP
audio-service
Defines a number of services for transporting audio traffic and signaling over
an AAL2 CID.
Values enabled
disabled
Default enabled
Location aal2-elcp-port
isdn-channel-id
ISDN BRI ports.

Values 0
D channel and POTS

Parameters
1
First B channel
2
Second B channel
Location subscriber-voice-aal2-elcp
line-group-id
The line group ID for this ELCP AAL2 connection.

max-length-frame
Maximum length for frame mode data.

max-sdu-length
Indicates the maximum size of the SSSAR-SDU, in octets, that is allowed to

be reassembled.
pcm-encoding
Voice encoding algorithm.

Values mulaw
alaw
Default alaw
port-id
Identifies a port on the IAD side for this ELCP AAL2 connection.
port-type
The port type for the IAD port for the current connection.

ELCP
preferred-ap-index
Index for the preferred audio encoding format within the Audio Profile.
Values 1
2
Default 1
voice-connection-type
This describes the connection type between the two voice endpoints. Where
applicable the first endpoint refers to the line or premise side of the
connection and the second endpoint refers to the central office side of the
connection.
Values aal2togr303
AAL2 VPI/VCI/CID to GR-303 interface group/CRV.
aal2tov52
AAL2 VPI/VCI/CID to V5.2 interface/user port.
elcpaal2tov52
ECLP AAL2 to V5.2.
potstoaal2
POTs to AAL2.
isdntoaal2
ISDN to AAL2.
isdntov52
ISDN to V5.2 interface/user port
potstogr303
POTS to GR-303 interface group/CRV.
potstov52
POTS to V5.2 interface/user port.
elcpaal2tov52
ELCP AAL2 VPI/VCI/portId/portType to V52.
Location subscriber-voice

Parameters
Ethernet
adminstatus
The administrative status of the Ethernet physical and logical interface.

Values Up
The interface is enabled and up, and the status of the interface should
become standby or operational
Down
The interface is disabled and down, and the status of the interface should
become shutdown.
Location ether
autoNegCap
The capabilities of the Ethernet interface that are advertised by this port. Note
that multiple options can be specified by adding a plus (+) sign between
entries.
This parameter also controls flow control, which is used to regulate the flow
of traffic between endpoints. Flow control cause the transmitter to stop
sending traffic if it receives a pause message from an overwhelmed far end.
For more information on flow control refer to IEEE 802.3-2000.
Values bOther
Other or unknown
b100baseT4
Advertise 100BASE-T4
b100baseT2
Advertise 100BASE-T2 half duplex mode
b100baseT2FD
Advertise 100BASE-T2 full duplex mode
b10baseT
Advertise speed 10Mbps, duplex half and full
b10baseTFD
Advertise speed 10Mbps, duplex full
b100baseTX
Advertise 100BASE-TX half duplex mode
b100baseX
Advertise 100BaseX
b100baseT
Advertise speed 100Mbps, duplex half and full

Ethernet
b100baseTXFD
Advertise 100BASE-TX full duplex
b100baseXFD
Advertise 100BaseX full duplex
b100baseTFD
b1000baseX
Advertise 1000BaseX full duplex
b1000baseT
Advertise 1000Mbps, duplex full
b1000baseXFD
1000BaseX full duplex
b1000baseTFD
bFdxPause
Advertise pause for full duplex links
bFdxBPause
Advertise Full (symmetric and asymmetric) flow control
bFdxAPause
Advertise Asymmetric flow control
bFdxSPause
Advertise Symmetric flow control
autonegstatus
Enables autonegotiation. When enabled, the interface will negotiate the

options specified in the autoNegCap parameter.
Values enabled
Negotiate link attributes with remote partner. Final link rate, duplex, and
flow control, are determined by the advertised capabilities on each end.
The link will settle on a speed/duplex based on the hierarchy described in
the IEEE 802.3-2000 document.
disabled
Do not negotiate. Link speed and duplex will be forced to the parameters
indicated in the 'mauType' field. If the other end does not advertise those
parameters (when in autonegotiate mode), or if the other end wants to
force the link to a different speed/duplex combination, there will no link.
Default enabled
Location ether
Notes If set to disabled, the interface is the same as specified in the ifType
parameter.

Parameters
clksrc
Determines which side of the link will provide clocking for the link.
If both sides are configured for automatic, both ends of the link negotiate
which will be the master and which will be the slave based on the rules in
IEEE 802.3-2000. If both sides are configured the same (either as master or as
slave) the link will not be established.
Values automatic
The clock source is selected based on the rules in the IEEE 802.3-2000.
This is the recommended setting.
master
The local side will attempt to provide clock for the link.
slave
The local will attempt to recover clock from the clock generated by the far
end of the link.
Default automatic
Location ether
Notes Applies to Gigabit Ethernet ports only.
ifType
The type of Ethernet. Should be set to the same value as the mauType.
Values mauOther
Supported on UTP
mau10Baset
Supported on UTP
mau10Basethd
Supported on UTP
mau10Basetfd
Supported on UTP
mau100Basetxhd
Supported on UTP
mau100Basetxfd
Supported on UTP
mau1000basethd
Supported on UTP
mau1000basetfd
Supported on UTP
mau1000baselxhd
Supported on fiber

Ethernet
mau1000baselxfd
Supported on fiber
mau1000basesxhd
Not supported
mau1000basesxfd
Not supported
Location ether
mauType
Ethernet physical interface type.

Values mauOther
Supported on UTP
mau10Baset
Supported on UTP
mau10Basethd
Supported on UTP
mau10Basetfd
Supported on UTP
mau100Basetxhd
Supported on UTP
mau100Basetxfd
Supported on UTP
mau1000basethd
Supported on UTP
mau1000basetfd
Supported on UTP
mau1000baselxhd
Supported on fiber
mau1000baselxfd
Supported on fiber
mau1000basesxhd
Not supported
mau1000basesxfd
Not supported
Default mau100basetxfd (for all Ethernet interfaces except Gigabit)
mau1000baselxfd (Gigabit Ethernet)
Location ether

Parameters
protection-fast-timer
The protection messages fast timer. The fast timer is used for protection
protocols.
Values 1 to 20 milliseconds
Default 10 milliseconds
protection-slow-timer
This timer indicates how often the node sends out slow status messages when
a protection event occurs. This value is in 50 millisecond (ms) intervals. For
example, a value of 100 equals 5 seconds.
Values 1 to 200 (in 50 millisecond units)
Default 20 (1 second)
protection-wtr
The length of time in seconds, to remain in the protection state, after the cause
for the switch to protection is removed. This prevents protection switch
oscillations.
Default 10 seconds
remotefault
Indicates the state of the remote end of the Ethernet link.

Values noerror
Link is operating normally.
offline
Other end is not attempting to establish a link.
linkfailure
Failed to establish a link. This could be caused by different settings on
either end of the link.
autonegerror
Failed to establish a link because a matching combination could not be
found in the advertised autonegotiation capabilities.
Location ether
restart
Forces auto-negotiation to begin link renegotiation. If auto-negotiation

signaling is disabled, this parameter has no effect.

FXS/FXO
Values restart
Forces auto-negotiation to begin link renegotiation. The Ethernet
interface also renegotiates the link whenever the ether profile is saved.
norestart
This value is not supported.
Location ether
reversion-mode
The reversion mode determines if traffic resumes processing in the normal

direction after a protection event is cleared.
Values true
false
wrap-config
Indicates the configured protection mode, steering or wrapping, in a MAC

that supports both modes.
If the node detects another station on the ring that has a protection
configuration that conflicts with its own, the station will generate a defect to
higher layers.
Values true
The ring is configured for wrapping. The station will perform wrap
protection during ring failures. In a wrapping configuration, the two
nodes on either end of the disrupted link will “wrap” the traffic back away
from the broken link.
false
The ring is configured for steering. In a steering configuration, each node
of the ring is responsible for determining how to route traffic around the
disrupted link. For large networks, traffic could be slower to recover if
steering is used.
FXS/FXO
fxo-cfg-signal-type
The signaling type of foreign exchange office (FXO) interface.

Values fxoloopstart
Loop start.
fxogroundstart
Ground start.

Parameters
fxodpt
Dial Pulse Terminating. This option allows the unit to attach to incoming
one way trunks from a PBX, key system, or a telephone set.
Default fxoloopstart
Location analog-fxo-cfg-profile
if-cfg-impedence
Specifies the terminating impedance of analog voice interfaces.

Values ohms600complex
600 Ohms + 2.16uF
ohms900complex
900 Ohms + 2.16uF
Default ohms900complex
Location analog-if-cfg-profile
if-cfg-trunk-conditioning
Specifies whether the FXS/FXO port should send the idle pattern to the
network upon declaration of a Carrier Group Alarm (CGA) on the WAN link
to which the port is assigned.
Values off
idle
busy
Default idle
if-maintenance-mode
Indicates the maintenance modes of the analog voice interface.

Values off
ifdigitalloopback
ifanalogloopback
Default off
if-cfg-pcm-encoding
Line encoding.

FXS/FXO
Values alaw
For E1.
mulaw
For T1.
Default mulaw
Notes This parameter can also be set with the voice add command when the voice
connection is created.
if-cfg-receive-tlp
The receive TLP is the signal level TO the customer premises equipment
(CPE). The receive signal range is +3 dB to -9 dB. A positive number adds
gain, a negative number adds loss to the analog signal after decoding from
PCM. For example, a receive TLP setting of -6 dB will generate a voice signal
at -6 dB level.
Values fxsrtlpn9db
fxsrtlpn8db
fxsrtlpn7db
fxsrtlpn6db
fxsrtlpn5db
fxsrtlpn4db
fxsrtlpn3db
(not supported on the POTS 900 card)
fxsrtlpn2db
fxsrtlpn1db
fxsrtlp0db
fxsrtlp1db
fxsrtlp2db
fxsrtlp3db
rtlpnummeric
Default fxsrtlpn6db

Parameters
if-cfg-receive-tlpNum
Receive Transmission Level Point (RTLP) settings control the amount gain or
loss added to the incoming signal after it is decoded to analog. To increase the
signal level set the RTLP setting to higher values. The default is 0 dB.
Values -160 to 85 (in tenths of dB)
Default 0 dB
if-cfg-transmit-tlp
The transmit TLP is the signal level from the customer premises equipment
(CPE). The transmit signal range is +9 dB to -3 dB. A positive number adds
loss, a negative number adds gain to the analog signal before encoding to
PCM. For example, a transmit TLP setting of +3 dB will set a loss of 3 dB to
generate a 0 dB PCM signal.
Values fxsTtlp9db
fxsTtlp8db
fxsTtlp7db
fxsTtlp6db
fxsTtlp5db
fxsTtlp4db
fxsTtlp3db
fxsTtlp2db
fxsTtlp1db
fxsTtlp0db
fxsTtlpN1db
fxsTtlpN2db
fxsTtlpN3db
Default fxsttlp0db
if-cfg-transmit-tlpNum
Transmit Transmission Level Point (TTLP) controls the amount of gain or

loss added to a voice signal before it is encoded to digital PCM. To increase
the signal level, reduce the TTLP setting to lower value.

FXS/FXO
Values -175 to 70 (in tenths of dB)

Default 0 dB
ring-back
Specifies whether ring back is requested.

Values on
off
Default off
Location analog-fxs-cfg-profile
ring-frequency
The ring frequency used in the FXS interface.

Values ringFrequency25
Ring frequency of 25 Hz.
ringFrequency50
ringFrequency20
Ring frequency of 20 Hz
ringFrequency30
Default ringFrequency20
signal-type
The signaling of the FXS interface.

Values fxsLoopStartsloop
Loop start.
fxsGroundStart
Ground start.
fxsLoopStartFd
fxsGroundStartAutomatic
Used with equipment requiring fast response time to the Central Office
(CO).
fxsGroundStartImmediate
Used with equipment requiring fast response time to the station or private
branch exchange (PBX).

Parameters
fxsdnLoopStart
Loop start in FXSDN mode.
fxsdnLoopStartFd
fxsdnGroundStart
Ground start in FXSDN mode
fxsdnGroundStartImmediate
Ground start immediate in FXSDN mode
fxsdnwinkLoopStart
Loop start in fxsdnwink (Foreign Exchange Subscriber Defined Wink
start). This is the same type of signaling as FXSDN. It provides 150
millisecond delay, then a 200 ms wink acknowledgement to the central
office when the FXS port sees an off-hook condition from central office.
The system requires a ringing generator for this option.
fxsdnwinkLoopStartFd
fxsdnwinkGroundStart
Ground start in FXSDNWINK mode
fxsdnwinkGroundStartImmediate
Ground start immediate in FXSDNWINK mode.
fxstr08SingleParty
TR08 is Frame format signaling and data link as defined in
TR-TSY-00008 Mode 1 for circuits using AT & T SLC-96 facilities. This
option is for single-party service. This option connects the port to one
way outgoing trunks from a PBX, CENTEREX, key system, or telephone
set to an SLC channel. The SLC96 mode also must be active on the
associated WAN interface.
fxstr08UniversalVoiceGrade
Toll-quality voice for SLC-96.
fxstr08UniversalVoiceGradeAutomatic
Used with some non-Bell switches for SLC-96.
Default fxsLoopStartsloop
voice-pots-line-group-id
The line group identifier for the POTS line, equal to the ifIndex of the line.
Location subscriber-voice-pots

GR303
GR303
adminStatus
A value that is received from a remote management system (Zhone

Management System) to place the unit in service or out of service.
Values inService
outOfService
Default outOfService
Location gr303-interface-group
channel-number
The channel number for this array.

Values 1 to16, inclusive
control-channel-t303
The time that the Integrated Digital Terminal (IDT) and the Remote Digital
Terminal (RDT) will wait for a reply to a SETUP message. This value
depends upon the IDT.
Values 700, 1200, 1700, 2200, 2700, 3200, 3700, 4200, or 4700 ms.
Default 700
Location gr303-ig-control-channel
control-channel-t396
The time that the RDT will wait for a reply to a SETUP message after the
expiration of the T303 timer.
Values 700, 1700, 2700, 3700, 4700, 5700, 6700, 7700, 8700, 9700, 10700, 11700,
12700, 13700, or 14700 ms.
Default 14700

Parameters
ctrlChannel
The GR-303 IG control channel array. This array includes the

control-channel-t303, control-channel-t396,
sapi-0-max-outstanding-frames, sapi-1-max-outstanding-frames,
sapi-0-n-200, sapi-1-n-200, sapi-0-t-200, sapi-1-t-200, sapi-0-t-203,
sapi-1-t-203, sapi-0-pps-mode, and sapi-1-pps-mode parameters.
ds1LM:array[1..28]
The array for T1/DS1 circuits. The maximum number of DS1 trunks allowed
per IG is 28. This array includes the dsn-lg-id, channel-number, and role
parameters.
idt-admin-state
The administrative state of the IDT on the remote side of the GR-303
interface.
Values inService
The default for Call Reference Values (CRV) whose IG has
working-mode set to passive.
outOfService
The default for CRVs whose IG has working-mode set to active.
Location gr303-ig-crv
local-admin-state
The administrative state of the CRV on the local (RDT) side.

Values inService
outOfService
logical-id
This is an unique number to identify each physical DS1 within an Interface

Group between RDT and IDT.

GR303

Notes The DS1 Logical ID must have a value in the range of 1..28. The value 1 is
reserved for the primary DS1 and cannot be used by any other DS1s.
name-id
A name assigned by the installer. It must be unique to the system. This value
is a string.
rdt-admin-state
The administrative state of the RDT on the local side of the GR-303 interface.
Values inService
outOfService
remote-admin-state
The administrative state of the CRV on the remote (IDT) side.

Values inService
The default for CRVs whose IG has working-mode set to passive.
outOfService
The default for CRVs whose IG has working-mode set to active.
role
The role the DS1 line assumes.

Values payload
secondary
primary
Default payload

Parameters
sapi-0-max-outstanding-frames
For SAPI=1 and SAPI=2, for both the active and standby data links, per IG,
the maximum number of outstanding EOC information frames at layer 2. This
LAPD parameter facilitates remote provisioning of the layer 2 connection.
Default 7
sapi-0-n-200
the maximum number of retransmissions for a frame at layer 2. This LAPD
parameter facilitates remote provisioning of the layer 2 connection.
Default 3
sapi-0-pps-mode
The DS1 protection switching option.Facility protection switching enables

traffic on a failed DS1 to be moved to one or more alternate DS1 facilities.
Values inhibit
notInhibited
notApplicable
Default notInhibited
sapi-0-t-200
the maximum layer 2 wait time for an acknowledgement of a transmitted
frame in milliseconds. This LAPD parameter facilitates remote provisioning
of the layer 2 connection.
Values 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, or 350.
Default 150

GR303
sapi-0-t-203
the maximum layer 2 idle time, in seconds, before connection verification is
necessary. This LAPD parameter facilitates remote provisioning of the layer 2
connection.
Values 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180,
190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, or 300.
Default 30
sapi-1-max-outstanding-frames
the maximum number of outstanding TMC information frames at layer 2.
This LAPD parameter facilitates remote provisioning of the layer 2
connection. (This parameter is not supported.)
Default 7
sapi-1-n-200
the maximum number of retransmissions for a frame at layer 2. This LAPD
parameter facilitates remote provisioning of the layer 2 connection. (This
parameter is not supported)
Default 3
sapi-1-pps-mode
The DS1 protection switching option. Facility protection switching enables

traffic on a failed DS1 to be moved to one or more alternate DS1 facilities.

Parameters
Values inhibit
notInhibited
notApplicable
Default notInhibited
sapi-1-t-200
the maximum layer 2 wait time for an acknowledgement of a transmitted
frame in milliseconds. This LAPD parameter facilitates remote provisioning
of the layer 2 connection.
Values 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, or 350.
Default 150
Notes Unsupported
sapi-1-t-203
the maximum layer 2 idle time, in seconds, before connection verification is
necessary. This LAPD parameter facilitates remote provisioning of the layer 2
connection.
Values 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180,
190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, or 300.
Default 30
Notes Unsupported
signal-type
The signaling method used by the CRV. This value is set by the voice switch
through the EOC or it is set in the gr303-ig-crv profile.

IfIndex
Values unknown
loopstart
groundstart
loopreversebattery
electronicbesinessset
Default loopstart
switch-type
The switch vendor for the Interface Group (IG).

Values unknown
lucent5Ess
nortelDms100
Default unknown
working-mode
Indicates whether the Integrated Digital Terminal (IDT) can configure the
Remote Digital Terminal (RDT) for Call Reference Values (CRV) using
common management information service (CMIS) over the Embedded
Operations Channel (EOC).
Values active
The IDT can configure the RDT for CRV over the EOC channel.
passive
CRVs can only be configured locally.
Default passive
IfIndex
adminStatus
The default value for the upper ifIndex associated with the upperiftype.

Parameters
Values up
down
testing
Default down
Location if-default
ifindex
The interface number of the port or port/subport that uniquely identifies the
interface across the system.
Location physical-to-ifindex, if-translate
ifname
Name of the interface.

Allowable characters are:
0123456789abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ:.- and _.
.Do not begin if-name with a ".".
If an invalid character is used, it will be replaced with the "-" character. If the
repaired if-name is not unique, the ifIndex value is appended to the if-name to
make the name unique.
Location if-translate
iftype-extension
The Zhone-proprietary interface type.

Values ianaiftype_other
zhoneiftype_linegroup
zhoneiftype_none
Default zhoneiftype_none

IfIndex
numunits
Number of units for this association. This indicates the number of ifIndexes
created for this particular upper and lower interface pair on the card type. For
example, 48 for the SDSL/SHDSL card.
Location if-default
physical-flag
Indicates whether the interface is a physical layer.

Values true
The interface is a physical layer.
false
The interface is a not a physical layer.
Default false
port
The port number defines the physical port number at the shelf-slot location for
the line profile. Port numbers begin with 1 and are numbered sequentially.
Notes 0 (zero) is invalid.
redundancy-param1
For physicals, this parameter is a weight value indicating which physical will
be the active and which physical will be the standby for redundancy. For
linegroups and pathgroups, this parameter indicates how to perform reversion.
Values -1
Do not revert the redundancy switch.
0
Revert back to the restored connection as soon as it is available.
Positive number
Number of seconds to wait after the restored connection is available until
reverting back to that connection.

Parameters

shelf
The physical address or number of the shelf where the desired line is located.
A Zhone system is limited to a maximum of 255 shelves. The first shelf in a
system is shelf 1.
slot
The physical slot on the system.

subport
Used to identify multiple logical subports on a physical port.

Notes A value of 0 (zero) indicates that there is no subport.
IMA
groupSymmetry
The symmetry of the Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) group.

Symmetry determines whether the transmit and receive sides of the IMA link
must be configured and how traffic is sent over the links.
Values symmetricOperation
Both transmit and receive IMA links must be configured and the system
can transmit and receive traffic only if both sides of the connection are
active.
asymmetricOperation
Both transmit and receive IMA links must be configured, but the system
can transmit and receive traffic even if both sides of the connection are
not active.

IMA
asymmetricConfiguration
Transmit and receive links do not have to be configured and the system
can transmit and receive traffic even if both sides of the connection are
not active.
Default symmetricOperation
Location ima-group-profile
Notes Refer to ATM Forum IMA v1.1, Section 5.2.2.7.
minNumTxLinks
Minimum number of transmit links required to be Active for the IMA group
to be in the Operational state. If the number of active links falls below this
value, the link drops and the redundant link (if any) takes over.
Values 1 to 32
Products MALC
minNumRxLinks
Minimum number of receive links required to be active for the IMA group to
be in the operational state. If the number of active links falls below this value,
the link drops and the redundant link (if any) takes over.
Values 1 to 32
txClkMode
Transmit clocking mode used by the near-end IMA group.

Values itc
Independent Transmit Clock. Indicates that IMA links do not all use the
same transmit clock. Each IMA link derives clock from its associated T1
interface.
ctc
Common Transmit Clock. Indicates the transmit clock of all IMA links
are derived from the same source. When set to ctc, the MALC derives the
IMA clocking from the system clock.

Parameters
Default itc
Notes Refer to ATM Forum IMA v1.1, Section 7.
txImaId
The IMA ID currently in use by the near-end IMA function.

Values 0 to 255
Notes Refer to ATM Forum IMA v1.1, Section 5.2.2.6
txFramLength
The frame length to be used by the IMA group in the transmit direction. Can
only be set when the IMA group is startup.
Values m32
32 cells.
m64
64 cells.
m128
128 cells.
m256
256 cells.
Default m128
Notes Refer to ATM Forum IMA v1.1, Section 5.2.2.4.2
diffDelayMax
The maximum number of milliseconds of differential delay among the links

that can be tolerated on this interface.
Values 0 to 100
Default 25
Notes Refer to ATM Forum IMA v1.1, Section 9.2 on page 45.

IMA
alphaValue
The number of consecutive invalid ICP cells allowed before the system
changes from a Sync state to a Hunt state.
Values 1 or 2
Default 2
Notes Refer to ATM Forum IMA v1.1, Section 11 on page 68
betaValue
The number of consecutive ICP cells with errors allowed before the system
changes from a Sync state to a Hunt state.
Values 1 to 5
Default 2
gammaValue
The number of consecutive valid ICP cells allowed before the system changes
from a PreSync state to the Sync state.
Values 1 to 5
Default 1
testLinkIfIndex
Indicates the interface used to transmit the test pattern. The test pattern is
looped back from the far end device over each active link in the IMA group.
Note that this value is not the same as the txImaId value.
Values A valid interface on the system in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/type
This is the link whose link identifier (LID) value is inserted in the Tx LID
field of the transmitted ICP cells.
Default 0

Parameters

testPattern
Specifies the transmit Test Pattern in an IMA group loopback operation. A

value in the range 0 to 254 designates a specific pattern.
Values -1 to 254
-1 indicates that the test pattern is randomly generated.
Default -1
testProcStatus
Enables or disables the Test Pattern Procedure.

Values disabled
Deactivates the test pattern procedure.
operating
Activates the test pattern procedure.
Default disabled
txTimingRefLink
The ifIndex of the receive timing reference link to be used by near-end for
IMA data cell clock recovery toward the ATM layer. A value of 0 (zero)
indicates no link has been configured in the IMA group, or the receive timing
reference link has not yet been detected.
Values 0
Default 0
Notes This parameter is not supported.

IP
rxTimingRefLink
The ifIndex of the transmit timing reference link to be used by near-end for
IMA data cell clock recovery toward the ATM layer. A value of 0 (zero)
indicates no link has been configured in the IMA group, or the receive timing
reference link has not yet been detected.
Values 0
Default 0
Notes This parameter is not supported.
IP
addr
The address of the IP interface.

alternateipaddress
A second IP address for this device that can be used by managers to address
the device. This address may be an IP address of an existing IP interface.
Location system
Notes A manager can communicate with the device using any of the configured IP
interface addresses. However, if the physical line fails or the card is inactive,
communication with the manager may time-out.
bcastaddr
The IP broadcast address used for sending data grams on the (logical)
interface associated with the IP interface. The broadcast address is determined
by the IP address and the netmask. It should always be set to an IP address
which is the network address of the interface that has all ones in the host
portion of the address.
bcastenabled
Specifies whether broadcasts are enabled on this interface.

Parameters
Values yes
no
Default yes
destaddr
The destination address for point-to-point IP interfaces.

Notes This parameter is ignored if the IP interface is not point-to-point.
dhcpserverenable
Enables or disables DHCP server functionality.

Values true
false
Default false
Notes If this parameter is set to true, then ipaddrdynamic parameter has to be set to
static. If this parameter is set to false, then ipaddrdynamic parameter can be
set to static, ppp, or dhcpclient.
See Also ipaddressdynamic
egressfilterid
The index of the egress filter spec provisioned for this interface.
A value of 0 (zero) means that there is no egress filter provisioned for this
interface.
Default 0
enable
Specifies the administrative state of the static route.

Values enabled
The static route is used by the system to make forwarding decisions.

IP
disabled
The static route is not used by the system to make forwarding decisions.
Default enabled
Location static-route
farendaddr
The IP address of the interface on the far end, or receiving end, of this
interface. This information is used for Zhone Automatic Provisioning (ZAP).
ipaddrdynamic
The mode by which the IP address is discovered by the system.

Values static
The IP address is static.
dhcpclient
The IP address is discovered from a DHCP server.
ppp
Use PPP to obtain an IP address.
Default static
See Also dhcpserverenable
ipfwdenabled
Specifies whether IP forwarding is enabled on this interface.

Values true
false
Default true
ingressfilterid
The index of the ingress filter spec provisioned for this interface.

Parameters

A value of 0 (zero) means that there is no ingress filter provisioned for
this interface.
Default 0
ipUnnumberedinterface
This value specifies where to borrow the local IP address of the

point-to-multipoint link.
Location ip-unnumbered-record
local-ipaddr
A local (or private) address of a host behind the Z-Edge 64, which is the real
destination.
Location pat-bind
local-port
The port number on the local host where packets should be forwarded.
Location pat-bind
maxVideoStreams
The maximum number of unique multicast (video) streams to which this

interface has subscribed.
Default 0
mcastcontrollist
List of Mcast-control-ids this IP Interface record is associated with.

mcastenabled
Specifies whether multicast is enabled on this interface.

IP
Values true
false
Default true
mcastfwdenabled
Specifies whether multicast forwarding is enabled on this interface.

Values true
false
Default true
metric
Metric for the route. The meaning of this value when static routes are
redistributed to other protocols is protocol-dependent, and the resulting value
after redistribution is determined by the route-maps in use for that protocol.
Lower numeric values for this number indicate more preferred routes.
Default 2147483647
Location static-route
mru
The size, in octets, of the largest packet which can be received on the IP
interface. For interfaces used for network data grams, this is the size of the
largest network datagram that can be received on the interface.
The default value depends on the type of interface and is the same as the
default MTU for the interface.
multicastAgingPeriod
Multicast aging period (in tenths of seconds) for the specified VLAN. After
the specified aging period is met, the VLAN address is deleted from the
routing table.

Parameters
Values 0 to 2147483647 (in tenths of seconds)

A value of 0 indicates that aging is turned off.
Access This parameter is read-create.
Location static-bridge
natenabled
Specifies whether NAT is enabled on this interface.

Values true
false
Default false
netmask
The subnet mask associated with the IP interface. The value of the mask is an
IP address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the hosts bits set to 0.
Location dhcp-server-subnet, ip-interface-record
portType
The type of payload.

Values tcp
Transmission control protocol.
udp
User datagram protocol.
Default tcp
Location pat-bind
public-ipaddr
The IP address that will be used in the Internet. (This should be the IP address
of the DSL connection.)
Location pat-bind
public-port
The port on the Internet side that the public sees.

IP
Location pat-bind
rdindex
The routing domain to which the IP interface belongs. An IP address is unique

to a routing domain.
reasmmaxsize
The size of the largest IP datagram that this interface can reassemble from
fragmented IP datagrams this interface receives.
Values 0 (zero) to 65535, inclusive
Default 65535
subnetgroup
The DHCP subnet group ID. It indicates which address pool grouping may be
used for the CPE subnet.
Location ip-interface-record, dhcp-server-subnet
type
Defines the video stream type.

Values normal
Join and leave when desired. Used for video.
always on
Always joined. Meant for Emergency Broadcast System (EBS) channel.
Not meant for video.
periodic
Join and leave after task complete. For example, used to download the tv
guide. Not meant for video.
Default normal
Location mcast-control-entry
unnumberedindex
The index of the ip-unnumbered-record used to obtain the local-side

unnumbered address.

Parameters
upperiftype
The value of ifType corresponding to the higher sublayer of the relationship,

that is, the sublayer that runs on top of the sublayer identified by the
corresponding instance of loweriftype.
Location if-default
upperlayer
The shelf-slot-port-subport/type of the upper layer in the interface stack.

Location if-stack
vlanId
The Virtual LAN Identifier for the IP Interface. If the VLAN ID specified is
non-zero, all traffic destined to this interface should be configured with this
VLAN ID.
Default 0
Products MALC
ISDN
isdn-env-func-start-address
The envelope function starting address that the ISDN primary rate access is
assigned to.
Location v52-interface-group
isdnds-cpath-id
If the user port is configured for ISDN, this parameter is equal to the
associated C-path ID that carries Ds-type data. A value of 0 (zero) indicates
that the user port is not configured to carry Ds-type data.

ISDN
Location v52-user-port
line-group-id
Identifies the physical line or line group (primary and redundant secondary)
used for data and voice traffic. This is a unique number that is assigned when
a line redundancy group is provisioned. This enables administrators to locate
the physical lines (defined by the line group entry ID) used by the subscriber.
The line-group-id is used to associate a subscriber with data and voice
subscriber profiles.
Location subscriber-voice-isdn
ulc-port-type
Identifies the ULC port provisioning. There is one entry per ULC port.
Values pots
isdn
ebs
Default isdn
Location ulc-config
Notes isdn is the only supported option.
Products MALC
ulc-trap-enable
Enables the sending of line-level traps from the device to SNMP managers.
Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ulc-config
Products MALC
voice-isdn-channel-id
The channel identifier for the connection.

Values 0
Not applicable. This is the value for POTS.
1
D channel

Parameters
2
B channel
3
B channel
Default 0 (none)
voice-isdn-line-group-id
The line group identifier for the ISDN line, equal to the ifIndex of the line.
Use the linegroup command to find the line group ID for an interface.
voice-isdn-port-type
Defines the type of ISDN channel: D channel or B channel.

Values isdndchannel
isdnbchannel
MTAC/Ring
ifIndex
Specifies the ifindex of the physical line to be tested. If no line is being tested,
this value is 0.
Values A physical interface on the system.
In the format shelf-slot-port-subport/type
Default 0
Location mtac-profile
Notes This parameter cannot be modified while a test is in progress.
The ability of a physical line to support a metallic test may vary depending on
the cards installed and the external test equipment.
Products MALC
ringSource
The ifIndex of the interface from which clock can be derived. Only OC3,
DS1, and DS3 interfaces can be used for this interface.

Network Time Protocol
This interface will be used to drive the 8Khz backplane signal. The interface
must be set to loop or local timing in order for it to be considered as the
primary clock source. It must also be administratively turned on and be in an
operational state.
Only one interface in the system can be the primary clock source at any given
time.
Values externalRingSourceLabel
internalRingSourceLabel
Default internalRingSourceLabel
Location system
test_mode
Specifies metallic test mode for a given line. The test mode can be changed
only if the ifIndex parameter is set to a nonzero value.
Values mtacModeBridge
The subscriber line is metallically connected to the MTAC test access port
while the subscriber is in service. To avoid service interruption, the test
head must be in high impedance (bridge) mode.
mtacModeLookIn
The subscriber line is disconnected and the service port is metallically
routed to the MTAC test access port. This allows the testing of the device
service port using a external test head or where the test head represents
the subscriber terminal.
mtacModeLookOut
The device service port is disconnected and the subscriber line is
metallically routed to the MTAC test access port. This allows the testing
of line with or without a subscriber terminal.
mtacModeNone
No MTAC test is in progress.
Default mtacModeNone
Location mtac-profile
Products MALC

primary-ntp-server-ip-address
The IP address of the primary Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.

Parameters
NTP, described in RFC 2030, synchronizes devices on the network with a

timing source. When NTP is enabled, setting the system time with the
setdatetime command is not allowed.
The device will get the time from the NTP server every hour. If the system
clock has drifted more than 9 seconds from the source clock, the system time
will be reset.
Values A valid IP address
A value of 0.0.0.0 disables NTP.
Default 0.0.0.0
Location ntp-client-config
secondary-ntp-server-ip-address
The IP address of the secondary NTP server. If the primary NTP server is not
available, the BAN will use the secondary server.
Values A valid IP address
A value of 0.0.0.0 disables NTP.
Default 0.0.0.0
local-timezone
The time zone the device is operating in.

Values internationalDateLineWest
GMT-12:00 hours
nome
GMT-11:00
hawaii
GMT-10:00
yukon
GMT-9:00
pacific
GMT-8:00
mountain
GMT-7:00
central
GMT-6:00
eastern
GMT-5:00

atlantic
GMT-4:00
newfoundland
GMT-3:30
brasilia
GMT-3:00
azores
GMT-2:00
westAfrica
GMT-1:00
gmt
GMT/UTC
centralEuropean
GMT+1:00
easternEurope
GMT+2:00
baghdad
GMT+3:00
tehran
GMT+3:30
uae
GMT+4:00
afghanistan
GMT+4:30
islamabad
GMT+5:00
india
GMT+5:30
kathmandu
GMT+5:45
dhaka
GMT+6:00
rangoon
GMT+6:30
bangkok
GMT+7:00
chinaCoast
GMT+8:00
japan
GMT+9:00

Parameters
australia
GMT+9:30
guam
GMT+10:00
magadan
GMT+11:00
newZealand
GMT+12:00
rawakiIslands
GMT+13:00
lineIslands
GMT+14:00
Default gmt
PON
auto-learn
Auto-learn enable flag. This sets up password-protection on the connection

between OLT and ONU.
Values oltautolearndisable
You must set a password for the connection between OLT and ONU.
oltautolearnenable
The OLT automatically learns the password for the connection between
OLT and ONU.
Default oltautolearndisable
Location olt-config
guaranteed-bw
The sum of the guaranteed-bw and maximum-bw parameter values for all
the ports should be less than or equal to the upstream bit rate (155 Mb/second)
of the PON OLT card.
Location olt-traf-cont
Notes The guaranteed-bw and maximum-bw parameter values in the olt-traf-cont
profile must be a multiple of 63.
The guaranteed-bw and maximum-bw parameter values in the olt-traf-cont
profile should be equal.

PPPoA
maximum-bw
The sum of the guaranteed-bw and maximum-bw parameter values for all
the ports should be less than or equal to the upstream bit rate (155 Mb/second)
of the PON OLT card.
Location olt-traf-cont
Notes The guaranteed-bw and maximum-bw parameter values in the olt-traf-cont
profile must be a multiple of 63.
The guaranteed-bw and maximum-bw parameter values in the olt-traf-cont
profile should be equal.
olt-onu-password
ONU remote-device password.

Location olt-onu-config
olt-onu-serial-num
ONU remote-device serial number. Usually the ZRG.

Location olt-onu-config
PPPoA
accm-enable
Enable or disable Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM)

negotiation.
Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-lcp
acfc-enable
Enable or disable Address and Control Field Compression (ACFC)

negotiation.
Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled

Parameters

Location ppp-lcp
callback-dial-string
The dialing string used for a callback. The format of this string is determined
by callback-type.
Values 0 to 0
Default empty string
Location ppp-lcp
Notes This object only applies when callback negotiation is enabled using
callback-enable.
callback-enable
Enable or disable callback negotiation. Provides a method for an

implementation to request a dial-up peer to call back.
Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-lcp
callback-type
The method of determining the location to callback.

Values byauth
Location is determined by authorization information.
bydialstr
Location is determined by a dialing string.
byidentifier
Location is determined by a location ID.
bye164
Location is determined by an E.164 number.
byename
Location is determined by a distinguished name.
Default byauth

PPPoA
Location ppp-lcp
Notes These objects only apply when callback negotiation is enabled using
callback-enable.
call-mode
Indicates where the PPP call is initiated.

Values nocall
No call is initiated.
incall
Call is initiated remotely.
outcall
Call is initiated locally.
Default nocall
Location ppp-interface
chap-enable
Enables or disables Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP).

Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-auth
chap-name
The username for authenticating with the CHAP protocol.

Location ppp-auth
chap-secret
The password for authenticating with the CHAP protocol.

Location ppp-aut

Parameters
comp-slot-id
Indicates whether the slot identifier field may be compressed.

Values enabled
The slot identifier may be compressed.
disabled
The slot identifier must not be compressed. All compressed TCP packets
must set the C bit in every change mask, and must include the slot
identifier.
Default disabled
Location ppp-ncp
fcs-alt-enable
Enable or disable Frame Check Sequence (FCS) alternative negotiation. The

negotiated FCS values take effect only during Authentication and
Network-Layer Protocol phases.
Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-lcp
fcs-size
The size of the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) in bits, the local node will
attempt to negotiate for use with the remote node.
Values 16
Default 16
Location ppp-lcp
Notes Regardless of the value of this object, the local node will comply with any
FCS size negotiations initiated by the remote node, per the PPP specification.
Changing this parameter will take effect when the link is next restarted.
frame-type
Indicates which type of framing is used.

PPPoA
Values atmllc
atmvc
Default atmllc
initial-mru
The initial Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) that the local PPP entity will
advertise to the remote entity.
Values 128 to 65535
Default 1500
Location ppp-lcp
Notes If set to 0 the local PPP entity will not advertise any MRU to the remote entity
and the default MRU will be assumed.
Changing this object will have effect when the link is next restarted.
ip-addr-enable
Enable or disable IP Address Negotiation.

Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-ncp
ip-comp-protocol
Sets the IP compression option.

Values none
The local node will not attempt to negotiate any IP compression.
vj-tcp
The local node will attempt to negotiate Van Jacobson TCP/IP header
compression.
Default none
Location ppp-ncp

Parameters
Notes See RFC 1332 for more information on Van Jacobson compression.
Changing this parameter will take effect when the link is next restarted.
ip-ifindex
The index value of the ip-interface-record associated with this PPP

authentication record.
Values 0 to 2147483647
Default 0
Location ppp-auth
Notes If this entry is to be used for incoming authentication, this object must be set
to a non-zero value.
lgid
The unique identifier of the line group which uses this authentication data.
Values 0 to 2147483647
Default 0
Location ppp-auth, ppp-interface
link-type
Indicates which type of connection is used.

Values atm
isdn
asynch
virtual
Default atm
lqr-period
The Link Quality Reporting period that the local PPP entity will attempt to
negotiate with the remote entity, in units of hundredths of a second.
Values 1000 to 99999
Default 0

PPPoA

Location ppp-lcp
Notes Changing this parameter will take effect when the link is next restarted.
lqr-status
Enable or disable Link Quality Report (LQR) status.

Values enabled
The local node will attempt to perform LQR negotiation with the remote
node.
disabled
LQR negotiation is not performed.
Default disabled
Location ppp-lcp
See RFC 1333 for more information on Link Quality Reporting.
pap-enable
Enables or disables Password Authentication Protocol (PAP).

Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-auth
magic-number
The number used in magic number negotiation. When set to zero, a random
number will be used for the magic number. This allows us to better prevent
having two devices with the same magic number.
Default 0
Location ppp-lcp
magic-number-enable
Enable or disable magic number negotiation.

Parameters
Values false
Magic number negotiation is not performed.
true
The local node will attempt to perform magic number negotiation with the
remote node.
Default false
Location ppp-lcp, ppp-ncp
max-config-retries
Number of Link Control Protocol (LCP) configuration retries without

response before the link is brought down.
Values 1 to 999
Default 10
Location ppp-lcp
max-failure-retries
Number of times a Configuration Negative Acknowledgment is sent before a

Configuration Reject is sent
Values 1 to 999
Default 10
Location ppp-ncp
max-pad
The number of padded bytes at the end of data. This is used for
Self-Describing Padding, a method for placing unambiguous padding octets at
the end of the PPP Information field in order to cause messages to fall on a
natural boundary.
Values 1 to 255
Default 4
Location ppp-lcp
Notes See Self-Describing Padding in RFC 1570.

PPPoA
max-fail-retries
Number of times a Configuration Negative Acknowledgment is sent before a

Configuration Reject is sent.
Values 1 to 999
Default 10
Location ppp-lcp
max-slot-id
The maximum slot ID for Van Jacobson TCP/IP header compression.

Values 3 to 16
Default 3
Location ppp-ncp
Notes The ip-comp-protocol parameter must be set to vj-tcp to enable Van
Jacobson TCP/IP header compression. See RFC 1332 for more information
on Van Jacobson compression.
max-term-retries
Number of Link Control Protocol (LCP) termination retries without response

before the link is brought down.
Values 1 to 999
Default 2
Location ppp-lcp
max-terminate-retries
Number of IP termination retries without response before the session is

brought down.
Values 1 to 999
Default 2
Location ppp-ncp

Parameters
mru-enable
Enable or disable Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) negotiation.

Values enabled
disabled
Default enabled
Location ppp-lcp
num-channels
The maximum number of channels allowed on this interface.

Values 1
Default 1
Notes Only one channel is supported.
num-mode-enable
Enable or disable Numbered Mode negotiation.

Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-lcp
Notes From RFC 1663: “The Link Control Protocol (LCP) Numbered-Mode
Configuration Option negotiates the use of Numbered-Mode on the link. By
default or ultimate disagreement, Unnumbered-Mode is used.”
pap-password
The password used for authenticating with the PAP protocol.

Location ppp-auth
Notes The pap-peer-id and pap-password values must be entered as strings with
single quotes. After the ppp-auth record is saved, the pap-peer-id and

PPPoA
pap-password values will be converted to hexadecimal values. For example,

the string ‘test’ will be returned as 74:65:73:74.
pap-peer-id
The username for authenticating with the PAP protocol.

Location ppp-auth
Notes The pap-peer-id value must be entered as a string with single quotes. After
the ppp-auth record is saved, the pap-peer-id value will be converted to
hexadecimal values. For example, the string ‘test’ will be returned as
74:65:73:74.
pfc-enable
Enable or disable Protocol Field Compression (PFC) negotiation.

Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-lcp
quality-protocol
The link Quality Protocol used.

Values lqr
Default lqr
Location ppp-lcp
Notes The only valid quality protocol is LQR.
receive-auth-enable
Enable or disable incoming authentication.

Values enabled
disabled
Default enabled

Parameters
Location ppp-lcp
Notes This parameter provides a method to negotiate the use of a specific protocol
for authentication.
restart-timer
Number of seconds before retransmission of an Link Control Protocol (LCP)

packet.
Values 1 to 999
Default 3
Location ppp-lcp
rx-acc-map
The Asynchronous Control Character (ACC) map that the local PPP entity
requires for use on its receive side. In effect, this is the ACC map that is
required in order to ensure that the local modem will successfully receive all
characters.
Location ppp-lcp
sdp-enable
Enable or disable Self-Describing Padding (SDP) negotiation.

Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-lcp
send-auth-identity
The identity (PAP peer ID or CHAP name) used with send-auth-protocol to

look up the outgoing authentication information.
Location ppp-lcp

PPPoA
receive-auth-protocol
The preferred protocol used for incoming authentication.

Values pap
chap
Default pap
Location ppp-lcp
Notes If receive-auth-enable is enabled, the authentication protocol will be
negotiated with the peer.
restart-timer
Number of seconds before retransmission of an IP packet.

Values 1 to 999
Default 3
Location ppp-ncp
send-auth-enable
Enable or disable outgoing authentication.

Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled
Location ppp-lcp
send-auth-protocol
The protocol used with send-auth-identity to look up the outgoing

authentication information.
Values pap
chap
Default pap
Location ppp-lcp

Parameters
status
Indicates whether the authentication is valid or invalid.

Values valid
invalid
Default valid
Location ppp-auth
Notes Setting this parameter to invalid causes the information for that record to
become invalidated. Calls using the authentication information from an
invalidated record will not be accepted or initiated.
tx-acc-map
The Asynchronous Control Character (ACC) map that the local PPP entity
requires for use on its transmit side. In effect, this is the ACC map that is
required in order to ensure that all characters can be successfully transmitted
through the local modem.
Location ppp-lcp
vci
The Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) value for the PPP VCL.
Values 0 to 65535
Default 0
Notes See RFC 2515 for more information.
vpi
The Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) value for the PPP VCL.
Values 0 to 4095
Default 0
Notes See RFC 2515 for more information.

RIP
RIP
admin-state
Operational state of Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for all routing

domains on the system.
Values disabled
enabled
Default enabled
Location rip-global-config
Notes This parameter can also be set using the rip enable command.
auth-key
The RIP 2 authentication key. The key is in hexadecimal, and must be less
than 16 octets (32 hex digits). If a string shorter than 16 octets is supplied, it
will be left- justified and padded to 16 octets, on the right, with null characters
(0x00).
Location rip-if-config
Notes auth-key is not valid if auth-type is set to none.
auth-type
The type of authentication that is used when receiving RIP packets on this
interface.
Values md5
An MD5-encrypted string is used for the authentication as specified in
RFC 1321.
simple
The authentication key is sent in clear text.
none
No authentication.
Default none

Parameters
default-metric
The metric for the default route entry in RIP updates that is transmitted from
this interface. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the system does not originate a
default route. In this case, a default route from another router can be
propagated. The default is set using the metric in the received update.
poison
This variable specifies whether to send poison reverse updates on this

interface. Poison reverse updates are used to prevent larger loops within the
network by setting the metric (cost) of neighboring routes to infinity. This will
prevent two-hop loops.
Values disabled
Prevents poison reverse updates on this interface.
enabled
Allows poison updates to be sent on this interface.
Default disabled
Notes By default, RIP uses a technique called split horizon to avoid routing loops
and allow smaller update packets. Split horizon specifies that when a RIP
update is sent out to a particular network interface, it should not include
routing information acquired over that same interface. Poison Reverse is a
variation of the split horizon technique that specifies that all routes are
included in an update out a particular interface, but that the metric is set to
infinity for routes acquired over that interface. One drawback is that routing
update packet sizes are increased when using poison reverse.
receive-type
Which version of RIP updates the system accepts.

Values ripv1
Only RIP version 1 updates compliant with RFC 1058 are accepted.
ripv2
Only RIP version 2 updates compliant with RFC 1388 are accepted. This
setting implies acceptance of multicast packets.
ripv1orripv2
Either RIP version 1 or version 2 updates are accepted. This setting
implies acceptance of multicast packets.
donotreceive
No RIP updates are accepted.

RIP
Default ripv1orripv2
See Also send-type
remotefault
Identifies any local fault indications that this media access unit (MAU) has
detected and will advertise at the next auto-negotiation interaction for
1000Mbps MAUs.
Values noerror
offline
linkfailure
autonegerror
send-type
The type of RIP updates the system sends on this interface.

Values donotsend
No RIP updates are sent on the interface.
ripv1
RFC 1058 compliant RIP updates.
ripv1compatible
RIP-2 updates using route inclusion rules as specified in RFC 1058.
ripv2
RIP-2 updates multicast updates.
ripv1demand
Demand RIP on the WAN interface using RIP version 1 rules as specified
in RFC 1582.
ripv2demand
Demand RIP on the WAN interface using RIP version 2 rules as specified
in RFC 1582.
Default ripv1compatible
See Also receive-type

Parameters
sent-updates
The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface. This
number does not include full updates sent containing new information.
src-address
The IP address that the system will use as a source address on this interface. If
it is a numbered interface, this must be the interface IP address. On
unnumbered interfaces, it must be the IP address for some interface on the
system.
This must be the same value as ipIfAddr (from ZHONE-IP-REC-MIB).
sroute-advertise
Specifies whether to advertise static routes.

Values none
No static routes are advertised.
low
Advertise only low preference static routes.
high
Advertise only high preference static routes.
both
Advertise both high and low preference static routes.
Default none
update-time
The time in seconds between transmissions of RIP updates on all interfaces

within a routing domain.
Default 30 seconds, which follows RFC 1058 and subsequent RIP RFCs.
Location rip-global-config

RS232
version
The RIP version number in the header of the last RIP packet received from a
peer.
Location rip-peer
RS232
This section describes the RS232 parameters. These parameters are used to
configure the serial craft port settings.
rs232PortInSpeed
The serial craft port input speed in bits per second (bps).
Values 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600
Location rs232-profile
Notes rs232PortInSpeed must match rs232PortOutSpeed.
Products BAN, MALC
rs232PortOutSpeed
The serial craft port output speed in bits per second (bps).
Values 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600
Notes rs232PortOutSpeed must match rs232PortInSpeed.
Products BAN, MALC
rs232PortInFlowType
The serial craft port type of input flow control.

Values ctsRts
dsrDtr
none

Parameters
Products BAN, MALC
rs232PortOutFlowType
The serial craft port type of output flow control.

Values ctsRts
dsrDtr
none
Products BAN, MALC
rs232AsyncPortBits
The serial craft port number of bits in a character.

Products BAN, MALC
rs232AsyncPortStopBits
The serial craft port number of stop bits.

Values dynamic
one
oneAndHalf
two
rs232AsyncPortParity
The serial craft port sense of a character parity bit.

SHDSL
Values even
mark
none
odd
space
Products BAN, MALC
rs232AsyncPortAutobaud
Specifies whether the port automatically senses input speed.

Values disabled
enabled
Notes Only disabled is supported.
Products BAN, MALC
SHDSL
shdsl-clock-offset
This parameter is used to help achieve a low frequency wander and jitter
between network and DSL system clock. This value can only be set on
devices configured as CO in the dsl-config profile.
Values -100 to 100 (in parts per million)
Default 0
Location shdsl-config
shdsl-config-line-rate (2-wire G.SHDSL card)
The line rate. If the shdsl-fix-bit-rate parameter is enabled, the line will
attempt to train at this rate. Note that the DSL modem uses 8kbps for ATM
framing and other ATM overhead, so that effective line rate is 8kbps less than
the configured rate.

Parameters
Values line-rate-72kbps, line-rate-80kbps, line-rate-136kbps, line-rate-144kbps,

line-rate-2312kbps, line-rate-2320kbps, line-rate-2368kbps
shdsl-config-line-rate (4-wire G.SHDSL card)
The line rate. If the shdsl-fix-bit-rate parameter is enabled, the line will
attempt to train at this rate. Note that the DSL modem uses 8kbps for ATM
framing and other ATM overhead, so that effective line rate is 8kbps less that
the configured rate.
Values line-rate-4w-384kbps line-rate-4w-512kbps line-rate-4w-640kbps
line-rate-4w-768kbps line-rate-4w-896kbps line-rate-4w-1024kbps
line-rate-4w-4608kbps

SHDSL

shdsl-decoder-coeffA/shdsl-decoder-coeffB
21 bit value corresponding to the decoder coefficient A or B, as defined in the

G.991.2 standard. Note that the default value is bit-reversed, when compared
against the recommended polynomials in the G.991.2 standard. Thus when
you enter the 21-bit value, it should be written bit-reversed also.
Values 0 to 2097151
Default 366 (for shdsl-decoder-coeffA)
817 (for shdsl-decoder-coeffB)
shdsl-dsp-version
The version of the DSP/Framer VLSI in the transceiver.

Location shdsl-status
shdsl-firmware-version
The firmware release number.

Location shdsl-status
shdsl-fix-bit-rate
Normally, if the CO side and CPE side select different line rates at startup, the
lower of the two rates will be selected. By using the fix bit rate the CO side
can override the default procedure and require startup at the rate specified in
the shdsl-config-line-rate.
Values fix-bit-disable
This value enables automatic baud rate adaption, where the DSL modem
will train at the best achievable rate. If the CO and CPE devices have
different line rates at startup, the line will train up to the highest rate
supported by both devices.
fix-bit-enable
This value is used for static (set) baud rates. With this option, the line will
attempt to connect at the rate configured in the shdsl-config-line-rate.
Default fix-bit-disable

Parameters

Notes This parameter is applicable only if unit-mode is co.
shdsl-frame-sync
The 14 bit frame sync word (FSW).

Values From 0 to 65535
Default 45
Notes Not currently supported.
shdsl-ntr
Determines the clocking on the SHDSL line.

Values ntr-local-osc
The line uses the system’s internal clock. Also known as local timing.
ntr-refck-8KHz
The line uses an 8KHZ clock derived from a timing source such as a T1
interface.
Default ntr-local-osc
Notes Circuit Emulation Service (CES) transports TDM circuits over ATM
networks. For CES-based services: change ntr default setting of ntr-local-osc
to ntr-refck-8KHz in the shdsl-config profile.
SHDSL lines configured with the shdsl-ntr parameter set to ntr-refck-8khz
will not sync if a system clock source is not enabled in a
system-clock-profile. To enable clocking:
zSH> update system-clock-profile 1-17-1-0/ds1
system-clock-eligibility: -> {false}: true
system-clock-weight: ------> {5}:
....................
Record updated.

SHDSL
shdsl-power-scale
Reduces the transmit power in small increments to compensate for minor

differences in power between units. The formula for the adjustment is:
Power scale = 26112 * 10([adjustment in dB]/ 20)

The following values are recommended for different loop lengths.
Values 17664
For loop lengths from 0 to 10 feet (0 to 3.05 meters). Corresponds to
-3.39dB.
20992
For loop lengths less than 4000 feet (1219 meters). Corresponds to
-1.9dB.
29952
For loop lengths greater than 4000 feet (1219 meters). Corresponds to
-1.19dB.
Default 29298
shdsl-repeater-id
This value identifies if the STU is being used as a repeater.

Values noChangeRepeater
repeaterDisable
repeaterEnable
Default repeaterDisable
shdsl-standard
Determines the SHDSL standards.

Values annex-a
G.991.2 Annex A. Typically used in the United States.
annex-b
G.991.2 Annex B. Typically used outside the United States.
Default annex-a

Parameters
shdsl-startup-margin
Specifies the minimum desired target margin in dB for the local line
conditions during startup. Used to negotiate the bit rate during startup.
Values 0 to 10
Default 6
shdsl-transmit-power-back-off-mode
Indicates if transmit power backoff is used on the other end of the loop. When
enabled, the transmit power is reduced in steps of 1dB from 0 to 6 dB
according to the received power.
Values backoffDisable
backoffEnable
Default backoffEnable
shdsl-wire-mode
This setting disables or enables 4-wire-framing.

Values four-wire-disable
Four wire framing is disabled. Use this setting for the 2 wire SHDSL card.
four-wire-enable-bit-interleave
Sends one bit on channel 1, then one bit on channel 2, as described in the
ITU-T G.991.2, section E.2.
four-wire-enable-byte-interleave
sends one byte on channel 1, and then one byte on channel 2, as described
in ITU-T G.991.2, section E.7
four-wire-enable-non-interleave
Sends 12 bytes on channel 1, 12 bytes on second channel 2.
Default four-wire-disable

Sechtor 100A environmental
Sechtor 100A environmental

thermo-a-lower-threshold
The lower threshold for thermometer A in degrees Celsius. When

thermo-a-temperature is below this value, thermo-a-operational-status is
below the lower threshold, and a trap is generated.
Values Valid range is -10 to 5 degrees Celsius
Default -5 degrees Celsius
Location s100-environment-profile
thermo-b-lower-threshold
The lower threshold for thermometer B in degrees Celsius. When

thermo-b-temperature is below this value, thermo-b-operational-status is
below the lower threshold, and a trap is generated.
Values Valid range is -10 to 5 degrees Celsius
Default -5 degrees Celsius
thermo-a-upper-threshold
The upper threshold for thermometer A in degrees Celsius. When

thermo-a-temperature is above this value, thermo-a-operational-status is
greater than the upper threshold and a trap is generated.
Values Valid range is 45 to 80 degrees Celsius
Default 65 degrees Celsius
thermo-b-upper-threshold
The upper threshold for thermometer B in degrees Celsius. When

thermo-b-temperature is above this value, thermo-b-operational-status is
greater than the upper threshold and a trap is generated.
Values Valid range is 45 to 80 degrees Celsius.
Default 60 degrees Celsius

Parameters
SNMP
access-table-index
Displays the access list associated with the community name, indicating
which IP addresses are allowed to use this community name.
The value 0 indicates that no address checking is performed; all SNMP
requests are allowed with the access right specified by the permissions
parameter.
Location community-access-profile, community-profile
community-name
Community name to be sent in all traps sent to this destination.

Location community-profile
ip-address
The IP address from which a management connection to the device can be

established.
Location community-access-profile, malicious-caller
thresh15min-badseq
The number of sequence errors within any given 15-minute performance data
collection period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
aal2PerfCellLossThreshTrap. One trap will be sent per interval per interface.
Values 0 to 900
Default 0 (will disable the trap)
thresh15min-congestion
The number of congestion events within any given 15-minute performance

data collection period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
aal2PerfCongestionThreshTrap. One trap will be sent per interval per
interface.

SNMP
Values 0 to 900
Default 0 (will disable the trap)
trapadminstatus
Specifies whether the device reports traps to the trap destination.

Values enabled
disabled
Default enabled
Location trap-destination
trapdestination
The IP address destination for traps.

traplevel
The lowest-level severity level of the traps reported to the trapdestination.

Values critical
severe
moderate
low
Default low
traptype
The type of trap to be sent to this trapdestination. This parameter is currently

unsupported.

Parameters
Values catAdmin
catLine
catVoice
catIP
catRip
canRadio
SONET
apsChanConfigAdminStatus
Administrative status of the APS object.

Values inService (1)
outOfService (2)
Default outOfService (2)
Location aps-channel
apsChanConfigGroupName
The configured name of the APS group.

apsChanConfigNumber
A unique channel number within an APS group. The value 0 indicates the null
channel. The values 1-14 define a working channel. If the SONET LTE is not
part of an APS group this value is set to -1
apsChanConfigPriority
Determines whether high or low priority SD and SF codes are used in K1

requests. This field is only applicable if the channel is to be included in a
group using the 1:n architecture. It is not applicable if the channel is to be
included in a group using the 1+1 architecture and is ignored in that case.

SONET
Default low
apsConfigCreationTime
The value of sysUpTime at the time APS was configured.

Location aps-group
apsConfigDirection
The directional mode of the APS group.

Values unidirectional
The unidirectional mode provides protection in one direction.
bidirectional
The bidirectional mode provides protection in both directions.
Default unidirectional
Location aps-group
apsConfigExtraTraffic
Enables or disables the transfer of extra traffic on the protection channel in a

1:n architecture. This object must be set to disabled if the architecture is 1+1.
Default disabled
Location aps-group
apsConfigMode
The protection architecture of the APS group.

Values onePlusOne (1)
Location aps-group
apsConfigRevert
The revertive mode of the APS group.

Parameters
Values nonrevertive)
After a protection switch, traffic remains on the protection line until
another switch request is received.
revertive
After a protection switch, when the condition that caused a switch to the
protection line is cleared the signal switches back to the working line.
Default nonrevertive
Location aps-group
apsConfigsdBerThreshold
The Signal Degrade Bit Error Rate. The negated value of this number is used
as the exponent of 10 for computing the threshold value for the Bit Error Rate
(BER). For example, a value of 5 indicates a BER threshold of 10^-5.
Default 6
Location aps-group
apsConfigsfBerThreshold
The Signal Failure Bit Error Rate. The negated value of this number is used as
the exponent of 10 for computing the threshold value for the Bit Error Rate
(BER). For example, a value of 5 indicates a BER threshold of 10^-5.
Default 3
Location aps-group
apsConfigWaitToRestore
The Wait To Restore period in seconds. After clearing a condition that

necessitated an automatic switch, the wait to restore period must elapse before
reverting.
Default 300
Location aps-group
clock-external-recovery
Whether internal clocking can be recovered from an external source.

SONET
Values enabled
disabled
clock-transmit-source
The clocking source.

Values external155mhz
Transmit clock synthesized from an external 155.52 MHz source.
looptiming
Uses the recovered receive clock as the transmit clock.
localtiming
Ether uses a local clock source or an external clock is attached to the
device containing the interface.
throughtiming
Uses a transmit clock derived from the recovered receive clock of another
interface.
medium-cell-scramble-config
The SONET scramble mode at the cell level.

Values true
Cell level scramble mode is enabled.
false
Cell level scramble mode is not enabled.
Default true
medium-circuit-identifier
The SONET circuit identifier, determined by the system installer.

Values string of up to 260 characters

Parameters
medium-line-coding
The line coding for the SONET interface.

Values sonetMediumOther
sonetMediumB3ZS
Used for STS-1 and STS-3 electrical SONET/SDH signalling.
sonetMediumCMI
Used for STS-1 and STS-3 electrical SONET/SDH signalling.
sonetMediumNRZ
Non-Return to Zero. Used for optical SONET/SDH signals.
sonetMediumRZ
Return to Zero. Used for optical SONET/SDH signals.
medium-line-scramble-config
The SONET scramble mode at the line level.

Values true
Line level scramble mode is enabled.
false
Line level scramble mode is not enabled.
Default true
medium-line-type
The line type for the SONET interface.

Values sonetShortSingleMode
Short range single mode fiber.
sonetMultiMode
Multimode fiber.
medium-loopback-config
How the SONET loopback is configured.

SONET
Values sonetnoloop
SONET circuit, with no loop.
sonetfacilityloop
All incoming data on the Rx interface is retransmitted out of the Tx
interface. Used to check the circuit between a remote device and the
Zhone device and to test the Zhone device optical module.
sonetterminalloop
All of the data transmitted on the Tx interface is also internally looped
back to the Rx interface. Used to verify that the ATM and PHY layers are
communicating.
sonetotherloop
All incoming data on the Rx interface is retransmitted out of the Tx
interface. Used to check the circuit between the IAD and a remote unit
and to verify that the optical module and the SONET PHY are working.
medium-cell-scramble-config
Whether the SONET cell scramble mode is enabled.

Values true
Scramble mode is enabled
false
Scramble mode is not enabled.
Default true
medium-type
The type of SONET signaling.

Values sonet
Synchronous Optical Network (North America)
sdh
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (Europe)
Default sonet

Parameters
path-current-width
The type of SONET/SDH path.

Values sts1
sts3cSTM1
sts12cSTM4
Subscriber
capable-line-rate-limit
The maximum line rate that can be supported by the subscriber line. This rate
is determined by several factors including the distance the subscriber is from
the CO, the copper facilities to the subscriber, and the type of IAD installed.
This value is determined by the service provider.
Location subscriber
iad-type
Identifies the type of IAD used by the subscriber.

Values zedge64s
Location subscriber
line-group-id
The line group identifier. Use the lineGroup command to find this value.
line-rate-limit
The maximum line rate (in bits per second) that the subscriber is provisioned
to receive from the service provider. This value is the total line rate or
bandwidth of the subscriber connection, including voice and data.

Subscriber
Location subscriber
name
Subscriber name.
Location subscriber
name-group-id
An administratively defined name used to aid operators identify subscribers in

the system. The name is not used by the system, it is only for operator
reference.
Location subscriber
service-provider-id
Unique service provider ID. This value is used throughout the management
system to link parameters with customers or service providers.
Location subscriber
tools-access
Indicates whether the specified user has tools privileges.

Notes Use the adduser and updateuser commands to configure user accounts.
voice-admin-status
The administrative state of this connection.

Values enabled
disabled
Default disabled

Parameters
System
countryregion
The country or region this system is operating in. This parameter sets A-Law
Mu-Law companding and sets the ring frequency for the trunk side interface
of the device. These settings are in accordance with ITU-T E.180 and ITU-T
E.180 Supplement 2.
Values australia, belgium, brazil, egypt, estonia, etsi, finland, france, germany,
hongkong, ireland, italy, japan, korea, malaysia, mexico, spain, sweden,
taiwan, uk, unitedarabemirates, us
Default us
Location system
enableauthtraps
Indicates whether the system is permitted to generate authenticationFailure

traps. The value of this parameter overrides any configuration information
and provides a means to disable all authentication Failure traps.
Location system
ipaddress
The IP address of this system. Independent of the different IP interfaces

configured and what is active, a manager uses this address to communicate
with the system.
Location system
manuf-access
Indicates whether the specified user has manuf(acturing) privileges.

numcards
The total number of cards in the system.


System
Location system
numshelves
The number of shelves in the system.

Location system
permissions
The access level associated with the community name:

Values noAccess
Restricts the community name any access to this device.
read
Allows read access to all parameters except administrator access
parameters.
readAndWrite
Allows read and write access to all parameters except administrator
access parameters.
admin
Allows read and write access to all parameters on this device.
Location community-profile
primaryclocksource
The address of the interface from which the system 8khz backplane clock can
be derived. Only active OC3 and DS3 interfaces can provide system clock.
Values Any active DS1, DS3, or OC3 interface.
Default 0/0/0/0/0
If set to the default, the system uses its internal clock.
Location system
Notes Only one interface in the system can be the primary clock source at a time.
The interface that provides the clock source must be set to loop timing or local
timing (DS3 interface).

Parameters
revertiveclocksource
Redundant clock sources are revertive by default. If a standby clock source

becomes active after the failure of a primary clock source, the system will
revert to the primary clock source after that clock source becomes active
again. Note that the clock source must be active for 30 seconds before the
system will revert back to the primary clock source.
Values true
false
Default true
Access read-write
Location system
ringsource
Ring voltage source selection (internal or external).

Values internalRingSourceLabel
Select internal ring generator (located within MTAC) as source for ring
voltage to line cards.
externalRingSourceLabel
Select external ring generator (input connector located on MTAC) as
source for ring voltage to line cards.
Default internalRingSourceLabel
Location system
setserialno
An advisory lock used to allow several cooperating SNMPv2 entities, all

acting in a manager role, to coordinate their use of the SNMPv2 set
operation.This parameter is used for coarse-grain coordination.
Location system
shelvesarray
Bit array from 0-255 (32 8-bit bytes) that are present in the system.
Location system

V5.2
syscontact
The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node,
together with information on how to contact this person.
Values If no contact information is known, the value is a zero-length string.
Location system
syslocation
The physical location of the device.

Values If the location is unknown, the value is a zero-length string.
Location system
sysname
An administratively-assigned name for this managed node. By convention,

this is the node's fully-qualified domain name.
Values If the name is unknown, the value is the zero-length string.
Location system
system-access
Specifies user access level.

Location user-profile
V5.2
admin-status
The administrative status of the V5.2 interface group, user port or link.
Values inservice
outofservice
deferredoutofservice
Takes the group, port, or link out of service, but not until all calls are
completed.

Parameters
restart
Causes the v52 interface to shut down for a period of time, then go
through the startup procedure. When restart is complete, the V5.2
interface should go back to the previously configured admin status before
it was set to restart.
According to ETSI EN 300 347-1 V2.2.2, a system must be shut down for
95 seconds before it can be returned to service.
Location v52-user-port, v52-interface-group, v52-link
block (V5.2 user port)
A user port can be blocked by the access network for non urgent or urgent
configuration or reconfiguration. If the port is routed through a V5.2 interface
to a local exchange, then the block request is granted by the local exchange
through the V5 interface only, to avoid interference with call setup, calls in
progress or with calls being cleared.
Values blocked
The user port can be unblocked by either accelerated port alignment
(group unblocking) and by sequential port alignment.
shuttingDown
The user port can be unblocked by either accelerated port alignment
(group unblocking) and by sequential port alignment except active ports
will not be blocked until all of the calls are completed.
unblocked
The user port will be unblocked regardless of its previous port block state.
blockedNotSuitableForGroupUnblocking
The user port cannot be unblocked by accelerated port alignment
unblocking, but can be unblocked by sequential blocking.
Default blocked
block (V5.2 link)
This parameter controls the link blocking function. The Access Node (AN)
requests that the link be blocked, the Local Exchange (LE) evaluates the
request, releases the connection, then reestablishes semipermanent and
preconnected connections.
E1 trunks are added in a blocked state and must be unblocked by the LE
before they are operational, and an E1 must be administratively blocked by
the LE before it can be deleted.

V5.2
Values deferredBlocked
Wait to block the link until there are no active calls.
nonDeferredBlocked
Block the link after approval is received from the LE.
forceBlocked
The link is blocked by the AN without approval from the LE.
unblocked
Unblock the link.
Default unblocked
Location v52-link
check-id
This parameter is set to activated to request that the V5.2 link ID on the AN
side be checked with the LE side link ID. When the check- id is finished, this
value is notActivated.
A link identification check can only be started when the V5.2 link is
operational, and can be initiated from either the AN or LE side. (The LE
request has priority over any AN initiated requests to avoid request collision.)
Values activated
notActivated
Default notActivated
Location v52-link
c-path-valid-flag
When this parameter is set to valid, the C-path is active.

Values valid
invalid
dsn-lg-id
Describes the line group ID associated with the E1 link. Use the lineGroup
command to find the line group ID.

Parameters
id (V5.2 link)
The V5.2 link identifier. Assigned by the Local Exchange (LE).

Location v52-link
id (V5.2 path)
The ID number of the communications path.

Values 0 to 255
Location v52-path
inbound-calls
The number of inbound calls completed over the V5.2 IG.

Location v52-stats-current, v52-stats-interval, v52-stats-total
Notes PerfCurrentCount
isdn-env-func-start-address
The start address for ISDN users. When ISDN users are added, they must
have an address greater or equal to this one. This value must match the value
on the switch.
isdnds-cpath-id
associated C-path ID that carries Ds-type data. A value of 0 (zero) indicates
that the user port is not configured to carry Ds-type data.

V5.2
isdnf-cpath-id
associated C-path ID that carries f-type data. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that
the user port is not configured to carry f-type data.
isdnp-cpath-id
associated C-path ID that carries p-type data. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that
the user port is not configured to carry p-type data.
link-is-timer
Specifies the length of time that a V5.2 link must be in a framed state before
the interface declares that the link is in service. This value should be less than
the equivalent value that is provisioned in the LE.
Default 200
link-oos-timer
Specifies the length of time that a V5.2 link must be in a failed state before the
interface declares that the link has failed. This value should always exceed the
equivalent value that is provisioned in the LE.
Values 50..10000
Default 2500
link-valid-flag
Activates the E1 circuit.

Parameters
Values valid
invalid
local-interface-id
The interface ID of the IG. Must be unique across the system. This value must
match the value on the switch.
Default 0
local-prov-variant
The prov(isioning) variant describes a type of provisioning. This value must

match the value on the switch.
Default 0
logical-channel-id (C-path)
The logical C-channel ID that the C-path is using. This number must match
the logical-channel-id value of the C-channel that the C-path is running over.
Location v52-cpath
logical-channel-id (C-channel)
The C-channel logical channel ID. C-channels carry one or more C-paths. A
V.52 interface may contain up to 44 logical C-channels and each logical
C-channel on an interface is uniquely identified with a 16 bit logical
C-channel identifier. C-channels that are provisioned as standby channels in a
protection group do not have a logical C-channel identifier.
Location v52-cchannel

V5.2
max-outstanding-frames
The maximum number of outstanding information frames at layer two.

Default 7
Location v52-interface-group-lapv
n200
The maximum number of retransmissions for a frame allowed at layer two.

Default 3
n201
The maximum number of octets in the information field of an I frame.

Default 256
national-pstn-region
The regional and country-specific setting for V5.2 PSTN service. The PSTN
region dictates regional signaling differences like ring cadence.
Values australia, brazil, egypt, estonia, finland, france, germany, hongkong,
ireland, italy, japan, korea, malaysia, mexico, spain, sweden, taiwan, uk,
unitedarabemirates, us
Default unknown
port-alignment-request
A request to block or unblock all the user ports associated with the current IG
by port type.

Parameters
Values noRequest
blockAll
Block all user ports associated with this IG.
blockIsdn
Block all of the isdnBa and isdnPra user ports associated with this IG.
blockPstn
Block all of the PSTN user ports associated with this IG.
unblockAll
Unblock all user ports associated with this IG.
unblockIsdn
Unblock all of the isdnBa and isdnPra user ports associated with this IG.
unblockPstn
Unblock all the pstn user ports associated with this IG.
Default noRequest
protection-group
The C-channel protection group.

Values none
group1
oneToOneGroup2
mToNgroup2
protocol-spec
This variable specifies which variation of the v5.2 protocol is used by this
V5.2 IG.
Values edition1
The V5.2 specification defined in ETSI ETS 300 347-1 ed.1 (1994-09).
edition2
The V5.2 specification defined in ETSI EN 300 347-1 V2.2.2 (1999-12).
Default edition2

V5.2
prov-variant-request
A request by the user regarding the provisioning variant.

Values noRequest
The default value. Setting the variable to noRequest has no effect.
verifywithle
A request to verify if the LE is ready for reprovisioning.
requestfromle
A request to get the LE Variant ID and Interface ID.
switchletolocal
A request to the LE side to change its provisioning variant to be the same
as local-prov-variant.
Default noRequest
pstn-layer-3-start-address
The start address for PSTN users. When PSTN users are added, they must
have an address greater or equal to this one. This value must match the value
on the switch.
reg-or-lease-user
What kind of lease the user carries.

Values regular
permanentLease
semiPermanentLease
Default regular
role
The C-channel role. This value must match the value on the switch.
Values active
The C-channel is in active mode.

Parameters
standby
The C-channel is in standby mode.
switchToStandby
This value can be set only when the C-channel is in active mode. If the
role parameter is set to switchToStandby, one of the standby channels in
the same protection group will take over as the new active channel. When
the switch has been completed, the original channel becomes a standby
channel in its protection group.
Default active
shelf
The system shelf. Zero (0) is an invalid value.

Location v52-interface-group-stats
startup-unblock-user-ports
Indicates whether or not user ports will be unblocked when the V5.2 interface
is starting up.
Values true
false
Default true
startup-check-link-id
Indicates whether or not a Link ID check will be performed when the V5.2
interface is starting up.
Values true
false
Default true

V5.2
switch-vendor
The switch vendor for this V5.2 IG.

Values unknown
lucent
nortel
alcatel
ericsson
nokia
siemens
samsung
Default unknown
t200
The maximum layer two wait time for an acknowledgment of a transmitted

frame. Units are in milliseconds, in increments of 50.
Default 150
t203
Maximum layer two idle time before connection verification is necessary.

Units are in seconds, in increments of ten.
Default 30
time-slot-index
The channel that the C-channel is running over.

Parameters
Values 15
16
31
type
The type of communications path. This tells the system how the management
information is communicated.
Values unknown
pstn
POTS
ctrl
control protocol
bcc
bearer channel connection
lctl
link control protocol
isdnds
BRI voice data
Default unknown
Location V52_CPath
v52-c-channel:array[1..3]
This array describes up to three control channels per link (E1). There can be
up to three control channels on each of the 16 links for a maximum of 48.
C-channels are used to pass management information between then LE and
the Zhone device system. It includes the time-slot-index, logical-channel-id,
protection-group, role, and c-channel-valid-flag parameters.
v52-c-path:arrary[1..48]
This array describes communications paths. C-paths are used to specify the
type of information running between the Zhone device and the LE. C-paths
run inside C-channels. There can be up to 48 C-paths inside each C-channel.
This array includes the id, type, logical-channel-id, and c-path-valid-flag
parameters.

V5.2
Values Use the logical-channel-id numbers created for the C-channels.

v52-ig-lapv
An array of V5.2 Lapv timer parameters. These configure retries and other
functions over the management links. This array includes the parameters
max-outstanding frames, n200, n201, t200, and t203.
v52-link[1..16]
This array is used to provision the E1circuits between the LE and the Zhone
device. There can be up to sixteen links. Each E1 link has 32 channels. This
array includes the dsn-lg-id, ds1-channel-number, id, check-id,
check-id-status, and block parameters.
voice-V52-interface-name
The name of the V5.2 interface group. This is the same as the name-id from
Location subscriber-voice-v52
voice-V52-isdn-channel-id
The ISDN B or D channel used for the connection.

voice-V52-user-port-id
A port ID for the V5.2 user port. This is the same as the local-interface-id in
voice-V52-user-type
The type of V5.2 user port.

Values POTS
isdndchannel
isdnbchannel

Parameters
VDSL
mode
Type of VDSL equipment.

Values vtu-r
customer premise equipment
vtu-o
central office equipment
Default vtu-o
Location vdsl-config
us-max-const
Restrict upstream quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) constellations to

use those that do not exceed this maximum.
Values QAM-4
QAM-8
QAM-16
QAM-32
QAM-64
QAM-128
QAM-256
Default QAM-128
Location vdsl-config
Voice
ds0-channel-id
The DS0 assigned to this subscriber.

Location subscriber-voice-ds1
ds1-line-group
The line group Interface Index of the DS1 interface.


Voice
Location subscriber-voice-ds1
destination-name
The name of the destination of the specified dial string.

Location sip-dialplan
dialplan-type
Indicates the type of dialplan used.

Values normal
Indicates normal dialing in use.
call park
Indicates dialing features such as call parking are used. Call parking
places a call in a common holding or parking zone of the PBX so that any
extension can retrieve the parked call.
directory-number
The directory number (phone number) assigned to this endpoint. Contains

only digits.
Location subscriber-voice-voip
echo-cancellation-type
Which echo cancellation algorithm is used for a particular channel.

G.168 has stricter technical specs and defines how the tests are performed
better than G.165. If an echo canceller meets the G.168 specification, it is
G.168 and G.165 compliant.
The number following the designation describes the echo tail length in
milliseconds. The echo tail length that is required depends on several factors,
including the network configuration, local loop length, and line frequency
response. Generally, 16ms is adequate for local loop and 32ms is a good
minimum for network equipment.
Values g165EchoTL16
G.165 echo cancellation with echo tail length of 16ms (MALC only)

Parameters
g168EchoTL48
G.168 echo cancellation with echo tail length of 48ms (BAN, Sechtor
100A, Z-Edge)
off
Echo cancellation is off.
Default g165Echotl16 (MALC)
g168Echotl48 (BAN, Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge)
Location voice-dsp-default-profile
echo-return-loss
The amount of loss between the transmitted signal and the reflected echo back
from the hybrid where the 4-to-2 wire conversion takes place.
Values 0 dB, 6 dB
MALC
0dB, 3dB, 6dB
BAN, Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge
Default 6 (MALC)
3 (BAN, Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge)
Location voice-dsp-profile
Notes For the BAN and Sechtor 100A changes to the echo return loss take effect on
the next call.
For the MALC and Z-Edge, changes to the echo return require the CID or the
VCL to be brought down and up again, or the system rebooted.
Products BAN, MALC, Raptor, Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge
expires-invite-value
For user agent clients, this value in seconds is inserted into the Expires header.
For proxy servers, if a received request contained an Expires header, then the
value in the header takes precedence.
Location sip-expires-timer-cfg
expires-register-value
For user agent clients, this value in seconds is inserted into the Expires header.
For proxy servers, if a received request contained an Expires header, then the
value in the header takes precedence.

Voice
expires-register-method
This convention is a bit map. Each bit represents a SIP method where the
Expires header should be included. If a bit has value 1, then the requests
corresponding to that SIP method must include an Expires header line. If a bit
has value 0, then the Expires header line will not be added. Combinations of
bits can be set when the Expires header line is required in multiple SIP
methods.
Values bit 0
INVITE method
bit 1
REGISTER method
features
Specifies the set of enabled call establishment features.

Values hookflash detection
onhook signaling
always offhook
Default onhook signaling, always offhook
Products MALC
frames-per-packet
Indicates the number of voice frames per IP packet.

Default 4
g711-fallback
Indicates whether a subscriber may consume bandwidth by switching to g711,

when a fax, modem, b-channel data session is detected.
Default true

Parameters
Products MALC
g726-byte-order
Indicates the byte order to be used when g.726 voice coding is in use. Cisco
uses little endian byte order, whereas the g.726 standard calls for big endian
byte order.
Default bigEndian
Products MALC
hookflash-max-timer
Specifies the maximum timer that qualifies for a hookflash. Any loopopen
more than this timer will be considered as a onhook.
Location voice-system
Products MALC
hookflash-min-timer
Specifies the minimum timer that qualifies for a hookflash. Any loopopen
below this time will be ignored.
Location voice-system
Products MALC
huntgroup
Determines if this connection is part of a huntgroup.

Default false
Products MALC
hunt-group-index
The hunt group this subscriber is part of. Each subscriber can be part of 3 hunt
groups.

Voice

Location subscriber-voice-ds1, subscriber-voice-pots
Products MALC
inter-arriv-jit-threshold
The inter-arrival jitter threshold in milliseconds per channel that is used as a

trigger value to generate a trap when its value is passed. If the value is 0, the
threshold monitoring is disabled for inter-arrival jitter.
Values 0 to 100ms, inclusive.
Default 80ms
interdigit-timeout
Indicates the duration, in seconds, that the device will wait after each digit is
entered before assuming the user has finished entering digits.
Default 10
Location voip-system
Products MALC
ip-interface-index
Interface Index of the LP Interface through which the SIP signalling and RTP
traffic flow.
ip-tos
The tos value that is set in the ip header for voice of ip traffic.
Default 0
Products MALC

Parameters
jitter-buffer-size
The voice DSP jitter buffer size in milliseconds. It refers to the amount of
memory usage that can store certain milliseconds of voice.
For the BAN and Sechtor 100A, changes to the jitter buffer take effect on the
next call.
For the Z-Edge, changes to the jitter buffer require the CID or the VCL to be
brought down and up again, or the system rebooted.
Values 1 to 160
Note that changes to the jitter buffer are based on 5 ms frame sizes. For
example:
1 to 5 = 5 ms
6 to 10 = 10 ms
11 to 15 = 15 ms
16 to 20 = 20 ms
21 to 25 = 25 ms
26 to 30 = 30 ms
.....
146 to 150 = 150 ms
151 to 155 = 155 ms
156 to 160 = 160 ms
Default 10 (BAN, Sechtor 100A, Z-Edge)
jitter-buffer-type
The voice DSP channel jitter buffer defaults. The jitter buffer accommodates
the cells/packets received, so that the inter-arrival jitter of the cells/packets
received don’t degrade the voice quality. Without a jitter buffer, some cells as
inter-arrival jitter changes would be late, which would have the same effect as
lost cells. The jitter buffer also reorders the out-of-order cells/packets
received.
Values static
A static jitter buffer does not allow the jitter buffer to grow and shrink in
response to changes in jitter.
Default static

Voice
malicious-caller-uri
Incoming call from this URI will be rejected.

Location malicious-caller
match-string
A dialstring against which collected digits are matched.

number-of-digits
The number of digits to wait for before initiating the call.

pkts-lost-threshold
How many voice DSP channel packets are lost per minute threshold. A trap is
generated when this value is exceeded. If this value is 0, threshold monitoring
is disabled for lost packets.
Values 0 to 10000 packets per minute.
Default 600
preferred-codec
Defines the preferred voice codec to be used for this subscriber.

Values g711a
g711mu
g723
g726
g729a
Default g711mu
Products MALC

Parameters
prefix-add
Specifies the string that is added to the beginning of the dialed digits before
the call is initiated.
prefix-strip
Specifies the number of prefix digits to strip from the dialed digits.
protocol
The signalling protocol used for VOIP. Choices are SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) and MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol.
Default SIP
Products MALC
redundancy-over-subscription-type
The voice DSP redundancy oversubscription method.

A resource is called active if it is in use and is called standby if it is in reserve
in case the active resource fails. The standby resources in redundant
configurations can be oversubscribed. The active resource is not used when
standby resources are allocated, however, if the active resources are at
maximum capacity, there will be no standby resources available to take over
in case of failure.
Values high
Implies infinite oversubscription.
low
Implies 1:2 oversubscription.
medium
Implies 1:4 oversubscription.
none
Implies 1:1 (one to one) oversubscription. When a standby is allocated,
the pool of available actives is depleted by one.
Default none

Voice

Products BAN
reject-enabled
Indicates whether the incoming call reject is enabled.

Default true
Access This is a read-create parameter.
Location malicious-caller
Products MALC
rtcp-enabled
Indicates whether the Real-Time Control Protocol is enabled for the device.
Default false
Access This is a read-write parameter.
Products MALC
rtcp-packet-interval
RTCP packet interval, in milleseconds. Range is 2500 to 10000 ms.

This object's value is only pertinent if RTCP has been enabled.
Default 5000
Products MALC
send-call-proceeding-tone
Indicates whether, on call originations destined to the PSTN, the device

should play a call proceeding tone while waiting for ring-back tone from the
switch.
Default false
Products MALC

Parameters
silence-suppression-type
Which silence suppression algorithm the voice DSP should use on a channel.
Silence suppression stops voice packet generation during periods of silence.
The SID (silence descriptor) frame is generated at the start of a silence period,
then periodically, and is used to characterize the power level of the
background noise during the silence period on the encode side of the voice
path. The SID frame is passed to the decode side through a packet encoding
medium (AAL2 or RTP). The decode side then generates comfort noise at an
equivalent power level dictated by the SID frame values.
Values silSupOff
Silence suppression is off.
silSupOnSidOn
An initial SID frame is sent and then transmission every 100 ms.
Default silSupOff
sip-ip-address
When a match is detected between the collected digits and the dial string in
this SIP dialplan, this IP address is used for SIP negoitations to initiate the
call.
system-domain-name
The Universal Resource Identifier (URI) of the system.

Default none
Products MALC
voice-aal2-cid
The ATM Adaption Layer 2 channel identifier (AAL2 CID) for the
connection.

Voice
voice-aal2-line-group-id
The line group ID for this AAL2 connection.

voice-aal2-vci
The AAL2 VCI for this connection.

voice-aal2-vpi
The AAL2 VPI for this connection.

voice-access
Indicates whether the specified user has voice privileges.

voice-connection-description
A text string describing this voice call entry.

A common use is to define the external or public phone number for this voice
line as assigned by the class 5 switch.
Default none
Products MALC
voice-connection-type
This describes the connection type between the two voice endpoints. Where
applicable the first endpoint refers to the line or premise side of the
connection and the second endpoint refers to the central office side of the
connection.
Voice connections are created with the voice add command.
Values aal2togr303
AAL2 VPI/VCI/CID to GR-303 interface group/CRV.

Parameters
aal2tov52
AAL2 VPI/VCI/CID to V5.2 interface/user port.
voiptogr303
VOIP to GR-303. Requires the MALC Voice Gateway card.
elcpaal2tov52
Only supported on the Sechtor 100 and the BAN.
potstoaal2
POTS to ATM AAL2.
isdntoaal2
ISDN to ATM AAL2.
isdntov52
ISDN to V5.2 interface/user port
potstogr303
POTS to GR-303.
potstov5
POTS to V5.2.
voiptods1
VOIP to DS1.
siptogr303
SIP to GR-303. Requires the MALC Voice Gateway card.
voiptov52
VOIP to V5.2. Requires the MALC Voice Gateway card.
elcpaal2tov52
ELCP to V5.2. Requires the MALC Voice Gateway card.
isdntov52
ISDN to V5.2.
ebstogr303
Electronic business system (EBS) to GR-303.
voiptopots
VOIP to POTS.
isdnsigtovoip
ISDN PRI to VOIP. Supported on the Z-Edge 6200 only.
potstods1
POTS to DS1.
potstoclass5
POTS to a class 5 switch.
voice-ebs-line-group-id
The line group ID for the associated connection.

Voice
Default none
Location subscriber-voice-ebs
Products 6200
voice-endpoint1-addr-index
The index into the associated address table for this end point. EndPoint1
should describe the line or premise side of the connection where applicable.
Default none
Products MALC
voice-endpoint2-addr-index
The index into the associated address table for this end point. EndPoint2
should describe the central office side of the connection where applicable.
Default none
Products MALC
voice-ext-type
The external or public phone number for this voice line as assigned by the
Class 5 switch. This value is not used by the system and is provided only for
operator reference.
voice-GR303-ig-crv
The crv for the associated connection.

Default none
Location subscriber-voice-gr303
Products MALC
voice-GR303-ig-name
The IG name for the associated connection.

Parameters
Default none
Location subscriber-voice-gr303
Products MALC
voice-pots-line-group-id
The line group ID for the associated connection.

Location subscriber-voice-pots
voip-password
Authentication string needed for call originations through a SIP/MGCP

Server.
Products MALC
voip-plar
The subscriber PLAR (private line automatic ringdown) subscriber. If true we

immediately send a INVITE instead of play dial tone.
Default false
Notes This parameter applies to only SIP signaling.
Products MALC
voip-plar-dest-ipaddr
The destination IP address or domain name of the device to send INVITE to

in case the subscriber is PLAR (private line automatic ringdown).
Notes This parameter applies to only SIP signaling. To use this setting, the voip-plar
parameter must be set to true.
Products MALC

Voice
voip-plar-dest-ipaddrtype
The type of address contained in the associated instance of

VoipPlarDestIpAddr.
Default ipv4
Products MALC
voip-server-entry-index
Specfied in the SIP dialplan and when the viop-server-entry index is created,
this number is used to associate dialplans and VOIP registration servers.
voip-udp-port
Specifies the UDP Port number for the VOIP Setup messages. 5060 is the
IANA Registered SIP port.
Default 5060
Products MALC
voip-username
A unique string that identifies the VOIP user in the system.

Default none
Products MALC
zhoneVoipServerAddr
The address of a VOIP server this user agent will use to proxy/redirect calls.
Default none

Parameters
Products MALC
zhoneVoipServerAddrType
The type of address

Default ipv4
Products MALC
zhoneVoipServerUdpPortNumber
Specifies the UDP Port number for the MGCP Gateway. 2427 is the IANA
Registered MGCP Gateway port.
Default 2427
Products MALC
User
data-access
Indicates whether the specified user has data privileges.

database-access
Indicates whether the specified user has database privileges.

debug access
Indicates whether the specified user has debug privileges. This parameter is
read-only.

User

user-admin-access
Indicates whether the specified user has user-admin privileges that enable the
user to create user accounts.
user-id
Specifies the user ID for this user.

user-name
Specifies the user name.

user-pass
Specifies the password for this user.

Notes Use the changepass or resetpass commands to change user account
passwords.
user-prompt
Specifies the user-prompt for this user.


Parameters
zhone-access
Indicates whether the specified user has Zhone privileges.

ZMS
ackedseqno
Acknowledged trap sequence number. This field is set by the ZMS in order to
acknowledge a trap sent by the device. There will be only one trap
outstanding on the acknowledged flow at one time so this is the last sequence
number sent. If not, it is ignored.
resendseqno
This is set by the ZMS in order to have the device resend saved traps because
one or more were lost in transmission. The device will resend traps starting at
this sequence number.
This is used only on the unacknowledged trap flow. This is the only indication
of whether any traps have been acknowledged.
Notes Due to resource constraints not all traps may be available to be resent. The
first trap that the device resends indicates whether or not any traps were
deleted or lost.
zmsconnectionstatus
The status of the connection between this device and the Zhone Management
System, if one exists. This value can either be set directly by ZMS or by the
device internally when a SNMP request is processed from the ZMS. Devices
not being proxied by another entity, since they are not being polled by ZMS,
will set this state according to the communication channel state between this
device and the connected entity.
Values active
inactive
Default inactive

ZMS
Location system
zmsexists
Indicates whether or not this device is being managed by the Zhone

Management System. This is can be set only by the ZMS.
Management operations depend on this setting. For example, if this device is
not managed by ZMS, no configuration synchronization processing is
performed on behalf of the device.
Values true
The device is managed by the ZMS.
false
The device is not managed by the ZMS.
Default no
Location system
zmsipaddress
The ZMS IP address for which configuration synchronization messages and

any other special handling is performed. This can be set either via CLI or
ZMS.
Location system

Parameters

INDEX
Numerics C
1st command 98 card parameters 203
card type, displaying 61
A cautions, description of 7
ccshow command 39
about this guide cd command 42
acronyms 8 CES parameters 211
cautions 7 changepass command 42, 43
contacting GSS 9 CLEI codes, displaying 61
intended audience 7 CLI
notes 7 abbreviated input 19
ordering additional documents 9 ADSL parameters 169
related documents 9 ATM parameters 181
style and notation conventions 7 bridging parameters 199
tips 7 card parameters 203
typographical conventions 7 CES parameters 211
warnings 7 clocking parameters 214
acronyms, description of 8 command completion 22
adduser command 27 command shortcuts 21
ADSL parameters 169 commands 27
alarm command 28 complete input 19
alphaValue parameter 277 control commands 21
ata command 28 delete command 26
ATM DHCP parameters 216
SCR and PCR, configuring allowable values DNS parameters 229
for 196 DS1 parameters 232
specifying VPI for auto-created profiles 159 DS3 parameters 239
UBR and usage-parameter-control 196 DSL parameters 245
ATM parameters 181 ELCP parameters 251
atmping command 29 Ethernet parameters 254
atmvclshow command 30 finding a command 17
audience, intended 7 FXS/FXO parameters 259
GR303 parameters 265
B help with commands 16
If-index parameters 273
basic control commands, description of 24 ifTypes 21
betaValue parameter 277 IMA parameters 274
bootstate command 32 insert and change commands 25
bridge command 32 introduction 11
bridge flush command 35 IP parameters 279
bridge-path command 37 ISDN parameters 286
bridging parameters 199 logging in 12
logical indexes 13

Index
modifying records 18 bootstate 32

movement and search commands 24 bridge 32
MTAC parameters 288 bridge-path 37
network time protocol parameters 290 ccshow 39
overview 13 cd 42
parameters 169 changepass 42, 43
physical addresses 13 clkmgrshow 43
PON parameters 292 command completion 22
PPPoA parameters 293 commit 42, 44
profile addresses and indexes 15 control commands 21
profiles and records 22 copy 45
put and undo commands 26 create 46
record addresses and indexes 13 crossconnect 46
RIP parameters 307 datastorestats 49
RS232 parameters 311 del 50
saving changes 19 delete 14, 18, 21, 26, 50
Sechtor 100A environmental parameters 319 deleteuser 52
SHDSL parameters 313 description 27
SNMP parameters 320 dir 52
SONET parameters 322 ds1relay 53
subscriber parameters 328 ds1rpshow 54, 55
system indexes 13 dslstat 57
system parameters 330 dump 59
terminology 11 eeset 60
user parameters 362 eeshow 52, 61
V5.2 parameters 333 featurebitdisplay 62
VDSL parameters 346 featurebitset 62
voice parameters 346 fhrameping 63
ZMS parameters 364 file 63
clkmgrshow command 43 filter 64
clocking find 17, 67
eligible and non-eligible sources 43 find-matching-data 69
viewing system 43 find-matching-subvoice 69
clocking parameters 214 get 14, 76
comands gr303showcrv 77
bridge flush 35 help 78
command shortcuts help with 16
basic control 24 history 79
delete command 26 host 80
insert and change commands 25 ifxlate 82
movement and search commands 24 image 82
put and undo commands 26 imalink 84
commands imarpshow 85
1st 98 imatppshow 87
adduser 27 initiateconfigsync 45, 88
alarm 28 insert and change 25
ata 28 interface 88
atmping 29 linegroup 90
atmvclshow 30 list 27, 92
basic control 24 load 94

log 95 su 141
logout 98 swversion 142
mcast 99 syslog 142
mkdir 100 systemreboot 145
movement and search 24 systemrpshow 145
msg 100 telnet 146
mtac-linetest 101 thermoshow 146
new 18, 101 timeout 146
ping 103 traceroute 147
pollzhonecpe 104 update 18, 20, 148
profiles and records 22 updateuser 149
put and undo 26 verbose-restore-off 150
pwd 104 verbose-restore-on 150
resetcliprov 105 voice 150, 154, 155, 156
resetpass 105 voicestat 157
restore 104, 105 who 159
rip 106 whoami 159
rmdir 108 commit command 42, 44
romversion 108 Config sync, initiating 45, 88
route 109 configuration
sar8260 112 specifying VPI for auto-created profiles 159
selftest 116 conventions
set 119 style and notation 7
set2default 119 typographical 7
setcliprov 119 copy command 45
setdatetime 120 create command 46
setline 121 creating ip-interface profile, example of 18
setprompt 121 crossconnect command 46
shelfctrl 121
shelfreboot 124 D
shortcuts 21
show 125 datastorestats command 49
showactivecards 126 del command 50
showdatetime 126 delete command 14, 18, 21, 26, 50
showhostname 126 deleteuser command 52
showinetstat 126, 127 DHCP parameters 216
showline 128 diagnostics
showlinestatus 129 type of tests to run 116
showmem 130 diffDelayMax parameter 276
showredundancy 132 dir command 52
showresolver 132 DNS parameters 229
showsonetrp 132 documents, ordering additional 9
showuser 134 documents, related 9
showzhonecpe 134 DS1 parameters 232
slotreboot 134 ds1relay command 53
slots 135 ds1rpshow command 54, 55
snmp 136 DS3 parameters 239
sonetstatsshow 138 DSL parameters 245
sonetstatusshow 140 dslstat command 57
stack 140

Index
dump command 59 alphaValue 277

betaValue 277
E diffDelayMax 276
displaying group status 85
eeset command 60 displaying test pattern procedure status 87
eeshow command 52, 61 gammaValue 277
ELCP parameters 251 groupSymmetry 274
Ethernet parameters 254 imaGroupDiffDelayMaxObs 276
imaGroupFeTxClkMode 275
F imaGroupLeastDelayLink 276
imaGroupRxFrameLength 276
featurebitdisplay command 62 imaGroupTxTimingRefLink 275
featurebitset command 62 minNumRxLinks 275
fhrameping command 63 minNumTxLinks 274
file command 63 parameters 274
filter command 64 testLinkIfindex 277
find command 17, 67 txClkMode 275
finding a command 17 image command 82
find-matching-data command 69 imaGroupDiffDelayMaxObs 276
find-matching-subvoice command 69 imaGroupFeTxTimingRefLink parameter 275
FXS/FXO parameters 259 imaGroupLeastDelayLink parameter 276
imaGroupRxFrameLength parameter 276
G imalink command 84
imarpshow command 85
imatppshow command 87
gammaValue parameter 277
initiateconfigsync command 45, 88
get command 14, 76
insert and change commands 25
Global Service and Support, See GSS
interface command 88
GR303 parameters 265
introduction to CLI 11
gr303showcrv command 77
Inverse Multiplexing over ATM, See IMA
groupSymmetry parameter 274
IP
GSS, contacting 9
statistics 127
IP parameters 279
H ip-interface profile, creation 18
ip-interface-record, updating 20
help command 78 ISDN parameters 286
help with commands
description 16
finding a command 17
L
help command 16
line group
history command 79
displaying 90
host command 80
linegroup command 90
list command 92
I load command 94
log command 95
ifindex parameter 288 logging
If-index parameters 273 enabling/disabling for session 95, 142
ifTypes, list of 21 enabling/disabling over the serial craft port 95,
ifxlate command 82 142
IMA

logging into CLI 12 DS3 239
logical indexes, description of 13 DSL 245
logout command 98 ELCP 251
Ethernet 254
M FXS/FXO 259
gammaValue 277
mcast command 99 GR303 265
minNumRxLinks parameter 275 If-index 273
minNumTxLinks parameter 274 IMA 274
mkdir command 100 imaGroupDiffDelayMaxObs 276
modifying records imaGroupLeastDelayLink 276
delete command 18, 21 imaGroupRxFrameLength 276
new command 18 IP 279
update command 18, 20 ISDN 286
movement and search commands 24 MTAC card 288
msg command 100 network time protocol 290
MTAC card PON 292
ifindex 288 PPPoA 293
parameters 288 RIP 307
test_mode 288 RS232 311
mtac-linetest command 101 Sechtor 100A environmental 319
SHDSL 313
N SNMP 320
SONET 322
network time protocol parameters 290 subscriber 328
new command 18, 101 system 330
notes, description of 7 testLinkIfindex 277
user 362
O V5.2 333
VDSL 346
voice 346
overview of the CLI 13
ZMS 364
physical addresses, description of 13
P ping command 103
pollzhonecpe command 104
parameters PON parameters 292
ADSL 169 PPPoA parameters 293
alphabetical list 169 profile addresses and indexes 15
alphaValue 277 profiles and records
ATM 181 addresses and indexes 15
betaValue 277 commands 22
bridging 199 delete command 14, 21
card 203 get command 14
CES 211 modifying 18
clocking 214 update command 20
DHCP 216 viewing 16
diffDelayMax 276 put and undo commands 26
displaying valid values 19 pwd command 104
DNS 229
DS1 232

Index
R SNMP parameters 320

SONET parameters 322
record addresses and indexes sonetstatsshow command 138
logical indexes 13 sonetstatusshow command 140
physical indexes 13 stack command 140
system indexes 13 statistics
types of records 13 displaying IP 127
records, modifying 18 su command 141
resetcliprov command 105 subscriber parameters 328
resetpass command 105 swversion command 142
restore command 104, 105 syslog command 142
rip command 106 system
RIP parameters 307 displaying temperature 121
rmdir command 108 system indexes, description of 13
romversion command 108 system parameters 330
route command 109 systemreboot command 145
RS232 parameters 311 systemrpshow command 145
S T
sar8260 command 112 telnet command 146

Sechtor 100A environmental parameters 319 temperature, displaying 121
selftest command 116 terminology used in document 11
serial number, displaying 61 test_mode parameter 288
set command 119 testLinkIfindex parameter 277
set2default command 119 thermoshow command 146
setcliprov command 119 timeout command 146
setdatetime command 120 tips, description of 7
setline command 121 traceroute command 147
setprompt command 121 txClkMode parameter 275
SHDSL parameters 313
shelfctrl command 121 U
shelfreboot command 124
show command 125 UBR
showactivecards command 126 modem train rates and 196
showdatetime command 126 update command 18, 20, 148
showhostname command 126 updateuser command 149
showinetstat command 126, 127 updating ip-interface-record, example of 20
showline command 128 user parameters 362
showlinestatus command 129 users
showmem command 130 updating accounts 149
showredundancy command 132
showresolver command 132 V
showsonetrp command 132
showuser command 134 V5.2 parameters 333
showzhonecpe command 134 values
slotreboot command 134 displaying valid 19
slots command 135 VDSL parameters 346
snmp command 136 verbose-restore-off command 150

verbose-restore-on command 150
viewing profiles and records 16
voice command 150, 154, 155, 156
voice parameters 346
voicestat command 157
W
warnings, description of 7
who command 159
whoami command 159
Z
ZMS
synchronizing with device 45, 88
ZMS parameters 364

Malc 1 11 2 CLIRefGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Malc 1 11 2 CLIRefGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Zhone CLI Reference Guide

For software version 1.11.2

2 Zhone CLI Reference Guide

About This Guide ...............................................................................................................................7

Chapter 1 Introduction to the CLI ........................................................................................11

Zhone CLI Reference Guide 3

Movement and search commands ....................................................................24

Chapter 2 Commands ...............................................................................................................27

Alphabetic List of Parameters..................................................................................................161

Chapter 3 Parameters .............................................................................................................169

4 Zhone CLI Reference Guide

Zhone CLI Reference Guide 5

6 Zhone CLI Reference Guide

This guide is intended for use by system users or administrators.

Note: This document describes all the parameters and commands in

Style and notation conventions

Caution: A caution alerts users to conditions or actions that could

Note: A note provides important supplemental or amplified

Tip: A tip provides additional information that enables users to more

WARNING! A warning alerts users to conditions or actions that

WARNING! A warning with this icon alerts users to conditions or

Zhone CLI Reference Guide 7

Bold Used for names of buttons, dialog boxes, icons, menus,

PLAIN UPPER Used for environment variables.

Table 1: Acronyms and their descriptions

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

BAN Broadband Access Node

DSL Digital Subscriber Line

HDSL2 High-bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line

IAD Integrated Access Device

MIB Management Information Base

PBX Private Branch Exchange

SDSL Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line

SLMS Single Line Multi-Service

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol

VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

8 Zhone CLI Reference Guide

Table 1: Acronyms and their descriptions

VCL Virtual Channel Link

ZMS Zhone Management System

Contacting Global Service and Support

If you require assistance with the installation or operation of your product, or

If you purchased the product from an authorized dealer, distributor, Value

If the product malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by the

Zhone CLI Reference Guide 9

10 Zhone CLI Reference Guide

Address Every physical interface in the system has an address.

CLI The command line interface. Used to configure the

Zhone CLI Reference Guide 11

Command Commands are used to view, add, delete and configure

Profile A profile is a template that is used to create records. For

Profile index An index for a profile. Profiles not associated with

Record A record is an instance of a profile associated with a

Subscriber Subscribers are remote users to which the Zhone system

User A user is an administrator of the Zhone system. Users

12 Zhone CLI Reference Guide

Automatically provisioned if-translate records

The system automatically provisions certain if-translate records. These

Zhone CLI Reference Guide 13

delete Deletes a record.

get Displays the contents of a record.